Owner`s manual | Ford 5C2S-19A268-AA Automobile User Manual

D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
Owner's Manual
Model
Digital Multitrack Recorder
1
D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
CAUTION
CAUTION:
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY
INSERT.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
ATTENTION:
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA
FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE
DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU' AU FOND.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within
the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient
the literature accompanying the appliance.
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
"WARNING"
"TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE."
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
9. Heat - The appliance should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
appliances (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
10. Power Sources - The appliance should be connected to a
power supply only of the type described in the operating
instructions or as marked on the appliance.
11. Grounding or Polarization - The precautions that should be
taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an
appliance is not defeated.
12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be routed
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items
placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to
cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where
they exit from the appliance.
13. Cleaning - The appliance should be cleaned only as
recommended by the manufacturer.
14. Nonuse Periods - The power cord of the appliance should be
unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period
of time.
15. Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that objects
do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through
openings.
16. Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced
by qualified service personnel when:
A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
appliance; or
C. The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D. The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure
damaged.
17. Servicing - The user should not attempt to service the
appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions.
All other servicing should be referred to qualified service
personnel.
1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.
2. Retain Instructions - The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions should
be followed.
5. Water and Moisture - The appliance should not be used near
water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink,
laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and
the like.
6. Carts and Stands - The appliance should be used only with a
cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause
the appliance and cart combination to overturn.
7. Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be mounted to
a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
8. Ventilation - The appliance should be situated so that its location
or position dose not interfere with its proper ventilation.
For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed,
sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation
openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase
or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation
openings.
2
D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
Table of Contents
Introduction.......................................................................................6
Precautions.......................................................................................6
Notes about power supply.......................................................................6
Notes on handling the hard disk............................................................7
Notes on the setup location.....................................................................7
Notes on repair.........................................................................................8
About copyrights......................................................................................8
About damages.........................................................................................8
Notes on using the Detachable Controller.............................................8
How to use a dust cap (included)............................................................8
Main Features of D-160..........................................................................9
Names and Functions..........................................................................12
Front panel..............................................................................................13
Detachable controller............................................................................14
Rear panel...............................................................................................23
Display section.......................................................................................25
1. Display shown when the power is turned on....................................25
2. Preset display........................................................................................25
3. Switching the display using the DISP SEL key...................................26
4. Switching the Time Base display
using the EXECUTE/YES key and DISP SEL key...........................27
5. Changing Programs using the STORE key and
the HOLD/> key.............................................................................28
6. Warning messages................................................................................29
Before operating the D-160.................................................................32
1. Hard disk recording method and the REMAIN display..................32
2. Audio file and Event..........................................................................33
3. Program Change function.................................................................35
4. Real track and Additional track........................................................36
5. Input monitor and Repro monitor...................................................37
6. Time Base............................................................................................38
7. Installing and formatting a hard disk..............................................39
Installing a removable hard disk cartridge...........................................40
Replacing a removable hard disk cartridge..........................................41
Installing a hard disk in removable case Model 9040B........................42
Formatting a hard disk............................................................................43
8. Extending the detachable controller...............................................44
Recording/Playback............................................................................46
1.Basic connections................................................................................46
2. The default setting on the D-160.....................................................48
2-1. Setting a Program.............................................................................49
2-2. Program Change...............................................................................50
2-3. Deleting a Program...........................................................................51
2-4. Setting a Sampling Rate....................................................................52
3. Analog Recording and Playback.......................................................53
3
D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
3-1. Basic recording and playback.........................................................53
3-2. Recording with the Program Change function.............................54
3-3. Playback using the Vari-pitch function.........................................56
3-4. Multitrack recording using overdubbing......................................57
3-5. Mixdown............................................................................................58
3-6. Ping-pong recording........................................................................59
4. Digital Recording...............................................................................60
4-1. Digital recording from an external digital device (S/P DIF)........60
4-2. Digital recording to an external digital device .............................63
4-3. Connecting a digital mixer..............................................................65
Locate function....................................................................................67
1. Storing memory data........................................................................67
2. Locate..................................................................................................69
3. Auto Play mode..................................................................................70
4. Auto Return mode.............................................................................70
4-1. Setting the Auto Return Start/End point.......................................71
5. Auto Repeat mode.............................................................................74
Punch In/Out.........................................................................................75
1. Auto Punch In/Out............................................................................76
1-1. Storing the Punch In/Out point......................................................76
1-2. Auto Punch In/Out Rehearsal mode..............................................78
1-3. Auto Punch In/Out Take mode.......................................................79
1-4. Undo/Redo of Auto Punch In..........................................................80
2. Punch In/Out recording using a foot switch..................................81
2-1. Punch In/Out Rehearsal..................................................................82
2-2. Punch In/Out Take...........................................................................83
2-3. Undo/Redo of Manual Punch In/Out............................................84
Edit function.........................................................................................85
1. Copy & Paste......................................................................................86
1-1. Copying.............................................................................................86
1-2. Copy & Pasting.................................................................................88
1-3. Copy & Paste Undo/Redo................................................................90
2. Move & Paste......................................................................................91
2-1. Moving...............................................................................................91
2-2. Move & Pasting.................................................................................93
2-3. Move & Paste Undo/Redo...............................................................95
3. Erase....................................................................................................96
3-1. How to Erase data for a specific part
between ABS 0 and ABS END........................................................97
3-2. Undo and Redo of the erase operation..........................................98
3-3. How to Erase data in its entirety from
a specified point up to ABS END..................................................99
3-4. Undo and Redo of the erase operation........................................100
3-5. Erasing specific data......................................................................101
Saving/Loading Song Data...............................................................102
1. Saving the data using DATA OUT..................................................104
2. Loading the data using DATA IN ...................................................106
3. Saving the data using SCSI..............................................................108
4
D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
4. Compatibility with D-90, D-80 (V2.0),DMT-8 (V2.0),
and DMT-8VL.............................................................................116
MIDI sync function.............................................................................117
1. MIDI clock sync system..................................................................117
2. MTC sync/MIDI machine control system.....................................120
3. Multitrack system by the slave mode...........................................123
4. External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode.........127
5. Sync system with "adat" by the slave mode.................................130
6. Multitrack system using a D-90/D-80 (Ver.2)
/DMT-8 (Ver.2/VL)....................................................................133
Setup mode.........................................................................................137
1. How to enter the Setup Mode.........................................................137
2. How to set each mode......................................................................142
2-1. Track Swapping ("Track Exchange?")..........................................142
2-2. Time Signature Setting (Signature Set?").....................................143
2-3. Tempo Setting ("Tempo Map Set?").............................................145
2-4. Program Title setting ("TitleEdit PGM?").....................................147
2-5. Program Delete ("Delete PGM?")..................................................147
2-6. Metronome Setting ("Click ?")...................................................148
2-7. Preroll Time Setting ("Preroll Time?").........................................149
2-8. MIDI Sync Signal Out Setting (Midi Sync Out?").........................150
2-9. MTC Frame Rate Setting ("Frame Rate?")....................................151
2-10. MTC Offset Time Setting ("MTC Offset?")..................................152
2-11. MTC Offset Mode Setting ("MTC Offset?").................................153
2-12. Slave Mode Setting ("Slave Mode?")...........................................154
2-13. Slave Mode Type Setting ("Slave Type?")..................................155
2-14. Record Protect Setting ("Rec Protect?").....................................156
2-15. Digital Input Track Setting ("Digi. In?").....................................157
2-16. Digital Output Track Setting ("Digi. Out?")...............................159
2-17. Bar/Beat Resolution Mode Setting (" Resolution?").............160
2-18. MIDI Device ID Setting ("Device ID?")........................................161
2-19. Sampling Frequency Setting ("Sample Rate?").........................162
2-20. Event Number Check on Each Track ("NOs Of Event?")...........163
2-21. Current Drive Setting ("Drive Sel.?").........................................164
2-22. Loading Song Data ("Load PGM?").............................................165
2-23. Saving Song Data ("Save PGM?")................................................168
2-24. Formatting IDE/SCSI disk ("Disk Format?")..............................171
MIDI Implementation Chart................................................................172
MMC command list.............................................................................173
Inquiry Message list...........................................................................173
Fostex MIDI System Exclusive Message Format............................174
Maintenance..................................................................................189
Specifications................................................................................189
5
D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Fostex Model D-160.
The D-160 is a 16-track digital multitrack recorder with eight additional tracks that employs
a 3.5-inch E-IDE type removable hard disk as the recording media, instead of conventional
tape. An optional Model 9041 (1.3GB removable hard disk cartridge), is available for 16track (plus additional tracks) recording and playback.
A total of 240 minutes recording/playback time is available based on a single track
calculation.
The D-160 achieves high-quality recording/playback with 16-bit linear quantization and
a non-compression recording technique with two "Adat I/O" (switchable for S/P DIF),
which enables 16-track simultaneous recording (8 analog, 8 digital/16 digital) as well as
8-track simultaneous recording and 16-track simultaneous playback.
You can easily configure a fully digital recording system by combining the D-160 with
various types of digital mixing consoles. You can back up recordings from the hard disk
to an Adat machine, or to a DAT machine.
Also, high speed backup is available via a standard SCSI terminal.
The D-160 features a +/-6% Vari-pitch function, and various non-destructive edit functions,
such as copy, move & paste, erase, etc., that use three Time Bases.
Furthermore, it facilitates a complete MIDI environment by supporting MTC and MMC,
output of MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer via an internal Tempo Map, and advanced
controls by FEX.
It also has a Program Change function to manage up to 99 Programs, and you can assign
a title to each song (Program).
Installing an optional 8345 TC/SYNC card enables the D-160 to support slave operation
for the incoming LTC, and synchronization with video reference signals and Word Clock,
as well as to output Word Clock signal to an external digital device. Installing an optional
5041 balanced 8-16 I/O card would add +4dBu analog, balanced I/Os.
Please read this User's Guide thoroughly and keep it in a safe place so that you will be
able to produce high-definition, high tonal quality music and make the best use of the D160 for a long time.
Precautions
Notes about power supply
*
Be sure to connect the D-160 to the power supply specified in the Specifications
section of this Owner's Manual. Do not use an AC outlet of any other voltage.
*
Do not connect the D-160 to the same AC outlet to which devices that could generate
noise (such as a large motor or dimmer), or devices that consume a large amount
of power such as an air conditioning system or a large electric heater are connected.
*
If you use the unit in an area with a different power voltage, first consult your
dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station. You can use the unit with a power
frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz.
*
It is very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or damaged.
In such a case, stop using the unit immediately and ask your dealer to repair
the cord.
*
To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the D-160, avoid contact with
water or other liquids. Do not handle the power plug while your hands are
wet.
6
D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
*
To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the D-160, do not remove the
main unit cover or reach the inside the unit.
*
Do not let water or other liquids, or metal objects such as pins,
accidentally get into the D-160 because this may lead to electric shock or damage.
Should water enter the inside of the unit, remove the power plug from the AC
outlet, and consult your dealer or nearest FOSTEX service station.
*
To prevent damage to the D-160, be sure to turn on any connected devices
first, and then turn on the power to the D-160.
When you removing or connectting the cables to the input/output connectors
on the D-160, make sure that the channel INPUT faders and volume controls
are set to "0."
Notes on handling the hard disk
*
"FORMAT FIRST".
You need to format the optional hard disk prior to start recording if a brand
new hard disk drive has been installed.
Refer to the explanation of "2-24. Disk Format ?" menu on the Setup mode.
We recommend that you better the hard disk before you start fresh recording
on it.
However, be also aware of that the formatting process will erase all the recorded
song data.
*
The D-160 is equipped with a high-precision hard disk. Do not expose the unit
to excessive vibration at any time. In particular, do not move the unit or allow
any impact to the unit when the power is on.
*
Before turning the power off to the D-160, first quit Setup mode and make sure that the
recorder section is stopped. Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to the unit
while the hard disk is accessing data (the HD ACCESS LED is lit or flashing).
Otherwise, not only will you lose recorded data, but you may damage the D-160.
FOSTEX is not responsible for data lost during operation of the D-160.
*
Pack the D-160 in its shipping carton or an impact-resistant case, if you plan to
relocate it.
Make sure that the D-160 is kept free from external vibration or impact since
the it is very sensitive to vibration.
* If you wish to replace the included removable hard disk with another hard disk,
refer to "Before operating the D-160" on page "39."
Notes on the setup location
*
Do not install the D-160 in locations subject to the following:
* Extremely high or low temperature, or significant changes in temperature
* Excessive humidity or dust
* Excessive changes in power supply voltage
* Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking surfaces
* Close to strong magnetic fields (such as a TV or speakers)
*
If you move the D-160 from a place with an excessively low temperature to a warm
place, or if you use the D-160 in a room in where the temperature varies significantly
during winter, condensation may occur on the hard disk or other parts.
In such cases, leave the D-160 in its new location for about an hour before you turn
on the power.
7
D-160 Owner's Manual (Introduction)
Notes on repair
*
The D-160 does not use any parts that users can repair easily.
Contact your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station to ask about repairs.
*
Do not throw the original carton box and packing material away.
You should use them when transporting the D-160.
The warranty will not cover damage due to improper packaging.
Also, Fostex is not responsible for damage occuring during transit.
About copyrights
*
It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording or video images or audio data
for which a copyright is possessed by a third party for commercial purposes such as
contents, broadcasts, sales, or distribution - any purpose other than for your personal
pleasure.
About damages
*
Fostex is not responsible for any "direct damage" or "indirect damage" caused by
using the D-160.
Notes on using the Detachable Controller
*
When you use the detachable controller remotely using an extension cable, the D160 may malfunction due to electromagnetic interference. In this case, turn the
power off, and then on to the D-160 to restore the normal condition.
Fostex is not responsible for any malfunction of the D-160 caused by electromagnetic
interference.
How to use a dust cap (included)
*
Plug the included dust cap onto the connector of the D-160's removable hard
disk to protect the disk from static electricity, dust and dirt before you store or
transport the hard disk.
<WARNING>
A hard disk is precision device. Handle it with care and avoid vibration,
humidity, strong magnetic fields, static electricity, dust, etc.
In particular, do not touch the connector with your hands to protect the hard
disk from static electricity.
Removable hard disk
Plug the dust cap onto the connector.
(Do not touch the connector with your
hands.)
8
D-160 Owner's Manual (Main features of D-160)
Main Features of D-160
The D-160 is equipped with the following functions:
* Employs a 3.5 inch E-IDE type removable hard disk system.
With an optional 9041 (1.3GB removable hard disk cartridge),
16-track (plus additional 8 tracks) recording and playback.
Total 240 minutes recording/playback time based on a single
track calculation.
* Non-compression recording/16 bit linear quantization and
sampling rates of 44.1kHz and 48kHz (assignable for each Program
and each playback), achieving true CD quality.
“Adat optical I/O” (switchable to S/P DIF), enables 16-track
simultaneous recording (8 analog, 8 digital). Connecting adat
output (x2) of a digital console and adat optical inputs (x2) of the
D-160 allows for 16-track simultaneous digital recording.
* Employs a new disk management method, “FDMS-3” (Fostex Disk
Management System-3). With this method, only the recorded
part consumes the disk space, which allows highly efficient
multitrack recording.
* Program Change function for managing up to 99 Programs (each
Program title editable).
Non-volatile locate memory for each Program, with a pre-roll time
of 0 - 10 seconds.
* Bar/beat Resolution function for storing memory in Bar/Beat units.
* Significantly improved efficiency with an FL display that features
a high-visibility 16-character indication.
* Erase Program function and Delete Program function, convenient
for efficient song management.
* MIDI IN/OUT/THRU terminals support the output of MIDI clock
and Song Position Pointers via an internal Tempo Map, as well as
support MTC/MMC. They also support advanced recorder control
via FEX (Fostex System Exclusive) for advanced functions. These
terminals, along with the functions to store the MTC output offset
by Bar/Beat, to store 24-hour MTC offset, and to display
external MTC (or LTC), will facilitate configuring an integrated
MIDI environment.
9
D-160 Owner's Manual (Main features of D-160)
* A programmable internal Tempo Map, with a selection of eleven
time signatures and a quarter note range of 30 to 250, and
Metronome function.
* REC Protect function to prevent accidental recording
* Number Of Events Monitor function that monitors the overflow
of events.
The number of created events can be displayed for each track.
* Installing an optional 8345 TC/SYNC card allows for the MTC-toLTC conversion and output, as well as the slave operation for
incoming LTC.
It also allows for synchronization with video reference signals
and Word Clock, as well as output of Word Clock signal to an
external digital device.
* Selectable reference time code (MTC/LTC), with six frame rates
(24/25/30ND/30DF/29.97ND/29.97DF).
* Wide selection of slave types (Vari, S/P DIF, adat, Free), 8345
clock (INT/VIDEO/WORD/AUTO), and WORD out (8345/D-160)
to support various sync environment. Eight Sync Presets available
to recall complex sync settings at once.
* The optional 5041 will add eight +4dBu, analog balanced inputs
(D-SUB25 pin x 1) and 16 outputs (D-SUB25 pin x 2) to the D160’s -10dBV unbalanced I/Os (RCA pin).
* Adat backup as well as conventional DAT backup supported.
Equipped with a standard SCSI interface, which allows for a highspeed data backup to an external SCSI device.
Also, a Save Length Setting function enables backup of the
specified part of a Song.
* +/-6% Vari-pitch function for fine pitch adjustment without
significant tonal quality deterioration.
* Sixteen standard tracks, plus eight additional tracks (Tr. 17-24).
* Track Exchange function for swapping any tracks 1-24.
Track exchange of eight tracks (1-8, 9-16, 17-24) is also available.
* Detachable controller, which can be extended up to 10 meters
with two optional 8551 extension cables (5m).
10
D-160 Owner's Manual (Main features of D-160)
* High-speed edit functions, typical for a hard disk, such as nondestructive copy & paste, move & paste, erase, and undo/redo.
You can also specify the number of repeated operations (up to 99
times).
* Three Time Base (ABS, MTC, Bar/Beat), REMAIN indication based
on each Time Base, and indication of remaining hard disk space.
* Auto Punch In/Out with rehearsal, Auto RTN/Play, Locate ABS 0,
and Locate ABS END function for checking the recording end point.
* Digital scrubbing with the JOG dial, and audio cue with the
SHUTTLE dial.
11
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
FRONT PANEL (with the detachable remote controller)
AUTO RTN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
POWER
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
FRONT PANEL (with the detachable controller removed)
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
D-160
POWER
REAR PANEL
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
4
ANALOG IN
3
2
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
4
DATA
3
2
1
INPUT
9~16
8
7
6
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1~8
9
12
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
MIDI
OUTPUT
9~6
1~8
INPUT
OUTPUT
THRU
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
Names and Functions
<Front Panel (with the detachable controller removed)>
1
3
4
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
5
D-160
POWER
6
2
7
1. Detachable remote controller connector
The detachable remote controller is connected here.
You can remove the controller. Connect the optional extension cable (Model 8551) to
extend the distance.
* Refer to page "44" for information on extending the detachable remote controller connection.
2. Power switch
This switch turns the main power to the D-160 on/off.
<WARNING !>
Before turning the power off to the D-160, first quit the Setup mode and make sure that the
recorder section is stopped. Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to the unit while the
hard disk is accessing data (the HD ACCESS LED is lit or flashing).
Otherwise, not only will you lose recorded data, you may damage to the unit.
3. Controller mount
The detachable remote controller is mounted on the front panel.
4. Hard disk access LED
This LED lights up or blinks when the hard disk is writing or reading data. (Same as the
HD ACCESS LED on the detachable remote controller.)
5. Hard disk power LED
This LED lights up if the hard disk operates correctly when you turn the power on to the
unit. If the Lock key is unlocked, the power to the hard disk will not be turned on, and
the LED will not light up.
6. Removable hard disk cartridge slot
This slot is used to insert a removable hard disk cartridge. This system allows you to
replace the hard disk easily.
* Refer to page "41" for more information on how to replace the removable hard disk cartridge.
<Note>
This slot is covered by a dust-proof panel when the unit is shipped from the factory.
Remove this panel in order to insert a cartridge.
13
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
<Note>
The D-160 package contains a removable case (without a hard disk). Install your hard disk in
this removable case.
The optional Model 9041 (1.3GB removable hard disk cartridge) contains a hard disk, which
allows you to record and play back about 15 minutes of data (16-tracks recording, FS: 44.1
kHz) without having to install a case.
* Refer to page "39" for more information on the hard disk models that have already been
ested for operation on the D-160.
7. Lock/Unlock key
When you remove or install the hard disk cartridge, you need to lock/unlock here using
the included key.
<Note>
Be sure to turn the power off to the D-160 before locking or unlocking.
<Detachable Controller>
8
9
10
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
11
12 14 17
13
16 15 18 19
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
42
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
20
21
22
23
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
39 40
41
31
34 35 36 37 38 25
32 30 29 28 33 26
24
27
8. Meter display
This meter display shows the signal level and settings.
* Refer to the “Display section” on page "25."
9. Record Track Select key [RECORD TRACK]
The Record Track Select key selects "SAFE-READY" for the recording track.
When you press this key once, the track enters the READY status, and the track indication
on the display will blink. Pressing it again changes this status to "SAFE" and the track
indication will go out. When you start recording, the blinking track indication illuminates.
When you press only the RECORD button while the track is in the READY status, the track
becomes an input monitor, allowing you to adjust the recording level.
Pressing only the RECORD button again, and the track become a reproduction monitor.
This key is also used to select a track for the Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase, or other
editing operation.
* Refer to page "37" for details about the reproduction monitor and the input monitor.
14
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
10. Shift key [SHIFT]
Use this key to choose recording tracks.
When the shift LED lights off, it allows you to choose track 1~8.
When the LED is on, tracks 9~16 can be chosen.
11. Auto Play/Auto Return key
Pressing this key repeatedly will change Auto Play mode, Auto Return mode, and Repeat
mode On/Off as follows: (
: LED off,
: LED light up)
AUTO RTN
Auto Play/Auto Return OFF (All LEDs are off.)
AUTO PLAY
AUTO RTN
Auto Play ON (Only the AUTO PLAY LED is lit.)
AUTO PLAY
AUTO RTN
Auto Return ON (Only the AUTO RTN LED is lit.)
AUTO PLAY
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
Auto Repeat ON (Both AUTO PLAY and AUTO RTN LEDs are lit.)
Auto Play mode:
In this mode, playback will start automatically after the START point is located.
This function is effective at any locate points other than the ABS END point.
Auto Return mode:
When the END point is reached during playback, the START point is automatically
located in this mode. This function is effective only when the START and END points
have been specified.
<Note>
The Auto Return function is works only during playback. In the recording mode, the
START point will not be located automatically when the END point is reached.
Auto Repeat mode:
This mode is a combination of Auto Play and Auto Return, and plays back the part
between the START and END points repeatedly. The auto repeat function is effective
only when the START and END points have been specified correctly.
* Refer to page "67" for details.
12. Clipboard In key [CLIPBOARD IN]
This key is used to store and recall the In point (CLIPBOARD IN point) for the Copy or
Move operation. You can locate a stored CLIPBOARD IN point.
* Refer to page “85” for copying/moving data.
* Refer to page "67" for locating the CLIPBOARD IN point.
13. Clipboard Out key [CLIPBOARD OUT]
This key is used to store and recall the Out point (CLIPBOARD OUT point) for the Copy or
Move operation. You can locate a stored CLIPBOARD OUT point.
* Refer to page "67" for locating the CLIPBOARD OUT point.
* Refer to page "85" for copying/moving data.
14. Auto Return Start key [AUTO RTN START]
This key is used to store and recall the start point (AUTO RTN START point) for the Auto
Return or Auto Repeat operation.
You can locate a stored AUTO RTN START point.
* Refer to page "69" for more information about Auto Return and Auto Repeat.
15
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
15. Auto Return End key [AUTO RTN END]
This key is used to store and recall the end point (AUTO RTN END point) for the Auto
Return or Auto Repeat operation.
You can locate a stored AUTO RTN END point.
* Refer to page "69" for more information about Auto Return and Auto Repeat.
16. Auto Punch In key [AUTO PUNCH IN]
This key is used to store and recall the recording start point (AUTO PUNCH IN point) for
the Auto Punch IN/OUT operation. This point is also used as an erase point.
You can locate a stored AUTO PUNCH OUT point.
* Refer to page "75" for more information about Auto Punch In/Out recording.
* Refer to page "85" for more information about pasting data.
* Refer to page "96" for more information about the Erase operations.
17. Auto Punch Out key [AUTO PUNCH OUT]
This key is used to store and recall the recording end point (AUTO PUNCH OUT point) for
the Auto Punch IN/OUT operation. This point is also used as an erase point.
You can locate a stored AUTO PUNCH OUT point.
* Refer to page "75" for more information about Auto Punch In/Out recording.
* Refer to page "96" for more information about the Erase operation.
Memory keys (CLIPBOARD IN, CLIPBOARD OUT, AUTO RTN START, AUTO PUNCH
IN, AUTO PUNCH OUT, and AUTO RTN END keys) have the following common
functions:
* Pressing a Memory key to recall the point the key is storing (or pressing the RECALL
key, and then the Memory key) displays the memory data (time, or bar/beat/clock)
currently stored in that key; then the unit enters data edit mode. To edit data, use
the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits, and then use the JOG
dial to change the value.
* After you finish editing data, press the STORE key, and then press one of the Memory
keys into which you want to store the point. The edited data will be stored in the
specified Memory key.
* While the current position of the recorder is indicated, press the STORE key, then one
of the Memory keys into which you want to store the data. The current position or the
recorder will be stored in the Memory key. You can do this while the recorder is
running or stopped.
* Press a desired Memory key, and then press the LOCATE key to locate the point stored
in that Memory key (time, or bar/beat/clock).
* All memory data can be stored to Programs 1-99 individually.
* In Setup mode, you can save or load song data for each Program.
* All data will be retained after you turn off the power.
* Refer to page "67" for more information on memory data.
* Refer to page "67" for more information on the Locate function.
* Refer to pages "28" and "49" for more information on the Program Change function.
* Refer to page "102" for more information on saving and loading song data.
16
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
18. Display Select key [DISP SEL]
This key is used to change the display mode. Pressing this key repeatedly will change the
display mode as follows:
The current position
Disk space (remain).
When time base is "MTC", the
MTC or LTC time that is input will
be displayed.(at installed Model
8345)
The Setup mode display
(SETUP is blink) and title
display
* Refer to pages "26" and "32" for more information about the REMAIN.
Pressing this key while holding down the EXECUTE/YES key will switch the Time Base (*)
as follows. The Time Base can be set when the display shows the recorder's current
position or the available disk space (REMAIN).
ABS (Absolute Time)
BAR/BEAT/CLK
MTC (MIDI Time Code)
(*) Time Base:
The D-160 uses time display (ABS or MTC) or Bar/Beat/Clock display to indicate the current
position of the recorder section. These displays are called "Time Base." ABS (Absolute Time)
shows the absolute time of the disk, and MTC (MIDI Timecode) shows the relative time obtained
by adding an MTC offset value to the ABS value. Bar/Beat/Clock (BAR/BEAT/CLK) indicates a
position within a piece of music and conforms to the MIDI clock and Song Position Pointers
created on the internal Tempo Map. The tune will be displayed up to 999 bars.
* Refer to pages "38" and "145" for more information about MTC and the internal Tempo
Map.
19. Execute/Yes key [EXECUTE/YES]
Press this key to execute the operation when you edit data on the hard disk using the
edit functions such as Paste and Erase, when you put the D-160 into SETUP mode, or
when you set the parameters in the SETUP menu.
Pressing the DISP SEL key while holding down the EXECUTE/YES key allows you to select
the Time Base. (Refer to the explanation about the DISP SEL key.)
* Refer to page "85" for more information about using this key for the Paste or Erase operation.
* Refer to page "137" for more information about using this key in SETUP mode.
20. Exit key/No key [EXIT/NO]
The opposite of the EXECUTE/YES key, this key is used to stop the operation.
* Refer to page "85" for more information about using this key for the Paste or Erase operation.
* Refer to page "137" for more information about using this key in SETUP mode.
21. Recall key [RECALL]
Press this key to recall the stored time value (or Bar/Beat/Clock value).
Pressing this key, and then one of the following keys will display the data stored at the
key you pressed, and you will be able to edit the data.
RECALL key -> CLIPBOARD IN key
The Clipboard In point is recalled and the D-160 enters the edit mode.
RECALL key -> CLIPBOARD OUT key
The Clipboard Out point is recalled and the D-160 enters the edit mode.
RECALL key -> AUTO PUNCH IN key
The Auto Punch In point is recalled and the D-160 enters the edit mode.
RECALL key -> AUTO PUNCH OUT key
The Auto Punch Out point is recalled and the D-160 enters the edit mode.
RECALL key -> AUTO RTN START key
The Auto Return Start point is recalled and the D-160 enters the edit mode.
RECALL key -> AUTO RTN END key
The Auto Return End point is recalled and the D-160 enters the edit mode.
RECALL key -> LOCATE key
The Locate key data is recalled and the D-160 enters the edit mode.
To exit edit mode, press the EXIT/NO key, DISP SEL key, or STOP button.
17
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
* Refer to page "85" for more information about the clipboard.
* Refer to page "75" for more information about Auto Punch In/Out recording.
* Refer to page "70" for more information about Auto Return.
22. Store key [STORE]
This key is used to store a time value (or Bar/Beat/Clock value) to one of the memory
keys. Pressing this key, and then one of the following keys will cause the data shown on
the display to be stored to the corresponding memory key you pressed. Pressing the
STORE key while holding down the HOLD/> key will change a Program.
STORE key -> CLIPBOARD IN key
STORE key -> CLIPBOARD OUT key
STORE key -> AUTO PUNCH IN key
STORE key -> AUTO PUNCH OUT key
STORE key -> AUTO RTN START key
STORE key -> AUTO RTN END key
STORE key -> LOCATE key
Data is stored as a Clipboard In point.
The stored data can be used as a locator.
Data is stored as a Clipboard Out point.
The stored data can be used as a locator.
Data is stored as an Auto Punch In point.
The stored data can be used as a locator.
Data is stored as an Auto Punch Out point.
The stored data can be used as a locator.
Data is stored as an Auto Return Start point.
The stored data can be used as a locator.
Data is stored as an Auto Return End point.
The stored data can be used as a locator.
Data is stored as a LOCATE key data.
After pressing this key, if you wish to cancel the store operation, press the EXIT/NO key,
DISP SEL key, or STOP button.
* Refer to page "85" for more information about the clipboard.
* Refer to page "28" and "49" for more information about Program Change function.
* Refer to page "67" for more information about the Locate function.
* Refer to page "75" for more information about Auto Punch In/Out recording.
* Refer to page "70" for more information about Auto Return.
23. Hold/Digit Move key [HOLD/>]
Pressing this key while the recorder transport is operating will hold the time value (or
Bar/Beat/Clock value), display the value on the screen, and will place the D-160 into edit
mode. If you press this key while the recorder section is stopped, the D-160 will enter
edit mode. Pressing this key repeatedly allows you to select the digit (column) to edit.
To cancel edit mode, press the STOP button, DISP SEL key, or EXIT/NO key.
Pressing the STORE key while holding down the HOLD/> key will change the Program.
* Refer to pages "67" and "85" for more information about using this key.
24. Jog/Shuttle dial
Jog dial (inside):
Turning the JOG dial while the recorder is stopped performs digital scrubbing in either
direction, which allows you to check the audio and locate a point without any change
in pitch.
The JOG dial is also used to change values in the data edit mode or when the pitch
data is displayed. It also allows you to select a parameter to set in Setup mode.
Shuttle dial (outside):
FWD and REW direction shuttle operation in the STOP mode is possible at +/-1 ~ 64
times fast winding in the no sound state. On the other hand, FWD and REW direction
shuttle operation in the PLAY mode is possible in the CUE playback mode at +1 ~ 8 and
-1 ~ -7 times speed while cueing. In addition, while in the display edit mode, the
editing point can be moved in the same way as by the HOLD/> key.
* Refer to pages "67" and "85" for more information about the editing the memory data.
* Refer to page "137" for more information about Setup mode.
18
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
25. Redo key [REDO]
Pressing this key after you press the UNDO key restores the status obtained before you
undo recording or editing. This key is activated only when the recorder transport section
is stopped.
* Refer to pages "75" and "85" for more information about the Redo operation.
26. Undo key [UNDO]
After using an edit function such as Paste, or Erase, or after auto punch in/out recording,
pressing this key will restore the previous status before editing or recording.
This key is activated only when the recorder transport section is stopped.
* Refer to pages "75" and "85" for more information about the Undo operation.
27. Erase key [ERASE]
This key is used to erase a specified area or all data after a specified point on certain
“READY” track(s), or all the data in a specified Program.
Use the Auto Punch In/Out points and the RECORD TRACK select key to specify the area to
erase.
To erase all data in a Program, press the STORE key while holding down the HOLD/> key
to select the Program, then press the ERASE key.
All data recorded in the Program will be erased. You do not need to set a track in READY
mode.
* Refer to page "96" for more information about the Erase operation.
28. Vari-pitch key [VARI PITCH]
Use this key to turn the Vari-pitch function on and off. When this function is enabled, the
corresponding LED lights up. When this function is disabled, the LED turns off.
The range of pitch variation for playback and recording is +/-6.0%, in 0.1% steps.
Press the RECALL key, and then the VARI PITCH key to display the current pitch data.
To change the pitch data, use the JOG dial to change the value while the pitch data is
displayed.
You can also change the playback speed when the data is being played back with the Varipitch function ON.
* To quit the pitch data display, press the EXECUTE/YES key, the EXIT/NO key, or the
STOP button.
<Note>
Even when the vari-pitch data is set to 0.0%, pressing this key will turn the LED on.
<Note>
You cannot change the pitch data while recording. If the Vari-pitch function was on, the unit will
use the pitch data previously set.
<Note>
The Vari-pitch function will be automatically turned off in the following situations:
* When you turn on the power to the unit (The pitch data will be reset to 0.0%.)
* When you set Slave mode ON. (The pitch data remembers the previous setting.)
* When you set up the digital input tracks and “DIGITAL” appears on the display. (The pitch data
remembers the previous setting.)
If you have installed an optional Model 8345 TC/SYNC card in the D-160 and you have set the
“Word Out?” menu in the Setup mode to “8345,” the Vari-pitch function turns on even during digital
input via DIGITAL IN.
* Refer to page "56" for more information on the Vari-pitch function.
* Refer to page "123" for more information on Slave mode.
* Refer to page "60" for more information on digital signals.
19
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
29. Paste key [PASTE]
Press this key to copy data or move data that has been copied to the clipboard to a
location stored at the AUTO PUNCH IN key. The data will be pasted at the point stored in
the Auto Punch In key. You can select the paste destination track using the RECORD
TRACK select key. A destination track to which data is pasted is identical to the source
track. This key is activated only when the recorder transport section is stopped.
* Refer to page "85" for more information about the Copy & Paste, and Move & Paste operation.
30. Move key [MOVE]
This key is used to enter into the clipboard data stored in memory by the CLIPBOARD IN/
OUT keys. Pressing the MOVE key will store the data in the Clipboard as Move data.
To enter data to be moved, one or more tracks must be readied, and a correct value must
be stored for the In and Out points. If you attempt to enter data when all tracks are safe,
all track indications and "Select Track!" indication on the display will blink to warn you.
If a correct value is not set for the Clipboard In or Out points, a warning message of “Void
In Point!” or “Void Out Point!” will appear.
* Refer to page "85" for more information about the Copy & Paste, and Move & Paste operation.
31. Copy key [COPY]
This key is used to copy data stored in the memory using the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT keys.
Pressing the COPY key will store the data in the Clipboard as Copy data. To execute the
copy operation, one or more tracks must be readied, and a correct value must be stored
for the In and Out points. If you attempt to copy data when all tracks are safe, all track
indications and a "Select Track!" indication on the display will blink to warn you.
If a correct value is not set for the Clipboard In or Out points, a warning message of “Void
In Point!” or “Void Out Point!” will appear.
* Refer to page "85" for more information about copying data.
32. Auto Punch Mode On/Off key [AUTO PUNCH]
Switch this key ON for auto punch in/out.
When you press this key while a correct value is stored to the AUTO PUNCH IN key and the
AUTO PUNCH OUT key, both the REHEARSAL LED and TAKE LED will blink, indicating that
Auto Punch mode is on. (If a correct value is not stored, pressing the AUTO PUNCH key
will not turn the parameter ON, and the message “Void Out Point!” will appear.)
Pressing the PLAY button under this condition will put the unit into "Rehearsal mode" for
Auto Punch In/Out recording. Pressing the PLAY button and RECORD button simultaneously
will put the unit into "Take mode."
There are five combinations of the REHEARSAL LED and TAKE LED that indicate the status
of the unit regarding auto punch recording:
<Note>
If a correct value is not stored, pressing the AUTO PUNCH key will not enable the function,
and the message “Void Out Point!” will appear.
If a correct value is not stored, pressing the AUTO PUNCH key will not turn on the function, and the
message “Void Out Point” will alert you. In this case, set a correct value for the Auto Punch In/Out point.
Also, the function is not turned on when you press the AUTO PUNCH key if the disk does not have
enough recording space. The display will indicate “-**h**m**s**f Over.”
Auto Punch mode OFF
Auto Punch mode ON
Auto Punch Take mode
Auto Punch Rehearsal mode
Rehearsal mode entered by
means of MMC or foot switch
Both REHEARSAL LED and TAKE LED are off.
Both REHEARSAL LED and TAKE LED are blinking.
Only the TAKE LED (red) is lit.
Only the REHEARSAL LED (green) is lit.
Only the REHEARSAL LED (green) is blinking.
* Refer to page "75" for more information about the Punch In/Out.
20
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
AUTO
PUNCH
Punch In/Out mode and LED display
Rehearsal
REHEARSAL
TAKE
Auto Punch In/Out mode
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
AUTO
PUNCH
TAKE
Take
REHEARSAL
TAKE
Punch In/Out mode
AUTO
PUNCH
Rehearsal
REHEARSAL
TAKE
Manual Punch In/Out using a
footswitch or MMC. (Auto
Punch mode OFF.)
AUTO
PUNCH
Take
REHEARSAL
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
TAKE
TAKE
:go off
:light up
:blink
33. Locate key [LOCATE]
Press this key to locate a position.
You can locate a point (memory data) (time, or bar/beat/clock) stored in the Memory
keys when you press a Memory key (CLIPBOARD IN, CLIPBOARD OUT, AUTO RTN START,
AUTO PUNCH IN, AUTO PUNCH OUT, or AUTO RTN END), and then press the Locate key.
Data stored in the Locate key is the most-recently located position expressed as a time
value (bar/beat/clock). If you wish to locate the same point repeatedly, then press this
key repeatedly. If you locate a position at a different time value or bar/beat/clock value,
the data will be updated. Pressing the RECALL key, and then the LOCATE key will display
the data stored in the LOCATE key (time or bar/beat/clock), and put the D-160 in the
data edit mode. To edit the data, use the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move around
the digits, and then use the JOG dial to change their value.
When you finish editing the data, you can store a particular locate point by pressing the
STORE key, and then the LOCATE key. You can also store a locate point by pressing the
STORE key, and then the LOCATE key while the recorder’s current point is shown.
Also, pressing the HOLD/> key to enter data edit mode, and then pressing the LOCATE
key when you finish editing, will allow you to locate the edited position (bar/beat/clock)
directly. This data can be stored individually to each Program P1-P99.
In the SETUP mode, you can also save and load the song data to and from each Program
individually. The data will be retained after you turn off the power to the unit.
* Refer to page "67" for more information about the Locate function.
34. Record button [RECORD]
Pressing only this button places the readied tracks into input monitoring status.
Pressing this button again will reset the tracks to playback monitoring. (The RECORD LED
will blink when the readied tracks are in input monitoring status.)
Pressing the PLAY button while holding down this button will place the readied tracks
into recording. At this time, the PLAY LED and RECORD LED will light, and the readied
track indication will be light steadily (instead of blinking).
* Refer to page "37" of the "Before Operating" section for more information about input
monitoring and reproduce monitoring.
35. Stop button [STOP]
Pressing this button will stop the transport section of the recorder.
Pressing the PLAY, REWIND, or F FWD button while holding down this button will cause
the D-160 to perform the following operation:
STOP + PLAY
STOP + REWIND
STOP + F FWD
Clipboard playback (The STOP LED will flash and the PLAY LED will
light up.) *3
Locate ABS 0 *4
Locate ABS END *5
21
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
Pressing the STOP button will abort the editing operations and display the current
position of the recorder, if you wish to:
* quit the data edit mode,
* cancel the recall or store operation,
* quit the pitch data display,
* cancel the edit operation, such as pasting, or
* cancel the SETUP menu settings.
Pressing the foot switch while holding down this button allows you to turn the punch in/
out rehearsal mode ON/OFF.
*3 Clipboard playback:
The D-160 plays back the copy data or move data for the Clipboard. During audio playback
of the copy or move data, the FL will display the time length and data type (“Copy Clip
Play!” or “Move Clip Play!"), and the copy or move source track indicator will flash, enabling
you to quickly determine the track and data type.
*4 Locate ABS 0:
The D-160 will locate the top of the selected Program (ABS TIME: 00m: 00s: 00f).
*5 Locate ABS END:
The D-160 will locate the end of the recorded data on the Program (ABS END).
* These operations can be executed only on real tracks 1 ~ 16.
* Refer to page "32" of the "Before Operating" section for more information about ABS 0 and
ABS END.
* Refer to page "81" for more information about Punch In/Out recording using the foot switch.
36. Play button [PLAY]
Pressing this button will cause the recorder to play back.
Pressing this button while holding down the RECORD button will start recording.
Pressing this button while holding down the STOP button will perform the Clipboard
playback operation. Refer to the section “STOP Button” for more information on the
Clipboard playback.
Pressing the PLAY button during recording will stop recording.
37. Rewind button [REWIND]
Pressing this button while the recorder section is stopped will rewind data at 30 times
speed. Pressing this button in Play mode will cue data (you can hear sound while rewinding)
at five times speed.
Pressing this button while holding down the STOP button will perform the "LOCATE ABS
0" operation, and immediately locate the beginning of the Program (ABS TIME: 00m: 00s:
00f). (Refer to the "STOP button" section for more information about LOCATE ABS 0.)
38. Fast Forward button [F FWD]
Pressing this button while the recorder section is stopped will fast forward data at 30
times speed. Pressing this button in Play mode will cue data (you can hear sound during
the fast forward operation) at five times speed.
Pressing this button while holding down the STOP button will initiate the "LOCATE ABS
END" operation, and immediately locate the end of the recorded data on the Program
(ABS END). (Refer to the "STOP button" section for more information about LOCATE ABS
END.)
39. Locked LED [LOCKED]
The Locked LED will blink when the D-160 is setup as slave mode.
It will light on when the lock is achived.
* Refer to page "123" for more information about "Slave Mode Function."
22
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
40. Hard disk access LED
This LED lights up or blinks when the hard disk is writing or reading data.
<CAUTION>
Do not turn the power off while this LED is lit or blinking. Otherwise, data on the hard disk may
be damaged.
41. MIDI Time Code In LED [MTC IN]
This LED lights up when MTC (MIDI Time Code) is input from an external MIDI device to
the MIDI IN connector of the D-160.
42. Punch In/Out jack [PUNCH IN/OUT] (Connector: PHONE jack)
Connecting the optional foot switch will let you control punch In/Out (and rehearsal)
recording. Use a Fostex Model 8051 foot switch.
<Note>
Be sure to use an “unlatch type” foot switch if you use a foot switch other than the Model 8051.
Otherwise, a malfunction could occur.
* Refer to page "81" for information about Punch In/Out recording using the foot switch.
<Rear Panel>
49
51
50
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
4
ANALOG IN
3
2
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
4
DATA
3
2
1
INPUT
9~16
8
7
43
6
5
16
15
14
13
44
12
11
10
1~8
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
MIDI
OUTPUT
9~6
INPUT
1~8
OUTPUT
THRU
9
45
46
47
48
43. Input jack [ANALOG IN 1-8] (connector: RCA pin)
Analog audio signal from the mixer is routed here.
Connect this jack to the Group out (BUSS OUT) connector of the mixer.
44. Output jack [ANALOG OUT 1-16] (connector: RCA pin)
Analog audio signal of the D-160 is output here.
Connect this jack to the TAPE IN connector of the mixer.
45. Data Input connector [DATA INPUT 1-8, 9-16] (connector: OPTICAL)
Use this connector to load song data (audio + setup data) from an external device to the
D-160. It is also used to input S/P DIF digital signal (from a DAT, CD, or MD) or adat
digital signal (from RD-8, CX-8, or adat). DATA INPUT 9-16 is constantly fixed to "adat"
input.
* Refer to pages "102" and "165" for information about "LOAD" function.
* Refer to page "60" for information "Digital Recording."
23
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
<Note>
Use the DATA INPUT 1-8 connector to load song data to the D-160.
Do not use the DATA INPUT 9-16 connector with load .
46. Data Output connector [DATA OUTPUT 1-8, 9-16] (connector: OPTICAL)
Use this connector to save song data (audio + setup data) from the D-160 to an external
device. It is also used to output S/P DIF digital signal or adat digital signal to an external
digital device. DATA OUTPUT 9-16 is constantly fixed to "adat" output.
<Note>
Use the DATA OUTPUT 1-8 connector to save song data from the D-160.
Do not use the DATA OUTPUT 9-16 connector with save.
* Refer to pages "102" and "168" for information about "SAVE" function.
* Refer to page "60" for information "Digital Recording."
47. SCSI connector [SCSI] (connector: D-sub 25-pin)
This is the connector which enables an external SCSI device to be connected.
It allows you to save or load song data.
Use the D-sub 25-pin cable for Macintosh designated by each SCSI device.
* Refer to pages "108" and "166" for information about "SCSI."
48. MIDI Input/Output/Thru connector [MIDI INPUT/OUTPUT/THRU]
(connector: DIN 5-pin)
MIDI INPUT:
Connect the MIDI OUT connector of an external MIDI device here.
The D-160 can be controlled remotely via an external MMC (MIDI Machine Control) or
FEX (Fostex System Exclusive Message).
MIDI OUTPUT:
Connect the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI device here.
The D-160 will output MTC (MIDI Time Code), MIDI Clock signal, MMC (MIDI Machine
Control) response, and FEX (Fostex System Exclusive Message) response.
MIDI THRU:
This connector outputs the input signal at the MIDI INPUT connector without modification.
When using multiple D-160s via MIDI, connect this terminal to the MIDI INPUT connector
of the second D-160. Refer to page "117" for details.
49. Panel A for an optional card
This is the panel used for installing the optional Model 5041 (balanced 8-16 I/O card).
Using the Model 5041 allows for balanced analog signal input and output. In general,
leave the panel in place.
50. Panel B for an optional card
This is the panel used for installing the optional Model 8345 (D-160 TC/SYNC card).
Using the Model 8345 makes the D-160 have LTC input and output connectors.
Also, the sync lock with video and word clock will be possible. In general, leave the panel
in place.
51. Power cable
Connect the power cable to an AC outlet of the specified voltage.
24
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
<Display Section>
The D-160 display integrates the level meter of a high-visibility FL tube with a 16 digits and
35 dot message display.
The level meter shows the Track 1-16 output level of the recorder section. The time display
shows the current time of the recorder section using ABS TIME (Absolute time), MTC (MIDI
timecode), or MIDI BAR/BEAT (bar/beat). This display also shows messages required for
interactive operation. The following section explains the display functions and provides with
some examples.
1. Display shown when the power is turned on
When you turn on the power to the D-160, the display shows "Initializing..." (Initializing.
Please wait.), and the time display shows the time using the time base (ABS, MTC, or BAR/
BEAT/CLK) that was selected before the power was turned off.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
15
2. Preset display
3
12
3
6
9
TC MTC IN OFFSET
ABS SETUP CHASE
LOCATE
REMAIN PGM
1
17
FORMAT
SIGNATURE
TEMPO
44.1kHz 48kHz
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
COMPLETED !
SURE ?
MIDI CHASE
SAVE LOAD
EXT SYNC
DIGITAL
7 10
5 8 9
2
4
16
9
3
9
14
13
11
1. Level meter
The level meter shows the recorder output level and the recording level for Tracks 1-16.
2. Track indication
The track indication blinks when the corresponding track is ready. It turns off when the
track is safe, and is lit during recording.
3. ABS, MTC, SIGNATURE
When Time Base uses ABS time, “ABS” lights up. With MTC time, “MTC” lights up, and with
BAR/BEAT/CLK indication, “SIGNATURE” lights up.
4. LOCATE
This LED lights up when the unit enters data edit mode, enabling you to edit data.
Pressing the LOCATE key while this LED is lit will cause the D-160 to locate the position of
the displayed time or the bar/beat/clock value.
5. REMAIN
Refer to "2. Switching the display using the DISP SEL key."
6. SETUP
Refer to "2. Switching the display using the DISP SEL key."
7. COMPLETED!
This message indicates that an operation such as copy, move, and paste has been completed.
25
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
8. SURE?
This message is shown to confirm whether or not you wish to execute a certain operation.
9. LOAD, SAVE, FORMAT, MTC OFFSET, TEMPO
When the unit enters Setup mode, the selected parameter name will appear here.
The parameter name also appears on the 35 dot message Display.
10. MIDI
This indication lights up when the D-160 receives effective MIDI messages from an external
MIDI device.
11. DIGITAL
This indication lights up when the D-160 is receiving a digital signal properly at the DATA
INPUT connector while loading data from a external digital equipment (CD, MD etc.).
If this indication is blinking, the digital signal is not being received correctly.
12. 35 dot message Display
This display indicates the ABS time, MTC time, BAR/BEAT/CLK time value or bar/beat/
clock value, a Program number, and a parameter name in the Setup mode.
13. CHASE
This indication flashes when the D-160 is in Slave mode, and lights up when the unit locks
to the sync signal.
14. 44.1kHz, 48kHz
This displays the sampling rate of the Program you are currently working.
During DIGITAL input of S/P DIF, the 44.1kHz or 48kHz indication will blink when the FS
setteing is different between the digital signal that is input and that in D-160.
15. MTC IN, TC IN
With the optional Model 8345 TC/SYNC card installed, this will be lit when MTC or LTC is
externally input.
16. PGM
This flashes when the D-160 is enterd in the program setup and program change modes.
17.
At playback of a no sound section, if the FL tube " ∞" symbol only is lit, the level of that
track will be lower than 43dB but it also indicates that an Audio File exists in the lighted
track.
You proceed as is but the hard disk is occupied in excess by this Audio File.
If this Audio File is unneeded, disk capacity can be economizied by erasing this section.
Likewise, during playback, if nothing is lit in the FL tube " ∞" section, it means that
Audio data of this track is "ALL 0" and the hard disk is not occupied by this.
3. Switching the display using the DISP SEL key.
Let's assume that you turned off the power while the time display was using a time base of
"ABS," and then you turned the power on again. The D-160 time display will again use a time
base of "ABS." (Underline->Displayed program number)
ABS TIME display
ABS
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
At this time if you press the DISP SEL key, the Disk Remain display will appear. (Both
recordable time and hard disk capacity remaining will be converted to mono track and
expressed in time and megabites.)
DISK REMAIN display
REMAIN
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
If "BAR/BEAT/CLK" is selected for the timebase (explained later), the DISK REMAIN
indication will show a value (in terms of the number of measures) calculated based on the
last beat/tempo data on the tempo map of the recorded song.
When you press the DISP SEL key again, the Setup mode display will appear.
At this time, the D-160 has not entered the Setup mode. To put the D-160 into the Setup
mode, press the EXECUTE/YES key. After pressing the EXECUTE/YES key, if you wish to go
back to the previous status, press the EXIT/NO key.
Setup mode display ("SETUP" indication is flashing)
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
If you press the DISP SEL key again, the screen will return to the "ABS TIME" display.
4. Switching the Time Base display using the EXECUTE/YES key and
DISP SEL key
When the screen is showing the ABS TIME or REMAIN display, if you press the DISP SEL key
repeatedly while holding down the EXECUTE/YES key, the TIME BASE display will change
cyclically. You can select one of the following Time Base displays.
ABS (Absolute Time)
ABS
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BAR/BEAT/CLK (Bar/Beat/Clock)
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
SIGNATURE
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MTC (MIDI Timecode)
MTC
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
27
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
5. Changing Programs using the STORE key and the HOLD/> key
* About the Program Change function
The Program Change function divides the hard disk space into up to 99 parts to
accommodate 99 separate Programs (P01-P99 — as long as available recording
time allows) so you can record, play back, edit, and archive (save and load) data
for each Program individually.
For example, the first song can be Program 1, the second song can be Program 2,
etc. You need to recall the desired Program before you start recording, playback,
editing, or archiving.
Pressing the STORE key while holding down the HOLD/> key will cause the D-160 to enter
Program select mode, display the message “Select PGM !”, followed by the current Program
and Program number and a flashing “SURE?” indication.
PGM
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PGM
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
SURE?
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
You can select the desired Program from the already setup Programs by rotating the JOG
dial while the Program number and “SURE ?” are flashing. ("#0003" is the current program
title.)
After you select a Program, press the EXECUTE/YES key to return to the selected Program’s
ABS indication.
The Time Base display will indicate the selected Program’s Time Base, since you can set
the Time Base for each Program individually.
To change the Time Base display after you have selected the desired Program, press the
DISP SEL key while holding down the EXECUTE/YES key.
Pressing only the DISP/SEL key will take you to the REMAIN display based on the current
Time Base.
<Notes>
* If you turn the JOG dial while the ABS display or MTC display indicates a Program number,
the Program number indication will change to the sub-frame indication. However, if you
operate a transport button, such as the PLAY button or the Stop button, or if you turn the
SHUTTLE dial, the sub-frame indication will change back to the Program number indication.
(The Program number shown on the BAR/BEAT/CLK display will not change.)
* The maximum total recording time of all setup Programs (up to 99 Programs) equals the
available recording time of the hard disk. For example, if you use an optional Model 9041
(1.3GB removable hard disk cartridge), the available 16-track recording time is about 15
minutes (with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz). If you have recorded 10 minutes of data in
Program 1, you can record 5 minutes for the total time of the rest of Programs. That is, you
can record data totalling 15 minutes, regardless of whether you use all setup Programs or
record only one Program.
* Refer to “2-1. Setting up a Program” and “2-2. Program Change” on pages 49-51 for more
information on how to setup a new Program and use the Program Change function.
28
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
6. Warning messages
If you perform an incorrect operation, input incorrect data, or if an error occurs,
the following alarm indication appears:
Invalid data indication (The input data is not appropriate for the operation).
Action to take:
Input correct data.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Invalid In/Out indication (The In or Out point is not appropriate for the operation).
Action to take:
Input correct data.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
Overtime indication (Available disk space is insufficient for the length of time (the number
of measures) indicated on the display.)
Action to take:
During the copy & paste and move & paste operation, try to shorten the length
of the copied data by the indicated amount. Alternatively, use the "ERASE"
function to move the ABS END point backward to obtain enough disk space for
editing.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Unassigned track indication (Select any track)
Action to take:
Use the RECORD TRACK select key to ready any track.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
29
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
Event overflow indication (The editing points are overflowed)
Action to take:
You edited too much. The warning means "you cannot paste or erase any more."
In regards to event, refer to "Event and Audio File" in Before Operating section.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Load error indication (You cannot load data because the data input to the DATA INPUT
connector contains an error)
Action to take:
Check to see if there is an abnormality with the external digital machine
connected to the DATA INPUT connector, or cable. Try to "LOAD" again.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Un-formatted indication (The internal hard disk is damaged or not formatted yet.)
After this message is shown for about 10 seconds, "FORMAT" in Setup mode will
flash on the display. Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key at this moment will erase
all data and reformat the hard disk.
Action to take:
Press the EXECUTE/YES key to format the disk. (All audio and other data on the
disk will be lost.)
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Disk error indication (This disk cannot be read)
Action to take:
Contact the Fostex service station as soon as possible.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Recording Disable (Recording is disabled.)
Action to take:
Change the "Off" (recording) "Rec Protect ?" setting in Setup mode.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
30
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's Manual (Names and Functions)
SCSI device connection error: (The SCSI device is not connected correctly.)
Action to take:
Check to see if the external SCSI device is connected to the SCSI connector
correctly, or the power to the SCSI device is turned on.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Disk Lock error: (The hard disk is not installed correctly, or not securely locked by the key.)
Action to take:
Install the hard disk correctly or confirm that the disk is set properly, and be
sure to lock it using the included key.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
In rare case, the "No Disk IDE" will also be displayed if the cartride connector
pins are soiled. In such a case, clean the connector pins with alcohol or its
equivalent.
When cleaning, however, be extremely careful not to generate static electricity.
SCSI save error: (Occurrence of an error during execution of save into SCSI equipment)
Action to take:
Because "Retry?" will be displayed when the EXIT/NO key is pressed, if save is to
be executed again, press the EXECUTE/YES key upon display of "Retry?."
If save is to be canceled at this stage, press the EXIT/NO key again.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SCSI load error: (Occurrence of an error during execution of load from SCSI equipment)
Action to take:
Because "Retry?" will be displayed when the EXIT/NO key is pressed, if loading
is to be executed again, press the EXECUTE/YES key upon display of "Retry?."
If loading is to be canceled at this stage, press the EXIT/NO key again.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
31
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
Before Operating the D-160
This section explains the following items that you should learn before you start operating
the D-160.
1. Hard disk recording method and the REMAIN display
2. Audio file and event
3. Program Change function
4. Real track and additional track
5. Input monitor and reproduction monitor
6. Time base
7. Installing and formatting a hard disk
8. Expanding a detachable controller
1. Hard disk recording method and the REMAIN display
The D-90, D-80, and DMT series are able to play back only within a recorded area (ABS 0
- ABS END), but unable to play or fast forward after the record end point (ABS END) as
shown in the diagram below. They can start recording only from the ABS END point.
approx. 30 minutes
(when installing the Model 9041.)
ABS END
ABS 0
D-90, D-80, and DMT series
Non recorded area
Play is possible in this area.
ABS TIME: 00m 00s 00f ~ 30m 00s 00f
On the other hand, the D-160 enables you to select any ABS time position within 24 hours
to record an audio signal on the formatted hard disk. (Refer to the diagram below.)
For example, if you are using an optional Model 9041 (1.3GB removable hard disk
cartridge), you can record about 15 minutes to all 16 tracks anywhere within the range of
24 hours. (The REMAIN display will indicate 240 minutes since the D-160 calculates the
remaining free space based on a mono track.)
00h 05m
ABS 0
10h 00m
10h 05m
ABS END
Non recorded
area
24h 00m
Non recorded area
Recorded area (5 minutes)
Recorded area (5 minutes)
ABS time: within 24 hours
The D-160 enables you to select any ABS
time position within 24 hours to record an
audio signal
If you recorded five minutes of 16-track data starting at 00h:00m:00s:00f:00sf (ABS 0),
then recorded another five minutes of data starting at 10h:00m:00s:00f:00sf, the ABS
END point would be at the end of the second recording, 10h:05m:00s:00f:00sf.
This does not mean that the recording on the hard disk is 10 hours 5 minutes long.
The total recorded time on the disk would be 10 minutes (two 5-minute recordings).
In this case, if you try to play the unrecorded area (00h:05m through 10h:00m), the
display will count down the time, but the D-160 will not access the hard disk.
The same applies to the area after the ABS END point. If you try to play or fast forward
in the area after the ABS END point, the display will count down to one frame before 24
hours (based on the frame rate specified in Setup mode).
However, MTC will be output during the playback of an unrecorded area.
In this example, pressing the DISP SEL key will switch to the REMAIN display that
indicates about 80 minutes (based on a mono track). This is a recordable duration when
data is recorded in a single track. As mentioned, above the REMAIN display will indicate
240 minutes when you are using an optional Model 9041 (1.3GB removable hard disk
32
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
cartridge.) This means that you can record total 240 minutes of data with a sampling
rate of 44.1kHz in a single track.
Recording one-minute, one-track data with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz on the D-160
requires approximately 5.3MB of hard disk space. Therefore, the amount of space required
for a particular recording should be obtained by multiplying 5.3MB by the number of
tracks by the number of minutes (duration). If the REMAIN display indicates 240 minutes
based on a mono track, you can record about 15 minutes of 16-track data. If you have
recorded 10 minutes of 16-track data, you would have used the hard disk space
corresponding to 160 minutes (16 tracks times 10 minutes). The resultant REMAIN value
would be 240 -160 = 80 minutes.
2. Audio file and Event
As described in the previous section “Hard disk recording method and the REMAIN
display,” the basic recording method differs between the D-90/D-80/DMT series and D160. The D-160 contains sequential individual audio files recorded in the tracks of a
Program. You can insert silence between these audio files. The silence will be counted as
a zero file. As shown in the diagram below, audio files and zero (0) files will be recorded
alternately.
“The number of events” of a certain track is calculated by adding up the number of these
audio files and zero files. Each track can contain up to 512 events, but the D-160 will not
record new data when the recording reaches the event 508.
ABS 0
ABS END
Audio File 2
Audio File 1
0 File 1
Audio File 3
Audio File 4
0 File 2
No sound
No sound
Usually, a single event is created by one recording or editing operation, and the number
of the events changes according to the edit point or the amount of available disk space.
(The D-160’s disk management generally tries to reduce the number of events.)
This does not create problems in most music production. However, if you make frequent
recordings with zero files in between the audio files, the number of the events could
exceed the limit. In order to prevent this, you need frequently to check the number of
events on each track during a session.
Use the “NOs Of Event?” menu in Setup mode to check the number. Refer to “‘NOs Of
Event?’ menu in Setup mode” on page "163."
<Note on Digital In recording>
No “0 file” is created during analog recording, because data 0 will not continue even when
silence is being recorded. On the other hand, if you are recording data via S/P DIF or adat
input, the D-160 will create a zero file when 0 data is consecutively input for one second to
save disk space. This increases the number of events. Watch out for “the excessive number
of events.”
What is an event?
As shown in the diagram below, the number of events can be eleven or more if partial
recordings are made. This is because an unrecorded part is regarded as an event, and a
recorded part is also regarded as an event(s). The duration of each event can vary from
740 msec to 23 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds (FS = 44.1kHz).
Recorded part (shortest: 740 msec, FS=44.1kHz)
Unrecorded part (shortest: 740 msec, FS=44.1kHz)
ABS 23h 59m
ABS 0
ABS END
0
1
2
3
4
5
33
6
7
8
9
10
11
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
An unrecorded part (zero file) is always regarded as one event, regardless of its duration.
However, a recorded part can consist of a group of multiple audio files, as shown in the
diagram below.
More precisely, one audio file will be divided into multiple audio files if perform many
editing operations (such as, copy & paste, move & paste, etc.) on this audio file. Multiple
audio files created in this way are regarded as events. (If you do not edit the data at all,
the audio file remains in one piece and is regarded as one event.)
In this example, one recorded area consists of six consecutive audio files. This means that
this part consists of six events.
Recorded Area
0 File
Audio File 1
Audio File 2
n+1
n+2
Event Number
Audio File 3 Audio File 4
n+3
n+4
Audio File 5 Audio File 6
n+5
0 File
n+6
This is because when you perform a copy & paste, move & paste, or Auto Punch In/Out,
the event is split at the edit point. Also, if a continuous long recording is made, the
recorded data might scatter to different locations on the hard disk, thus dividing the data
into multiple events.
Clipboard In Point
0 File
Clipboard Out Point
Audio File 1
Audio File 2
n+1
n+2
Audio File 3 Audio File 4
n+3
n+4
Audio File 5 Audio File 6
n+5
0 File
n+6
Countermeasures against accumulating too many events due to a long recording plus
many editing operations:
One solution is to save and re-load the data to and from a DAT, Adat, or SCSI device. (If
the song is too long, you may not be able to save the data to a DAT or Adat.)
In this way, multiple consecutive audio files are optimized into one continuous audio file
in some cases.
If you know which part of the data you edited, and if the hard disk has enough free space,
you can use another solution in some cases.
Set the Clipboard In point and the Clipboard Out points within an unrecorded range to
copy the area (the area that contains multiple audio files and you wish to optimize)
between them, then paste the data starting from the same Clipboard In point.
Multiple audio files within this range will become a single audio file.
<Hint>
Make sure that you set the Clipboard In/Out points within zero files, and that you paste
the area starting from the SAME Clipboard In point.
* In any case, bear in mind that you cannot reduce the excessive number of events if the
target range contains a zero file.
34
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
3. Program Change function
The D-160 features a Program Change function, which enables you to setup as many as
99 Programs on a single hard disk, and record and edit up to 99 separate songs.
You can also name (title) each Program.
Using an analogy, imagine that each Program has its own room on the hard disk.
You can record, play, and edit each Program without affecting other Programs.
Assume that you have made a six-minute mono-track recording in Program 1, then you
have setup Program 2 and made a 10-minute, mono-track recording to the Program.
Now, the hard disk contains two rooms (total 16 minutes). (You can setup a maximum of
99 Programs.)
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
Program 4
Program 5
Program 6
Program 7
Program 8
Program 9
Program 10
Program 11
Program 12
Individual rooms (You can setup a maximum of 99 Programs.)
In the default setting, one Program has been setup. If you wish to setup more Programs,
refer to “Recording/Playback, 2-1. Setting up a Program.”
Please remember, however, that regardless of the number of Programs you setup, the
total recording time of the Programs cannot exceed the maximum available time of the
hard disk.
For example, if you are using a Model 9041 (1.3GB), you can record up to about 15
minutes on all 16 tracks (with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz), or up to 240 minutes on a
single mono track. Therefore, if you have already recorded a 15-minute, 16-track song in
Program 1, the available recording time will remain 0, and you will be unable to record
data to other Programs.
35
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
4. Real track and additional track
You can record, play back, and edit up to 16 real tracks on the D-160.
The D-160 also features eight additional tracks.
Real tracks 1-16 are used for recording, playing back, and editing.
Additional tracks 17-24 are used to store data.
More precisely, you can play back and monitor data recorded on the real tracks and
check it with the level meters. But, data stored on the additional tracks cannot be
monitored or checked with the level meters. The purpose of the additional tracks is to
temporarily store the data recorded on the real tracks (1-16).
Track 16
Track 15
Track 14
Track 13
Example:
Exchange data recorded on Track 11 with data recorded on Track 15.
Track 12
Track 11
Track 10
Track 9
Track 8
Track 24
Track 7
Track 23
Track 6
Track 22
Track 5
Track 21
Track 4
Track 3
Example:
Swapping between real
tracks 1-8 (or 9-16) and
additional tracks 17-24.
Track 20
Track 19
Track 2
Track 18
Track 1
Track 17
Real track
Additional track
You can swap data between two tracks (between two real tracks, additional tracks, or
between a real track and a additional track) using the “Track Exchange?” menu in the
Setup mode.
For example, you can exchange data recorded on Track 1 with data recorded on Track 8.
If you swap between a track with data and a track without data, the track that originally
contained data will become empty.
You can also swap data between eight tracks; that is, swapping between real tracks 1-8 (or
9-16) and additional tracks 17-24.)
This is very convenient in a multitrack recording application when you wish to clear
some tracks in order to make new recordings.
For example, if you swap between real tracks 1-8 (or 9-16) with data and additional
tracks 17-24 without data, the real tracks become empty. So, you can make new recordings
in these empty tracks. You can, of course, load back the data from the additional tracks
to real tracks. During the save/load operation, you can also save or load both real track
data and additional track data.
<Notes>
* The D-160 always uses data on real tracks for the ABS END indication.
For example, If you have moved all track data to the additional tracks and the real tracks are empty, ABS END
is “0.” In order to check the ABS END point of the data in the additional tracks, you need to move the data into
the real tracks. Alternatively, you can check the data status of the additional tracks by checking the events on
the “NOs Of Event?” menu in Setup mode. (Refer to page "163" for more information on the “NOs Of Event?”
menu in Setup mode.)
* You cannot swap data between the tracks from two different Programs.
36
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
5. Input monitor and Repro monitor
There are two ways to monitor track data on the recorder: Input monitor and
Repro monitor. These are defined as follows:
Input monitor:
Input monitoring enables you to listen to the input signal that is routed to
and output through the tracks just as it is. That is, listening to (monitoring)
the post-recorder input signal (not the pre recorder signal).
Sixteen tracks on the D-160 can be set to either "Input monitoring" or "
Repro monitoring" status. Follow the steps below to set the tracks to Input
monitor.
1. Set the track to recording status.
To set the track to recording status, first ready the track, then press the PLAY button while
holding the RECORD button. The recording track will be in Input monitoring status.
Alternatively,
2. Ready the track, and press the RECORD button once. (If you press the RECORD
button again, the track enters the repro monitoring status.)
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
Input signals
4
3
2
1
Mixer
Mixer
Track 5:
INPUT monitor
Tracks 1-4:
REPRO monitor
Recorder (D-160)
* The RECORD LED next to the RECORD button will flash, and the currently selected
tracks will enter input monitoring status.
Repro monitor:
Repro monitoring enables you to monitor the playback signal on the tracks;
that is, to listen to the output of the recorded signal.
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Mixer
Recorder (D-160)
37
All tracks:
REPRO monitor
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
6. Time Base
The D-160 indicates the location of the recorder (the current position) using
the ABS time, MTC, or MIDI Bar/Beat/Clock. This time reference is called "Time
Base."
ABS (Absolute Time) refers to an absolute time on the hard disk; MTC (MIDI
timecode) refers to a relative time obtained by adding a certain value (MTC
offset value) to the ABS value; and BAR/BEAT/CLK (bar/ /clock) indicates a
position in a song that corresponds to the MIDI Clock/Song Position pointer and
can be created using the internal Tempo Map. (The following diagram shows
the relationship between the three types of time base.)
* Replace all
symbols in the text with the quarter note symbol.
ABS 0
00m, 08s, 00f
○
○
○
○
001BAR, 1 , 00 CLK
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
01h, 00m, 08s, 00f
○
○
01h, 00m, 00s, 00f
○
0h 59m 59s
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0h 59m 51s
○
01h, 00m, 00s, 00sf
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MTC
○
○
00h, 59m, 52s, 00sf
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MTC OFFSET MODE = ABS
(THIS shall be assumed to be the
MTC OFFSET time set for the ABS
00m, 00s and 00f positions.)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MTC OFFSET=01h, 00m, 00s, 00f
○
○
○
○
MTC
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
BAR =001BAR, "0404(4/4)"
TEMPO=001BAR, 1 "60( =60)"
-002BAR, 1 , 00 CLK
○
/CLK
○
BAR/
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ABS
DISK END
23h 59m 59s
ABS END
○
○
00m, 00s, 00f
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Non recorded area
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recorded area
○
○
MTC OFFSET MODE = BAR
(THIS shall be assumed to be the
MTC OFFSET time set for the 00
BAR, 1 and 00 CLK positions.)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MTC OFFSET=01h, 00m, 00s, 00f
38
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
7. Installing and formatting a hard disk
The D-160 utilizes a removable hard disk cartridge, making it quick and
easy to transport and replace the hard disk.
Using an optional removable hard disk cartridge Model 9041 (1.3GB hard
disk built-in) or Model 9040B (empty caddy without hard disk) allows you
to replace the cartridge or extend the sixteen tracks recording time very
easily.
* Refer to next page for more information on replacing the removable hard disk cartridge.
You can install an ATA (IDE) standard hard disk in an optional removable case
Model 9040B (without hard disk).
<Note>
Refer to the "Supplement" for more information on "Recommended Hard Disk" and
"Operation-Confirmed hard Disk" lists.
<WARNING>
Plug the included dust cap onto the connector of the D-160's removable hard disk to
protect the disk from static electricity, dust and dirt before you store or transport the
hard disk. A hard disk is precision device. Handle it with care and avoid vibration,
humidity, strong magnetic fields, static electricity, dust, etc. In particular, do not touch
the connector with your hands to protect the hard disk from static electricity.
Removable hard disk
Plug the dust cap onto the connector.
(Do not touch the connector with your hands.)
39
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
Installing a removable hard disk cartridge
A hard disk cartridge is not installed in the D-160 when it is shipped. You will need
to install a removable hard disk cartridge in the D-160. (You can use an optional
Model 9041 or a hard disk that has been approved for performance and installed
in the removable case that came with the D-160.)
Follow the procedure below to install a new hard disk cartridge. Be sure to format
the hard disk. The following procedure should be performed with the power to the
D-160 turned off.
1. Remove the blank panel from the cartridge slot.
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
D-160
POWER
<CAUTION>
Do not try to insert your fingers into the removable
hard disk cartridge drive after the cartridge has
been removed. Otherwise, electric shock or
unexpected injury could result.
Unlock
1
The unit is
shipped from
the factory
with the lock
on the right
of the slot
released.
Blank panel
2. Insert the hard disk cartridge (e.g., Model 9041) into the slot.
Make sure that you insert the cartridge until it clicks into place. Be sure to remove the
dust cap on the connector of the cartridge case before inserting the cartridge.
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
D-160
POWER
Model 9041
2
3. Lock the cartridge with the key included in the package.
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
3
D-160
POWER
Lock
4. Connect the connector of the detachable controller, and install the controller to the D-160.
4
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
* When installation is completed, follow the procedure “Formatting a hard disk” on
page "43" to format the hard disk.
* If you are using a hard disk (that has been approved for performance) and installing
it in the removable case that came in the package, refer to “Installing a hard disk in the
removable case” on page "42."
40
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
Replacing a removable hard disk cartridge
Follow the procedure below to replace the removable hard disk cartridge.
1. Turn the power off to the D-160.
2
AUTO RTN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
AUTO PLAY
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
START
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
REDO
POWER
1
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
2
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
2. Remove the connector from the detachable remote controller section, and remove the
controller section.
3. Release the lock using the key included in the package. (Refer to the figure on the right
below.)
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
3
D-160
POWER
Lock
<CAUTION>
Do not try to insert your fingers into the removable
hard disk cartridge drive after the cartridge has
been removed. Otherwise, an electric shock or
unexpected injury may result.
Unlock
4
4. Pull the disk cartridge forward you to remove it.
The hard disk is a precision device. Handle it with care.
5. Insert new disk cartridge.
Gently push it in until a click noise is heard.
6. Lock the cartridge using the key. (Refer to the figure on the right above.)
7. Install the controller section, and fix the connectors securely using the screws.
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
D-160
6
POWER
5
* When installation is complete, follow the procedure “Formatting a hard disk” on
page "43" to format the hard disk.
41
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
Installing a hard disk in the Model 9040B removable case
If you have purchased one of the hard disks listed in the "Supplement," you need to
install the disk in the included removable case or Model 9040B optional removable case.
Follow the procedure below to install the disk in the removable case, and then
install the case in the D-160 as explained on the previous page, and format the disk.
<WARNING>
A hard disk consists of precision parts, and is sensitive to strong shocks (such as being dropped).
Handle the disk with care. Install the disk on a level, stable surface.
Fostex is not responsible for any malfunction or damage caused by incorrect handling.
<CAUTION>
If any part of the disk unit touches the case bottom, paste an "insulation seal (diameter: 18mm)"
included in the package of the case at the point of contact.
Some disk units may have such a dimension that the part could touch the case. If you use a
disk with a part touching the case, a short circuit, malfunction, or damage could result. Make
sure that no part of the disk touches the case, or paste the seal.
<Note>
Be sure to set the DIP switch or the JUMPER switch on the hard disk to "MASTER" when you
install the hard disk in the removable case. The disk will not operate if the setting is "SLAVE."
(Refer to Hard Disk's Owner's Manual for details.)
1. Disassemble the removable case.
Refer to the diagram to remove the bottom of the case.
Place your figures on the upper part of the case, and
remove the bottom so that it will open in the direction of
the arrow.
Hold down the case
with your hand.
Remove
Bottom
Model 9040B
2. Insert the disk unit into the case, and connect the cable connectors on the case to the
appropriate connectors on the disk unit.
<Note on connecting the connector>
Sometimes it may be difficult or awkward, due to a lack of space, to connect the connectors
when you are installing a hard disk into the removable case. In this event, do not apply
excessive force on the connector. Use caution to avoid injury or damage to the hard disk.
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
Connect the cable
connector
Handle
Connector
42
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
3. Secure the disk unit using the screws that come with the removable case. (Use two
screws on each side as shown in the diagram.)
Screws (x4)
4. Replace the bottom. (Before installation, read the following note.)
5. Install the entire case and disk in the D-160 following the steps on page “40” (don't
forget to lock the key!) and proceed to formatting.
Formatting a hard disk
After replacing the hard disk cartridge, follow this procedure to format the disk.
When you turn the power on to a D-160 that has an unformatted disk, the unit
automatically enters the Setup mode "Disk Format?" menu.
1. Confirm that the cartridge is locked by the key, and turn on the power to the D-160.
The display will show the initial screen, then change to the following screen:
"IDE" shown in the display indicates that the internal IDE hard disk is undergoing formatting.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
∞
_
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
FORMAT
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2. After confirming the above display, press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The currently installed internal IDE hard disk model name will be shown in the display
and "SURE?" will blink at the same time.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
FORMAT
44.1kHz
SURE ?
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.
Formatting of the internal IDE hard disk will be started and progressive to this, the
remaining unformatted disk capacity will be counted down attached with a minus symbol.
Simultaneous with the start of formatting, the ∞ symbol FL tube in the level meters of all
channels will light. And as formatting progresses, the FL tube will be extinguished one by
one starting from track 16.
This is an indication that the hard disk is being formatted correctly and when formatting
is finished, all FL tubes will be extinguish and "COMPLETED!" will be lit.
SETUP
SETUP
REMAIN
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
FORMAT
44.1kHz
FORMAT
44.1kHz
COMPLETED !
∞
∞
_
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
_
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
4. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button to quit Setup mode.
43
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
* If you are using a hard disk that already contains any data from when it was used
in a computer, the D-160 may not enter formatting mode automatically. In this
case, press the DISP SEL key to force the unit to enter Setup mode, and then
select “Disk Format?” to format the disk. (See page “171” for more information on
“Disk Format?” menu in the Setup mode.)
8. Extending the detachable controller
You can remove the detachable controller from the main unit and extend
it using an optional Model 8551 extension cable.
This optional cable is five meters long, and is equipped with D-sub 15-pin
male and female connectors.
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
Connect to controller (female)
Connect to D-160 (male)
1. Turn the power off to the D-160 before connecting the cable.
2. Loosen the screw for the connector that connects the controller to the D-160,
and remove the connector.
3. Remove the controller from the D-160.
Pull the controller toward you while pushing it up with your hand to remove it easily.
2
AUTO RTN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
AUTO PLAY
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
START
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
1
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
POWER
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
3
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
4. Insert the male connector of the extension cable to the D-160's connector, and
secure it with a screw.
5. Connect the female connector on the cable and the male connector on the
controller cable, and secure them with a screw.
44
D-160 Owner's Manual (Before operating the D-160)
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
4
D-160
POWER
5
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
6. Turn the power on to the D-160, and operate the buttons and keys on the
controller to confirm that the D-160 operates correctly.
<WARNING>
When you use the detachable controller remotely using an extension cable, the D160 may malfunction due to electromagnetic interference. In this case, turn the power
off, then on to the D-160 to restore it to normal.
Fostex is not responsible for any malfunction of the D-160 that is caused by
electromagnetic interference.
<CAUTION>
Turn off the D-160 before connecting or disconnecting any cables.
Connecting or disconnecting the footswitch or detachable controller cables while the
D-160 is turned on will cause it to malfunction.
45
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
Recording / Playback
This section explains how to record and playback data on the D-160.
1. Basic connections
The D-160 is a 16-track recorder, equipped with analog INPUTs 1-8 and OUTPUTs
1-16. Refer to the following diagram to connect the D-160 to an external mixing
console or multitrack recording.
The optimum mixing console for the D-160 would be equipped with 16 TAPE IN
connectors and 8 BUSS OUT connectors (or GROUP OUT connectors), although you
can also use a mixer with 16 TAPE IN connectors and 4 BUSS OUT connectors.
Refer to the following examples depending on the type of your mixer.
<Example-1>
Connecting a mixer equipped with 16 TAPE IN, 8 BUSS OUT (or GROUP OUT):
This connection allows for 8-track simultaneous recording.
* Connect the mixer TAPE IN 1-16 with the D-160 OUTPUT 1-16.
* Connect the mixer BUSS OUT (or GROUP OUT) 1-8 with the D-160 INPUT 1-8.
D-160
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
START
DISP SEL
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
OUTPUT 1 - 16
TAPE IN 1 - 16
INPUT 1 - 8
BUSS OUT
(GROUP OUT) 1 - 8
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123
123
123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123123123123123123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123123123123123123123
123
INPUT
External Mixer
Input signals (Guitar, Keyboard or Vocal etc.)
46
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
<Example-2>
Connecting a mixer equipped with 16 TAPE IN, 4 BUSS OUT (or GROUP OUT):
In this example, you would record tracks 1-4 first, then tracks 5-8, 9-12 or 13-16.
* Connect the mixer TAPE IN 1-16 with the D-160 OUTPUT 1-16.
* Connect the mixer BUSS OUT (or GROUP OUT) 1-4 with the D-160 INPUT 1-4 to record
tracks 1-4. To record tracks 5-8 and 13-16, connect INPUT 5-8 instead of INPUT 1-4.
(Using a patch bay allows you to change the connection from the front.)
D-160
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
INPUT 1 - 8
OUTPUT 1 - 16
Patch bay
TAPE IN 1 - 16
BUSS OUT (GROUP OUT) 1 - 4
123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
123
123123
123123
123123
123
123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123123123123123123123
123
123123123123123123123123
123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
123123123123123123123123
INPUT
Input signals (Guitar, Keyboard or Vocal etc.)
47
External Mixer
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
2. Default setting on the D-160
Before you start operating the D-160 or proceed to the next step, you may want to
arrange the controls and switches to restore the initial setting so that you will not,
for example, erase important data on a track by using incorrect settings.
In this manual, this procedure is called "setting defaults." For default settings, the
controls and switches should be arranged as shown in the figure below.
Make it a rule to return to these default settings before you proceed to a new step.
* "FORMAT FIRST". You need to format the internal hard disk prior to start recording
if a brand new hard disk drive has been installed. Refer to the explanation of the
"Disk Format?" menu in the Setup mode. We recommend that you format the hard
disk as often as possible before you start fresh recording on it.
However, remember that the format process will erase all of the recorded song
data.
Outline of the Initial Settings:
* Turn all the RECORD TRACK select keys to "SAFE." (Track indication is turned off.)
* Auto Return/Auto Play mode is "OFF." (The AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY LEDs are off.)
* Auto Punch mode is "OFF." (The REHEARSAL/TAKE LEDs are off.)
* The STOP button LED is lit.
* The STORE key and the RECALL keys are "OFF." (The STORE/RECALL LEDs are off.)
* "Rec Protect?" is "Off" selected in Setup mode.
* "Digi. In?" is assigned to "L: - -, R: - -" in Setup mode.
* "Slave Mode?" is "Off" selected in Setup mode.
* Setting a Program for recording/playback (See 2-1, 2-2, 2-3.)
* Setting a sampling rate for recording/playback (See 2-4.)
* Turning off the Vari-pitch function. (The LED is turned off.)
* The LED of the SHIFT key is off.
When the Recording Enabled/Disabled parameter in the Setup mode is set to "DISABLE
rEc," pressing the RECORD button and the PLAY button will not start recording, and
the unit will display "DISABLE rEc" on the panel. Be sure to set the mode to "EnAbLE
rEc" to enable the recording function.
Auto Punch mode is "OFF." (The
REHEARSAL/TAKE LEDs are off.)
Auto Return/Auto Play mode is "OFF." (The
AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY LEDs are off.)
The STORE key and the
RECALL keys are "OFF." (The
STORE/RECALL LEDs are off.)
The display Time Base is set to ABS
TIME, and Program P1 is selected.
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
Turn all the RECORD TRACK
select keys to "SAFE." (Track
indication is turned off.)
Turning off the Vari-pitch function.
(The LED is turned off.)
The LED of the SHIFT key is off.
48
The STOP button LED is lit.
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
2-1. Setting a Program
As explained in the "Before Operating the D-160," the D-160 features a Program
Change function that enables you to manage up to 99 individual Programs.
This means that you need to select a desired Program to work on before you start
recording or playing back.
When you format the hard disk, the D-160 offers one Program (P01) as a default
setting. Follow the procedure below to setup new Programs (up to 99) to manage
each Program using various operations, including the Program Change function.
Program setup procedure
1. Press the STORE key while holding down the HOLD/> key.
The D-160 will enter Program setup mode. The "Select PGM!" indication will
appear, and then the current Program number ("01" by default) will flash.
1
PGM
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
SURE ?
∞
_
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
STORE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
EXIT
/NO
2, 3
TIME BASE SEL
HOLD/
1
RECALL
PGM
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
PGM CHANGE
44.1kHz
SURE ?
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2. Rotate the JOG dial clockwise. When "New Program?" appears ("?" flashes),
press the EXECUTE/YES key.
When a new Program (P02 in this example) is setup, the D-160 enters the "Title
Edit" menu in Setup mode. The following indication will appear.
PGM
2
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
SURE ?
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PGM
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
SURE ?
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. A default (temporary) name for Program 2
(P02) appears and "#" flashes to the left of the title.
If you wish to use a temporary name as it is, press the EXECUTE/YES key to setup
the Program.
If you wish to change the title, refer to page "147" for an explanation of the "Title
Edit?" menu in Setup mode. You can also change the title later.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Repeat the procedure described above to setup as many Programs as you need
(up to 99). Each time you setup a new Program, the Program will be assigned the
subsequent Program number. For example, if you setup a new Program after you
have set five Programs (P01~P05), the new Program number will be 6. You cannot
skip numbers.
49
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
2-2. Program Change
The Program Change function allows you to manage multiple Programs that were setup
according to the procedure mentioned above for the recording, playback, or editing of
the individual Programs. The D-160 needs to be in the Program Setup mode to perform
the Program Change function.
The following example assumes that ten Programs (P01 - P10) have already been setup.
Program Change procedure
1. Press the STORE key while holding down the HOLD/> key.
The D-160 will enter the Program Setup mode, and displays “Select PGM!”, and then the current
Program number and title.
2. Use the JOG dial to select a desired Program.
Rotating the JOG dial back and forth will change the Program number on the display to a smaller
or larger number.
For example, rotating the JOG dial counter-clockwise when P03 is selected will change the Program
number on the display as follows: P03 --> P02 --> P01. Rotating the JOG dial clockwise will change
the Program number as follows: P03 --> P04 --> P05 ..... --> P10 --> New Program?.
If you wish to setup a new Program, select the “New Program?” indication.
P01
P02
P03
P08
P09
P10
New Program?
Current Program
A selected Program uses the Time Base (ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK) that was used
for the Program previously. To change the Time Base, press the DISP SEL key while
holding down the EXECUTE/YES key. You can set the Time Base for each Program.
Pressing the DISP SEL key will display the REMAIN indication. Use this indication to
check to see if any available recording time (or bars) remains. This remaining time is
not the time for the corresponding Program, but the total amount of time that can be
used by all Programs. Bear in mind that the REMAIN indication is based on the mono
track calculation.
<Note>
1. The following parameters can be set for each Program individually:
Memory data (CLIPBOARD IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT)
Time Base (ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK)
SETUP mode:
* Time signature setting (BAR BEAT), * TEMPO setting, * CLICK ON/OFF setting,
* PREROLL TIME setting, * MIDI SYNC OUT setting, * MTC FRAME RATE setting,
* MTC OFFSET setting, * MTC OFFSET MODE setting, * REC PROTECT ON/OFF setting,
* SLAVE MODE ON/OFF setting, * SLAVE TYPE setting, * FS (Sampling frequency) setting
2. The following parameters are common to all Programs:
Auto Play mode ON/OFF, Auto Return mode ON/OF, Vari-pitch mode ON/OFF, Pitch
data
SETUP mode:
* DIGITAL IN setting, * DIGITAL OUT setting, * BAR/BEAT RESOLUTION ON/OFF setting,
* DEVICE ID setting
50
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
<Note>
The total available time for recording data in the existing Programs (up to 99) equals the
available recording time on the hard disk.
For example, if you are using an optional Model 9041 (1.3GB removable hard disk cartridge),
you can record about 15 minutes (with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz) to all 16 tracks. Therefore,
if you have already recorded 5-minute, 16-track song in Program 1, the available recording
time for other Programs would be about 10 minutes. In other words, regardless of the
number of Programs used, you can record up to 15 minutes in total.
Bear in mind that the REMAIN indication is based on a mono track.
2-3. Deleting a Program
You may delete an unnecessary Program using the “Delete PGM?” menu in Setup mode.
You can delete a Program that is currently selected with the Program Change function.
Follow the procedure below:
Program delete procedure
1.
Select a Program to delete with the Program Change function.
Refer to the “2-2. Program Change function” section.
2.
3.
Press the DISP SEL key to enter Setup mode, and use the JOG dial to select
the ‘Delete PGM?” menu.
Press the EXECUTE/YES key twice to execute the delete operation.
Refer to page "147" for more information on the “Delete PGM?” menu in Setup mode.
<Note>
After a Program is deleted, the D-160 will display the current Time Base (ABS/BAR BEAT/
MTC) of another Program that now has the number of the deleted Program.
This is because Program number are automatically updated.
For example, if you delete Program 5 out of Programs 1-10, Program 6 will become Program
5, and the subsequent Program numbers will be updated. The titles are also updated. (That
is, Program 6 now becomes Program 5, with the title for Program 5, and the subsequent
Program titles are updated.)
51
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
2-4. Setting a Sampling Rate
The D-160 supports two sampling rates: 44.1kHz and 48kHz.
Before you start recording data in a new Program, be sure to set the sampling rate,
using the procedure below. After you format the disk or set up a new Program, the
sampling rate is set to “44.1kHz.” If you wish to use this rate, you do not have to
follow the procedure below.
The sampling rate of the Program is indicated by the status of the 48kHz message
above the display. The message lights up at a setting of 48kHz, and is turned off at
a setting of 44.1kHz.
* Default: 44.1kHz
* Available sampling rates: 44.1kHz, 48kHz
* This parameter can be set for each Program.
* This setting can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* This setting will be retained after the power is turned off.
* Check to make sure the correct Program has been selected before you set the sampling rate.
* Refer to page "162" of " Setup mode 2-19. Sampling Frequency Setting" for
information on operating procedures.
The sampling rate setting does not greatly affect analog recording or playback.
However, it can be an important element when the D-160 is processing a digital signal.
For example, CDs use a sampling rate of 44.1kHz, and you will need to set the sampling rate
of the D-160 to 44.1kHz for digital recording from a CD. If you have set the sampling rate on
the D-160 to 48kHz when recording from a CD, the 48kHz message located above the display
will flash to warn you. When you work with a 48kHz digital signal input from an adat, set the
sampling rate to 48kHz.
Also, make sure that the sampling rate of any external device matches that of the D-160 when
a digital signal is output from the D-160 to an external device, such as a digital mixer.
<Note>
A 48kHz sampling rate setting requires more disk space than a 44.1kHz setting.
This means that the available recording time will be shorter.
Therefore, the remaining disk space (REMAIN) after recording with a sampling rate of
48kHz would be smaller (shorter in time).
<Note>
Do not change the sampling rate of a Program during a session unless it is very
important. It is possible to change the sampling rate setting, but the Program will be
played back at a speed different from the original recording speed, causing the data
value stored in the Memory keys (time, or bar/beat/clock) to change.
* Refer to page "60" for information on recording and playback of a digital signal.
52
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
3. Analog Recording and Playback
This explanation is based on the assumption that the D-160 is connected to a
mixer, and the sound source is input from the mixer’s BUSS OUT (GROUP OUT)
connector, as shown in the “1. Basic Connection” section.
* Restore the default settings on the D-160.
* Check the Program selection and the sampling rate setting. Do not change these settings until this
session is complete.
3-1. Basic recording and playback
Assume that “P01” has been selected for recording.
If you wish to record data in another Program, see the section 3-2.
4
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
6
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
1,5
2
3
7
Turn on the power to the D-160, and check to make sure that the Time Base display
indicates ABS time “00m 00s 00f” and “P01”.
Selecting a recording track
1. Press any RECORD TRACK select key (1-16) to "READY" the track.
The number of the selected track will blink on the display.
Adjusting the recording level
The D-160 does not have a recording level control. You need to adjust the recording
level on a connected device that sends out sound data. Primarily use the GROUP
OUT master faders (or the faders that control the output level of BUSS OUT 1-16)
on the mixer. The recording track of the D-160 also needs to enter input monitoring
status.
2. Press the RECORD button once.
The READY track enters input monitoring status. Raise the GROUP OUT master fader on
the mixer so that the meter of the "READY" track approaches level "0-3" at peak volume.
If the "OL" indication is lit, the recording level is too high.
Unlike an analog recorder, if the recording level is too high, the signal may be distorted on
a digital recorder. In particular, recording vocal or acoustic musical instruments requires
more attention because the recording level may change suddenly, causing signal overflow.
It may be a good idea to use a compressor/limiter connected to an INSERT connector on
the mixer.
Start recording
3. After adjusting the recording level, press the RECORD button while holding down the
PLAY button.
The blinking RECORD LED and track indicator will light up.
53
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
4. To stop recording, press the STOP button.
"Please Wait!" will be shown in the display while the post recording process is in progress.
Playback
5. Press the "READY" track's RECORD TRACK select key to switch to "SAFE." (The track
indicator will turn off.)
6. Press the STOP button and the REWIND button simultaneously to locate the beginning
of the Program (ABS 0).
7. Press the PLAY button.
The recorder will start playback data. Adjust the TAPE IN input level on the mixer while
monitoring.
In this way, you can record sound source to any track (a single track or multiple
tracks).
3-2. Recording with the Program Change function (Switching Programs P01-P99)
As previously explained, the D-160 has a "Program Change Function" to manage
up to ninety-nine songs. You can record, playback, and edit each Program separately.
This section explains how to record and play back Programs using the Program
Change function.
* Restore the default settings on the D-160.
Changing a Program
1. Set the Program to be recorded.
Select the desired Program by referring to the previous "2-2. Program Change."
When you select a Program, the Time Base setting (ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK)
you used previously for that Program will be used again.
To change the Time Base display, Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the
EXECUTE/YES key. You can set the Time Base for each Program individually.
You can also switch to the REMAIN indication by pressing the DISP SEL key.
Check to see if there is enough time (bars) remaining for recording.
This value is not an available time for each Program, but the total available time
for all Programs.
2. Set the sampling rate if necessary.
Refer to section “2-4. Setting a sampling rate” for the correct procedure.
Recording (Refer to “3-1. Basic recording/playback” for details.)
3. Press the RECORD TRACK select key (1-16) to set the recording track in ready mode.
4. Press the RECORD button once to set the unit in input monitoring status, and adjust the
recording level.
5. Press the RECORD button while holding down the PLAY button.
6. When recording is complete, press the STOP button.
"Please Wait!" will be shown in the display while the post recording process is in progress.
54
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
Playback (Refer to “3-1. Basic recording/playback” for details.)
7. Press the RECORD TRACK select key for the track in ready mode so that the track
becomes “safe.”
The track LED will be turned off.
8. Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP button to locate the top of the
Program (ABS 0) (LOCATE ABS 0).
9. Press the PLAY button.
Playback will start. Adjust the TAPE IN input level from the mixer.
<Note>
The maximum total recording time of all nine Programs equals the available recording
time of the hard disk. For example, if you use the optional Model 9041 (1.3GB
removable hard disk cartridge), the available recording time is about 15 minutes
(with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz, 16 tracks recording). If you have recorded 5 minutes
of data in Program 1, you can record 10 minutes for the total time of another Programs.
That is, you can record data totalling 15 minutes, regardless of whether you use up all
Programs or you record only one Program. Therefore, the remaining recording time
is obtained by subtracting the sum of the recorded time for all recorded Programs
from the initial total available time.
This remaining time is indicated as the REMAIN time when you press the DISP SEL
key. Be sure to watch this time when you are recording multiple Programs.
<Note>
Data with a sampling rate of 48kHz uses more hard disk space than data with a sampling
rate of 44.1kHz. Therefore, the available recording time is shorter for 48kHz data.
* Refer to “2-1. Setting a Program” and "2-2. Program Change" for more information
on Programs.
* Refer to “2-4. Setting a sampling rate” for more information on sampling rates.
55
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
3-3. Playback using the Vari-pitch function
This section describes how to use the Vari-pitch function to change the playback
speed of the recorder. The D-160’s Vari-pitch function allows for pitch control in
the range of +/-6.0% in 0.1% steps.
Use the VARI PITCH key to switch the Vari-pitch function on/off. The LED lights up
when the function is enabled, and the LED is off when the function is disabled.
* Restore the default settings on the D-160.
* Check the Program selection and the sampling rate setting. Do not change these settings until this
session is complete.
* Assume that a Program has already recorded track according to the procedure described in
“3-1. Basic Recording and playback.”
1. Press the PLAY button to start playback.
2. Press the VARI PITCH key.
The LED will light up, indicating that the Vari-pitch function is on.
3. Press the RECALL key, and then the VARI PITCH key. ("%" indicator will blink.)
The current pitch data will be indicated on the display. You can now edit the pitch data.
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. Use the JOG dial to edit the pitch data.
You will notice a change in the playback speed.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key, the EXIT/NO key, or the STOP button to quit the pitch data
screen.
The screen will return to the Time Base display.
You can turn the Vari-pitch function on and off and change the pitch data while
the D-160 is playing back or stopped, but not while the it is recording.
If the Vari-pitch function is on and the pitch data is set before recording starts,
that speed will be used during recording.
While the pitch data is shown on the display, you can turn the function on and off
and edit the pitch data. However, the PLAY button, or the combination of the PLAY
button and the RECORD button, will be disabled. If you wish to change the pitch
while you are listening to the sound, first press the PLAY button to start playback,
and then display the pitch data indication to change the speed.
<Note>
When you press the VARI PITCH key, the VARI PITCH LED will light, even if the pitch
data is set to 0.0%. The LED indicates that the Vari-pitch function is turned on.
<Note>
The Vari-pitch function will automatically turned off under the following conditions:
* When you turn off the power to the unit. (The pitch data will be reset to 0.0%.)
* When you set the Slave mode to On. (The Vari-pitch function will retain the pitch
data.)
* When you set up a digital input track and the DIGITAL indication on the display
lights up. (The Vari-pitch function will retain the pitch data.)
* If you have installed an optional Model 8345 TC/SYNC card on the D-160 and you
have set the “Word Out?” menu in Setup mode to “8345,” the Vari-pitch function is
turned on even during digital input via DIGITAL IN.
* Refer to page "123" for more information on Slave mode.
* Refer to page "60" for more information on digital signals.
56
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
3-4. Multitrack recording using overdubbing
You have mastered basic recording/playback in the previous section.
In this section, we will make a multitrack recording.
Multitrack recording is a series of operations in which you record sound sources to
multiple tracks and combine these recordings into two mixes (L, R). In this process,
the most important step is "overdubbing." "Overdubbing" means recording a new
sound source to another track using input monitoring, while listening to the playback
of the pre-recorded sound (that is, playback monitoring).
The following is an example of an overdubbing procedure:
Step 1: Record a drum machine to Track 1
Step 2: Overdub an electric bass to Track 2 while listening to Track 1
Step 3: Overdub an electric lead guitar on Track 3 while listening to Track 1 and 2
Step 4: Overdub an electric side guitar on Track 4 while listening to Track 1, 2 and 3
In this way, we will overdub sound a sources to Track 1 through 16 as shown in the diagram below.
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
..........
Track 14
Track 15
Track 16
Drum
Machine
E. Bass
E. Guitar
E. Guitar
...........
Vocal 2
Piano
Synth.
* Restore the default setting on the D-160.
* Stay in the same Program until you finish overdubbing.
* Check the Program selection and the sampling rate setting. Do not change these settings until
this session is complete.
Selecting a recording track
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select key of an overdub track to "READY" the track.
For example, if you are overdubbing Track 2 while listening to Track 1, set the RECORD
TRACK select key "2" to "READY." (Number "2" will blink.)
Adjusting the recording level (rehearsal)
2. Press the RECORD button once. (The RECORD LED will blink.)
The "READY" track will enter input monitoring mode, and "SAFE" tracks will enter playback
monitoring mode.
3. Press the PLAY button to play back data from the beginning of the program (ABS 0).
Adjust the playback monitoring level of the "SAFE" tracks, and play a musical instrument
while adjusting the GROUP OUT level on the mixer, that is, a recording level on the
recorder.
4. Rewind data to the beginning of the disk by Pressing the STOP button and the REWIND
button simultaneously.
Start overdubbing
5. Press the RECORD button while holding down the PLAY button.
Recording will start, and the RECORD LED and the "READY" track indicator will light.
6. Play the instrument while listening to the playback as you did during rehearsal.
7. When recording is complete, stop the recorder, and locate the beginning of the data.
Playback
8. To prevent accidental recording, switch the RECORD TRACK select key of the "READY"
track to "SAFE."
9. Press the PLAY button to start playing back the recording.
On the mixing console, adjust the playback monitoring level of the already recorded
tracks and newly recorded track.
Repeat the steps described above to overdub Tracks 1 through 16.
57
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
3-5. Mixdown
Mixdown is the final step in multitrack recording and allows you to combine multiple
track recordings to L and R channels (two mixes), and copy the data to a master
recorder. The mixdown signal is output from the mixer STEREO OUT L/R connector.
Connect the Inputs of the master recorder to the STEREO OUT L/R.
* Set the D-160 to the default setting.
* This manual assumes that you have already recorded sound sources to all sixteen tracks.
* Refer to the mixer instruction manual for applying effects.
* Connect the master recorder to the mixer STEREO OUT L/R as shown in the diagram.
D-160
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
START
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
INPUT 1 - 8
OUTPUT 1 - 16
INPUT L/R
TAPE IN 1 - 16
Master
Recorder
BUSS OUT 1-8
STEREO
OUT
L/R
123
123123
123
123
123
123
123123
123
123123
123
123
123123
123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123123
123123
123123
123
123
123
123
123
123123
123123
123
123123
123
123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123123
123123
123123
123
123123123123123123123123
External Mixer
Mixdown rehearsal
1. Confirm that all the RECORD TRACK select keys are set to "SAFE."
2. Locate the beginning of the sound data on the recorder. (Press the STOP button and
the REWIND button simultaneously.)
3. Set the master recorder to REC-STANDBY mode.
4. Press the PLAY button on the D-160 to play back recordings, adjust the tonal quality
and mix balance of the playback sound on the mixer channels, and adjust the recording
level on the master recorder.
Adjust the input level of the master recorder so that the mixer STEREO OUT L/R meters
and the level meters of the master recorder move in the same manner.
5. Locate the beginning of the program (ABS 0).
Mixdown
6. Start recording on the master recorder.
7. Press the PLAY button on the D-160 to start playback.
8. When mixdown is complete, press the STOP button to stop the D-160.
Stop the master recorder, and listen to the mixdown song.
58
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording /Playback)
3-6. Ping-pong recording
This section explains how to perform ping-pong recording.
Ping-pong recording enables you to combine multiple recorded tracks and copy
them to an empty track. You can then overdub additional sounds onto the
previously-recorded tracks, adding instrumentation or musical parts to your
recording.
* In this example, we are going to ping-pong Tracks 1 through 6 to Tracks 9 and 10.
Since effects cannot be applied to each sound individually after ping-pong recording, we need
to apply effects here on the mixer and record the effect sound to Tracks 9 and 10.
* Set the D-160 to the default setting.
* Check the Program selection and the sampling rate setting. Do not change these settings until
this session is complete.
Track 16
Track 15
Track 14
Track 13
Track 12
Track 11
Track 10
Track 9
Track 8
Track 7
Track 6
Track 5
Ping-pong recording
(Original signal and
Effected signal)
Track 4
Track 3
Track 2
Track 1
Selecting a recording track
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select keys 9 and 10 to "READY" Tracks 9 and 10.
Level adjustment/Rehearsal
2. Press the RECORD button once. (The RECORD LED will blink.)
Tracks 9 and 10 enter input monitoring status.
3. Press the PLAY button to start playback.
Use the mixer to send the signal in Tracks 1-6 to Tracks 9 and 10 and adjust the recording
level.
4. After rehearsal is complete, locate the beginning of the program (ABS 0).
Actual ping-pong recording
5. Press the RECORD button while pressing and holding down the PLAY button to start
ping-pong recording.
59
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording/Playback)
4. Digital Recording
4-1. Digital recording from an external digital device
This section explains how to record a digital signal from the digital output of an
external digital device (CD, MD, DAT, Fostex RD-8, CX-8, etc.) to the D-160.
* Restore the default settings on the D-160.
Connecting an external digital device
Connect the DATA INPUT connector of the D-160 with the digital output of an
external digital device (CD, MD, DAT, Fostex RD-8, CX-8, etc.).
<Note>
The D-160 switches the DATA INPUT connector between an S/P DIF digital signal
(OPTICAL) and an adat digital signal during setting of the digital input track in Setup
mode. Both signals use the same connector configuration, but carry different data.
When S/P DIF digital signals are to be input, DATA INPUT 1-8 only should be used, and
when "adat" digital signals are to be input, either DATA INPUT 1-8 or 9-16 must be
used.
D-160
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
4
ANALOG IN
3
2
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
4
DATA
3
2
1
INPUT
9~16
8
7
6
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1~8
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
MIDI
OUTPUT
9~6
INPUT
1~8
OUTPUT
THRU
9
DATA INPUT1-8
DATA INPUT1-8 or 9-16
adat Out
Digital Out (S/P DIF)
External Digital Equipment
External Digital Equipment
<Notes at input of adat digital signals>
As shown in schematic below, if "adat" digital signals are simultaneously input from
two individual "adat" equipment, it will be the cause of noise.
Therefore, at input of "adat" digital signals, be sure that the 16 channel output from
the same equipment or the two "adat" outputs from perfectly word locked two separate
equipment, are input. If both "adat" (DATA INPUT 1-8 or 9-16) are connected, phase
will be synchronized at each press of the STOP button to compensate for phase drift.
Also, during this period, DATA INPUT 9-16 will be muted for about 0.5 seconds.
D-160
DATA INPUT 1-8
adat
DATA INPUT 9-16
adat
60
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording/Playback)
* If the external device has only a coaxial (RCA) type digital output connector, use the
optional COP-1 optical/coaxial converter to connect the device to transmit an S/P DIF
digital signal. The operation is the same as that for a device with a coaxial connector.
* If you connect both the digital input and output of the D-160 to those of an external
digital device, a digital loop may be generated. Refer to “4-3. Connecting a digital mixer”
for more information.
Setting an external device
Set the external device so that it will output digital signals from the digital output
connector. Some devices may output digital signals only when they are in playback
mode.
* Refer to the instruction manual that came with the external device for details.
Selecting a recording Program
Selecting the recording Program.
Refer to "2-2. Program Change" section for more information.
* Refer to “2-1. Setting a Program” ," 2-2. Program Change" and "2-3. Deleting a
Program" for more information on Programs.
Setting the sampling rate for a recording Program
*****IMPORTANT*****
When an S/P DIF digital signal is input to the D-160, be sure to match the sampling rate
of the D-160 to that of the external digital device.
* If the sampling rate settings do not match, you cannot record the S/P DIF digital
signal.
* For an adat digital signal, the D-160 will be able to record data with a different sampling
rate setting. However, the data will be recorded at a different speed. The D-160 will
lock to the external word clock when S/P DIF or adat digital signals are input to the
digital input tracks. (The D-160 will operate, referencing to the word clock sent from
the external device.) However, an adat digital signal does not contain the sampling rate
information (48kHz or 44.1kHz) that is included in the S/P DIF digital signal. This is
why the D-160 can sync to the external device with a different sampling rate.
* Initial setting: 44.1kHz
* Sampling rate settings: 44.1kHz, 48kHz
* This parameter can be set for each Program.
* The setting can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* This setting will be retained after you turn off the power.
* Refer to “2-4. Setting a sampling rate” on page "52" for information on how to set
the sampling rate of the selected Program.
After setting the sampling rate, press the DISP SEL key to display the REMAIN
indication and check the remaining time available for recording.
If there is not enough time for recording, try to increase the time by using the
Erase function to move the ABS END point of another Program forward, or by saving
the song data of Programs that are not often used to a DAT machine to clear that
data from the unit.
<Note>
A 48kHz sampling rate setting requires more disk space than the 44.1kHz setting.
This means that the available recording time would be shorter.
* Refer to page "96" for more information on the Erase function.
* Refer to page "102" for more information on saving song data.
61
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording/Playback)
Setting up a digital input track
Set the input tracks according to the type of digital signal selected in “Digi. In ?”
menu in Setup mode. In the following setup items, Lch=1~16 and Rch=1~16 are
inputs of S/P DIF digital signals and will be input only from DATA INPUT 1-8.
At input of "adat" digital signals, signals from DATA INPUT 1-8 and DATA INPUT 916 will be respectively input to ch1~8 and ch9~16.
* Initial setting: L - - R - - (No assignment for both L and R)
* Options: Lch = 1~16, adat, - - (no assignment), Rch = 1~16, - -(no assignment)
* This parameter is common to all Programs.
* This parameter setting cannot be saved or loaded as part of the song data.
* This parameter settings will be retained after the power is turned off.
* Refer to “2-15. Digital input track setting" on page "157" for more information on
the procedure and details.
<Note>
* Tracks assigned for digital input will accept only a digital signal, not an analog signal.
When this system is to be used with the digital input track set to "adat", because an
analog signal can be input to the data track not connected, a digital 8 track and analog
8 track can be simultaneously recorded. For example, if DATA INPUT 1-8 are used and
DATA INPUT 9-16 are not connected, analog signals can be input in the analog input 916 connector.
* This setting will automatically disable the Vari-pitch function (the LED will be turn
off).
* Do not remove the optical cable or perform any other operation that would disconnect
the digital signal until the session is complete. Otherwise, the D-160 will generate noise,
and affect the connected device.
* Do not set the input mode to a different setting during input of "adat" digital signals.
It could result in abnormal input/output of the digital signals.
Selecting a recording track
Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the recording track to set that track in ready
mode.
Recording
1. Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP button to locate the top of the
Program (ABS 0) (LOCATE ABS 0).
2. Confirm that the “DIGITAL” indicator on the display is lit in red, and press the RECORD
button while holding down the PLAY button to start recording.
You do not need to adjust the recording level in digital recording.
3. Start playing back on the external digital device.
Check to see if the level meter of the D-160 is moving, responding to the input signal.
4. When recording is completed, stop the D-160 and the external device.
<Note>
If you do not perform further digital recording, set the L and R channel assignments to
“- -” (no assignment). This will prevent an interrupted signal or the occurrence of
noise due to digital looping.
62
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording/Playback)
4-2. Digital recording to an external digital device
This section explains how to record a digital data from the D-160 to an external
digital device
* Restore the default settings on the D-160.
Connecting an external digital device
Connect the DATA OUTPUT connector of the D-160 with the digital input of an
external digital device.
<Note>
The D-160 switches the DATA OUTPUT connector between the S/P DIF digital signal
(OPTICAL) and the adat digital signal during setting of the digital input track in Setup
mode. Both signals use the same connector configuration, but carry different data.
When S/P DIF digital signals are to be output, DATA OUTPUT 1-8 only should be used,
and when "adat" digital signals are to be output, either DATA OUTPUT 1-8 or 9-16 must
be used.
D-160
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
4
ANALOG IN
3
2
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
DATA
4
3
2
1
INPUT
9~16
8
7
6
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1~8
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
MIDI
OUTPUT
9~6
INPUT
1~8
OUTPUT
THRU
9
DATA OUTPUT1-8 or 9-16
DATA OUTPUT1-8
adat In
Digital In (S/P DIF)
External Digital Equipment
External Digital Equipment
* If the external device has only a coaxial (RCA) type digital output connector,
use an optional COP-1 optical/coaxial converter to connect the device to transmit
an S/P DIF digital signal. The operation is the same as that for a device with a
coaxial connector.
* If you connect both the digital input and output of the D-160 to those of an
external digital device, a digital loop might be generated.
Refer to “4-3. Connecting a digital mixer” for more information.
Selecting a playback Program
Selecting the playback Program.
Refer to "2-2. Program Change" section for more information.
* Refer to “2-1. Setting a Program” , "2-2. Program Change" and "2-3. Deleting a
Program" for more information on Programs.
Setting the sampling rate for a playback Program
You need to set the sampling rate of a playback Program to match that of the
digital device before recording digital data.
*****IMPORTANT*****
When a digital signal is output from the D-160, be sure to match the sampling rate of the
external digital device to that of the D-160. If the sampling rate setting does not match,
you cannot record the S/P DIF digital signal and noise may be generated.
Refer to “2-4. Setting a sampling rate” for more information on how to check the sampling
rate of the selected Program. You can also check the rate via the 48kHz indicator located
above the display.
63
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording/Playback)
Setting up a digital output track
Set the output tracks according to the type of digital signal selected in “Digi. Out ?”
in Setup mode. In the following setup items, Lch=1~16 and Rch=1~16 are outputs
of S/P DIF digital signals and will be output only from DATA OUTPUT 1-8.
At output of "adat" digital signals, signals from DATA OUTPUT 1-8 and DATA
OUTPUT 9-16 will be respectively output to ch1~8 and ch9~16.
* Refer to “2-16. Digital output track setting in Setup mode” on page "159" for more
information on the procedure and details.
* Initial setting: adat
* Options: L ch=adat, ch1~16, R ch= ch1~16
* This parameter is common to all Programs.
* This parameter setting cannot be saved or loaded as part of the song data.
* This parameter settings will be retained after the power is turned off.
* All tracks including tracks specified for digital output also output analog signal.
Setting up an external device
Set the external device so that it will accept a digital signal. On some devices, you
may need to set it so that the device will synchronize to the input digital signal.
For example, if you are using a Fostex RD-8, select “DIGITAL IN” for input, and set
“Clock Source” (external sync signal) to “Word Optical (adat).”
<Note>
When you are monitoring the digital signal from the external device and a signal cannot
be input or digital noise is generated, check the connection, cabling, and settings on the
D-160 and the external device.
* Refer to the instruction manual that came with the external digital device for more
information.
Recording
1. Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP button to locate the top of the
Program (ABS 0) (LOCATE ABS 0).
2. Start recording on the external device.
You do not need to adjust the recording level in digital recording.
3. Press the PLAY button to start playing back on the D-160.
Check to see if the level meter of the external device is moving, and responding to the
input signal.
4. When recording is complete, stop the D-160 and the external device.
<Note>
* Do not remove the optical cable or perform any other operation that would disconnect
the digital signal until the session is complete. Otherwise, the D-160 will generate noise,
and affect the connected device.
64
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording/Playback)
4-3. Connecting a digital mixer
***** About Digital Loop *****
As shown in the figure, connecting the input and output connectors of the D-160 to
the output and input of a digital mixer respectively may cause digital looping.
When you select a digital input track, the D-160 will automatically enter “sync to the
external word clock in digital input signal” mode. If you set the connected digital
mixer to the same condition (that is, “sync to the external word clock in digital input
signal” mode), both devices will try to lock to the external word clock, resulting in a
digital loop that prevents synchronization from being established.
To avoid this situation, follow one of the suggestions below, depending on the type
of the connected mixer.
DIGITAL IN
DATA OUT
D-160
Digital Mixer
DIGITAL OUT
DATA IN
LOOP
A. Using a digital mixer that accepts a digital signal if you select its internal clock as sync source:
The mixer is always able to input and output a digital signal to and from the D-160.
Select an appropriate digital signal to input in the “digital input track” parameter on
the D-160. The D-160 will lock to the external word clock.
B. Using a digital mixer that locks to the external clock when you select digital input on the D-160:
You need to change the settings on both devices. If you wish to input a digital signal
to the D-160, select an appropriate digital signal to input in the “digital input track”
parameter. You cannot select “digital in” on the digital mixer. On the other hand, if
you wish to input a digital signal to the digital mixer, select “digital in” on the digital
mixer, and set the “digital input track” parameter of the D-160 to “L-- R--” (no
assignment).
This section uses a digital mixer as an example, but the same problem applies to any
other digital device. Any digital device (DAT, adat, etc.) can replace the digital
mixer in this explanation.
The precaution described above applies to a system in which both the input and
output of the D-160 are connected to the output and input of the external device
respectively. If you connect either one of them (output or input), the device that
accepts the input signal will lock and sync to the output device.
The example here uses a digital mixer that can accept a digital input signal when
its internal clock (INTERNAL) is selected.
Connecting a digital mixer
Connect the DATA INPUT of the D-160 to the digital output jack of the digital mixer, and
the DATA OUTPUT of the D-160 to the digital input jack of the mixer.
D-160
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
4
ANALOG IN
3
2
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
4
DATA
3
2
INPUT
1
9~16
8
7
6
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1~8
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
MIDI
OUTPUT
9~6
INPUT
1~8
OUTPUT
9
DATA INPUT (1-8 or 9-16)
Digital Out
DATA OUTPUT (1-8 or 9-16)
Digital In
Digital Mixer
65
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
THRU
D-160 Owner's Manual (Recording/Playback)
Setting a digital mixer
1. Select the internal clock (INTERNAL).
2. Set the mixer so that it will be able to accept a digital input signal.
* Refer to the instruction manual that came with the external digital device.
Setting the D-160
1. Select a Program.
* Refer to “2-2. Program Change” for the procedure and details.
2. Set a sampling rate.
Set the sampling rate of the D-160 to that of the digital mixer.
* Refer to “2-4. Setting a sampling rate” for the procedure and details.
3. Set the digital input track in Setup mode according to the type of the digital input signal.
* Refer to “2-15. Digital input track setting in Setup mode” on page "157" for
the procedure and details.
4. Set the digital output signal in the digital output track parameter in Setup mode.
* Refer to “2-16. Digital output track setting in Setup mode” on page "159" for
the procedure and details.
<Note>
When you set up a digital input track, the settings for the external sync signal of
the “Slave mode type setting” in Setup mode (that is, Vari, S/P DIF, adat, and Free)
will be ignored, and the D-160 will sync to the specified digital input signal. Refer
to “2-13. Slave mode type setting” in Setup mode on page "155" for more
information.
66
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
Locate Function
The D-160 can immediately locate to any desired point .
That is, it can move the current time or function position of the recorder.
Available locate points are: memory data points (time or bar/beat/clock) stored in
the Memory keys (CLIPBOARD IN/OUT, AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/
END, and LOCATE keys), the beginning of a Program (ABS 0), and the end of a
recording (ABS END).
The D-160 is also equipped with an Auto function, which operates as an extended
Locate function, including Auto Play, Auto Return, and Auto Repeat functions.
1. Storing memory data
There are three methods by which you can store memory data: by grabbing a
desired time value in real-time when the recorder is playing back or stopped, by
editing and storing a desired data, by recalling previously-stored memory data,
changing it, and storing it.
These methods can also be used in the Auto Return function, Auto Punch In/Out
function, and the edit operations, such as Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, and Erase.
Try to become familiar with the methods described here.
Storing memory data in real-time
1. While the recorder is playing back (or stopped), press the HOLD/> key at the time value
(bar/beat/clock) you wish to store.
The time value of the point at which you pressed the HOLD/> key will be retained,
and the D-160 enter the edit mode. “LOCATE” will light on the display.
2. Press the STORE key. The STORE LED will light.)
3. Press the memory key to which you wish to store data.
The retained time value (bar/beat/clock) will be stored as memory key data,
and the Time Base display will be restored. The STORE LED goes off.
* To take a short cut (to skip Step 2), press the STORE key instead of the HOLD/> key
in Step 1.
Editing and storing data
1. While the recorder is playing back (or stopped), press the HOLD/> key at the time value
(bar/beat/clock) you wish to store.
The time value of the point at which you pressed the HOLD/> key will be retained,
and the D-160 enter the edit mode. “LOCATE” will light on the display.
2. Use the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits of the time (bar/
beat/clock), and use the JOG dial to edit them.
3. Press the STORE key. The STORE LED will light.
4. Press a memory key to which you wish to store data.
The retained time value (bar/beat/clock) will be stored as memory key data,
and the Time Base display will be restored. The STORE LED goes off.
* To take a short cut (to skip Step 3), press the STORE key instead of the HOLD/> key
in Step 1.
67
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
Recalling, editing, and storing data
1. Press a memory key for which you wish to recall data. (Alternatively, press the RECALL
key, and then a memory key.)
The D-160 will display the time value stored in the key (bar/beat/clock) and enter
the data edit mode.
2. Use the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits of the time (bar/
beat/clock), and use the JOG dial to edit them.
3. Press the STORE key. The STORE LED will light.
4. Press a memory key to which you wish to store data.
The retained time value (bar/beat/clock) is stored as memory key data, and the Time
Base display will be restored. The STORE LED goes off.
You do not necessarily have to store the edited data to the memory key that you
pressed to recall the original data. For example, you can press the AUTO PUNCH IN
key to recall its memory data, edit it, and store the data to the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.
* Memory data can be stored for each Program (P1-P99) individually.
* Memory data will be saved and loaded as part of the song data in Setup mode.
* Memory data will be retained after you turn off the power.
* Refer to page "50" for information on the Program Change function.
* Refer to page "102" for information on the save and load operation.
<Hints>
If " Resolution?" menu (bar/beat resolution mode) has been turned on in the Setup mode
when the "BAR/BEAT/CLK" Time Based is being used, press the HOLD/> key or the STORE
key to hold the current bar/beat clock value on the display. You can round off the clock
value to "00" (that is, to a bar/beat value).
This function is very useful when you wish to use the memory data in beat steps.
Refer to page "160" for more information on Bar/Beat Resolution ON/OFF menu in Setup
mode.
68
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
2. Locate
The following table shows how to locate to a data point.
Use the following key sequences to locate a certain point.
In this table, "+" indicates that you need to press the specified key while pressing
and holding down the STOP button.
"->" indicates that you need to first press one key, then press a second key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STOP+REWIND
Locates the beginning of the hard program (ABS 0).
STOP+F FWD
Locates the end of the recorded area on the program (ABS END).
CLIPBOARD IN->LOCATE
Locates the stored Clipboard In point.
CLIPBOARD OUT->LOCATE Locates the stored Clipboard Out point.
AUTO RTN START->LOCATE Locates the stored Auto Return Start point.
AUTO RTN END->LOCATE
Locates the stored Auto Return End point.
AUTO PUNCH IN->LOCATE Locates the stored Auto Punch In point.
AUTO PUNCH OUT->LOCATE Locates the stored Auto Punch Out point.
LOCATE
Locates the stored Locate point (see the note below).
Also, follow the procedure below to locate directly to the point of a time value
(bar/beat/clock).
1. While the recorder is playing back, press the HOLD/> key at the time value (bar/
beat/clock) you wish to store.
The time value of the point at which you pressed the HOLD/> key is retained,
and the D-160 enter the edit mode. "LOCATE" will light on the display.
2. Use the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits of the time
(bar/beat/clock), and use the JOG dial to adjust their value.
3. Press the LOCATE key.
The D-160 will locate the point of the edited time value, and the Time Base
indication will be restored. ("LOCATE" lights up on the display.)
<Notes>
* Each time a different Memory location (3-8) is located, the LOCATE key memory will
be automatically overwritten by the new time value (bar/beat/clock) of the point that
was just located. For example, assume that the LOCATE key has a Memory location of
00h: 05m: 40s: 00f: 00sf. When you locate an AUTO RTN START point of 00h: 03m:
00s: 00f: 00sf. If you do not perform a different locate operation, the LOCATE key
memory will not change and will always allow the unit to locate to the same point (bar/
beat/clock).
* You can check the LOCATE key memory data by pressing the RECALL key, and then
the LOCATE key. You can also edit this data, and store the LOCATE key's own data by
pressing the STORE key, and then the LOCATE key.
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOCATE point
○
○
○
○
LOCATE
STOP point
You can set the preroll point within a
range of 0 to 10 seconds (Refer to page
"149" for details.)
69
LOCATE
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
3. Auto Play mode
Turn the Auto Play mode on before using the Direct Locate function, and the D-160 will
automatically start playback from the located point .
The diagram below illustrates this operation.
To turn Auto Play mode on, press the AUTO PLAY/AUTO RTN key so that the AUTO PLAY
LED will light up. To cancel this mode, press the AUTO PLAY/AUTO RTN key again so that
the AUTO PLAY LED will go off.
* Refer to page "15" "Names and Functions" for instructions on using the AUTO PLAY
and AUTO RTN keys.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AUTO PUNCH IN point
○
PLAY BACK
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOCATE
LOCATE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AUTO PUNCH IN key -> LOCATE key
AUTO PUNCH IN key -> LOCATE key
LOCATE point
You can set the preroll point within a range
of 0 to 10 seconds (Refer to page "149"
for details.)
4. Auto Return mode
To turn Auto Return mode on, press the AUTO PLAY/AUTO RTN key so that the
AUTO RTN LED will light up.
To use the Auto Return function, first you need to specify the Auto Return Start
point and Auto Return End point.
As shown in the diagram below, the D-160 will play back data to the Auto Return
End point, then automatically locate the Auto Return Start point, and then stop.
<Note>
The start point will not be located after the AUTO RTN END point is reached when
the D-160 is in record mode.
AUTO RTN START point
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOCATE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY BACK
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AUTO RTN END point
STOP point
You can set the preroll point within a range
of 0 to 10 seconds (Refer to page "149"
for details.)
70
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
4-1. Setting the Auto Return Start/End point
There are two ways to set the Auto Return Start point and End point: one is to hold
and store a desired time value in real-time during playback or while the D-160 is
stopped; the other is to edit and store the desired time.
Storing the Start/End point in real-time
3
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
6
1, 4
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
EXIT
/NO
RECALL
2, 5
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
1. While the D-160 is playing back or stopped, press the HOLD/> key at the location
you wish to store as the Start point.
The time value obtained when you press the HOLD/> key will be held, and the
D-160 will enter the edit mode.
* The Bar/Beat Resolution menu setting is available when BAR/BEAT/CLK is used
for the Time Base. Refer to page “160” for details.
2. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED will light up.)
3. Press the AUTO RTN START key.
The time value you held will be stored as the Start point, and the display will go
back to the previous screen that was before the time value was held. The STORE
LED will go off.
4. Press the HOLD/> key again at the location you wish to store as the End point.
5. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED will light up.)
6. Press the AUTO RTN END key.
The time value you held will be stored as the End point, and the display will go
back to the previous screen before the time value was held.
* In steps 1 and 4 described above, you can press the STORE key instead of the
HOLD/> key, and then press the AUTO RTN START/AUTO RTN END key to set
the data more quickly.
71
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
Editing and storing the Start/End point
1, 2, 5
3, 7
8
4
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
2, 6
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
1. Press the HOLD/> key while the D-160 is playing back or stopped.
The time value at the moment when you pressed the HOLD/> key will be held
and the unit will enter the edit mode.
* The Bar/Beat Resolution menu setting is available when BAR/BEAT/CLK is used
for the Time Base. Refer to page “160” for details.
2. Move the cursor to the time value (bar) using the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE
dial, and use the JOG dial to change the value.
3. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED will light up.)
4. Press the AUTO RTN START key.
The edited time value will be stored as the Start point, and the display will
return to the screen displayed before you held the time value. (The STORE LED
will go off.)
5. Press the HOLD/> key again.
6. Enter the value as you did in step 2.
7. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED will light up.)
8. Press the AUTO RTN END key.
The edited time value will be stored as the End point, and the display will go
back to the screen before you held the time value.
* In steps 1 and 5 described above, you can press the STORE key instead of the
HOLD/> key, edit the time value (bar), and then press the AUTO RTN START/
AUTO RTN END key to set the data more quickly.
72
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
Changing the stored Start / End points
3
1, 3
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
DISP SEL
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
1
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
2
1. Press the RECALL key, and then the AUTO RTN START key or AUTO RUN END
key. (As a short-cut, you can press the AUTO RTN START key or AUTO RTN
END key directly.)
The display will show the time value stored at the key, and the unit will enter
the edit mode.
2. Move the cursor to the time value (bar) using the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial,
and use the JOG dial to change the value.
3. Press the STORE key, then press the AUTO RTN START key or AUTO RTN END
key.
The edited time value will be stored as the Start point or End point.
<Note>
Pay attention to the location of the Start and End points. If you have set a larger
value to the Start point than the End point while both Auto Return mode and Auto
Play mode are on, the D-160 will jump to the Start point and continue to play the
rest of the data after playing to the End point (which is located before the Start
point).
Therefore, the repeat operation (explained later) will not be carried out correctly).
The Auto Return mode is effective only when the unit is in play mode.
<Hints>
If " Resolution?" menu (bar/beat resolution mode) has been turned on in the Setup
mode when the "BAR/BEAT/CLK" Time Based is being used, press the HOLD/> key or
the STORE key to hold the current bar/beat clock value on the display, and you can
round off the clock value to "00" (that is, to a bar/beat value).
This function is useful when you wish to use the memory data in beat steps.
Refer to page "160" for more information on
73
Resolution menu in Setup mode.
D-160 Owner's Manual (Locate function)
5. Auto Repeat mode
The Auto Repeat function is a combination of the Auto Play mode and
the Auto Return mode. To access the Auto Repeat function, press the
AUTO PLAY/AUTO RTN key so that both AUTO RTN LED and AUTO PLAY
LED light.
You also need to set the Auto Return Start point and the Auto Return End
point, as you did for the Auto Return function. (Refer to the previous section
"Auto Return" for information on setting the Start and End points.)
With the Auto Repeat function, the D-160 plays data up to the Auto Return
End point, then automatically locates the Auto Return Start point, and
plays back data between the Start and End points repeatedly, until you
cancel playback using the STOP button.
* Refer to page “15” of "Names and Functions" for instructions on using the AUTO
PLAY and AUTO RTN keys.
AUTO RTN START point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AUTO RTN END point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY BACK
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOCATE
LOCATE point
You can set the preroll point within a
range of 0 to 10 seconds (Refer to page
"149" for details.)
<Hints>
Using the Auto Repeat function when you are rehearsing Auto Punch In/
Out recording, allows you to rehearse as many times as you want without
tedious operations. For example, by setting the Start point just before the
Auto Punch In point and the End point just before the Auto Punch Out
point, you do not need to worry about locating the data and can concentrate
on rehearsing.
AUTO PUNCH OUT point
AUTO PUNCH IN point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AUTO RTN END point
PLAY BACK
○
○
○
○
PLAY BACK
○
○
Rehearsal will be repeated automatically as many times
as you like to make it easier to adjust the recording level.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Rehearsal area
○
○
○
AUTO RTN START point
74
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
Punch In/Out
Punch In/Out recording is used to re-record data onto a certain area of a prerecorded track. For example, you can replace a phrase from your guitar solo
with a better performance.
There are two ways to Punch In/Out record: Auto Punch In/Out recording, in
which you specify the Punch In/Out points; and Manual Punch In/Out recording,
in which you use optional foot switch Model 8051.
In either case, the Rehearsal function allows you to practice before the actual
take. Using the Punch In/Out recording technique, you can easily and quickly
replace mistakes or phrases you do not like with more desirable takes.
Choose one of these methods to suit your preferences and applications.
* The example here explains how to replace "part of the guitar solo" recorded on
Track 3 with a new phrase by playing the guitar , while listening to the drum and
bass sound recorded on Tracks 1 and 2.
Once you master Punch In/Out recording, you can use this technique for other
tracks.
* Assume that the guitar is connected to the mixer input, and that the output signal
from the mixer is routed to Track 3 of the D-160.
* Do not change the Program or sampling rate until the session is complete.
* First make sure that the D-160 is set to the default setting.
Punch In point
Punch Out point
Track 16
Track 15
Track 14
Track 13
Track 12
Track 11
Track 10
Track 9
Track 8
Track 7
Track 6
Track 5
Track 4
Track 3
Track 2
Track 1
Replace area
75
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
1. Auto Punch In/Out
To perform Auto Punch In/Out recording, first you need to specify the In
point (recording start point) and the Out point (recording end point).
Once these two points are stored, the D-160 automatically starts recording
at the In point and stops recording at the Out point while the recorder is in
"Take mode." When you use the Auto Punch In/Out function, you can
select "Rehearsal mode" to practice to your satisfaction before you record.
1-1. Storing the Punch In/Punch Out point
Here, we assume that Program 1 with the “ABS” Time Base has been selected.
If you wish to choose other Program, press the STORE key while holding
down the HOLD/> key.
Storing the Punch In point
1, 2
4
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
3
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
2
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
1. Press the HOLD/> key while the recorder is playing back or stopped.
The following example shows that a time of two minutes, 40 seconds, 3 frames,
and 28 sub-frames is held, and the Program indication is changed to the subframe indication.
Blink (Edit point)
* Pressing the STORE key will enter the D-160 to into hold/edit status.
In this case, you can omit step 3 below.
2. Press the HOLD/> key or turn the SHUTTLE dial to select the digit you wish to
edit, and then use the JOG dial to change the time value.
For example, setup the Auto Punch In point to "3 minutes, 15 seconds, 10 frames".
3. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED will light up.)
4. Press the AUTO PUNCH IN key.
The specified time value will be stored as a Punch In point, and the STORE LED
will go off.
76
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
Storing the Punch Out point
5, 6
8
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
START
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
EXIT
/NO
RECALL
7
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
6
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
5. Press the HOLD/> key to enter edit mode.
6. Press the HOLD/> key or turn the SHUTTLE dial to select the digit you wish to
edit, then use the JOG dial to change the time value.
For example, setup the Auto Punch Out point to "3 minutes, 35 seconds, 15
frames".
7. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED will light up.)
8. Press the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.
The specified time value will be stored as a Punch Out point, and the STORE LED
will go off.
* To check the stored Punch In/Out point, press the RECALL key, and then press
the AUTO PUNCH IN key and/or the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.
Alternatively, press the AUTO PUNCH IN/AUTO PUNCH OUT key.
The display will show the stored time value.
<Note>
You cannot set the Punch Out point before the Punch In point location.
If the Punch Out point precedes the Punch In point and you try to "punch in,"
the message "Void Out Point!" appears on the screen immediately after you press
the AUTO PUNCH key, indicating that the time value of the Punch Out point is
inappropriate. Be sure to specify a larger value for the Punch Out point than for
the Punch In point.
<Hints>
If “ Resolution” menu (Bar/Beat Resolution mode) has been turned on in the
Setup mode when the “BAR/BEAT/CLK” Time Based is being used, press the
HOLD/> key or the STORE key to hold the current bar/beat clock value on the
display, and you can round off the clock value to “00” (that is, to a bar/beat
value). This function is useful when you wish to use the memory data in beat
steps.
* Refer to page "*160" for more information on "
mode.
77
Resolution" menu in Setup
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
1-2. Auto Punch In/Out Rehearsal mode
Set the “READY” track into Input monitoring status for the part between
the Punch In point and the Punch Out point in Rehearsal mode. (Other
tracks are in playback monitoring status.) In Rehearsal mode, nothing is
actually recorded. You can repeat rehearsal as many times as you wish
adjust the In point, Out point, and recording level.
2
3
1
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
4
Rehearsal
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select “3” key to ready Track 3. (“3” on the display
will blink.)
2. Locate a point just before the Punch In point, using one of the following methods:
Press the AUTO PUNCH IN key, then the LOCATE key. (The Auto Punch In point
will be located.) Then, press the REWIND button, or turn the SHUTTLE dial
counter-clockwise to locate a position slightly ahead. Setting a “Pre-roll” value
will make it easier to locate a position the specified number of seconds before
the Auto Punch In point.)
Refer to page "149" for information on the Pre-roll setting function.
Alternatively, you can store the playback start point (time) at the AUTO RTN
START for future locate operations. (You need to use the AUTO RTN START
key for Step 4 of "Storing the Punch In point.")
3. Press the AUTO PUNCH key. (The REHEARSAL and TAKE LEDs will light up.)
If the disk does not have enough free space for auto punch in/out, the “Over !”
indications appear.
Refer to “Warning” in the “Display” section in the manual.
4. Press the PLAY button.
Rehearsal mode is engaged as follows on the next page:
5. Rehearse the guitar part while playing back the drum and bass sounds.
You will hear the guitar sound you are playing only between the punch in and
punch out points.
78
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
Rehearsal mode (Auto Punch In/Out)
○
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status.
3
RECORD TRACK display
REHEARSAL LED
TAKE LED
AUTO PUNCH OUT point
AUTO PUNCH IN point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Only track 3 enters INPUT monitoring
status. (However, the D-160 will not
record and data in Rehearsal mode.)
3
Blink
REHEARSAL LED will light up.
○
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status.
3
Light up
REHEARSAL LED will light up.
Blink
REHEARSAL LED will light up
PLAY
PLAY button LED
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY
PLAY
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY LED will light up
RECORD
RECORD button LED
RECORD LED will blink
<Hints>
If you are rehearsing over and over, an effective time-saver is to use the Auto Return
function along with the Auto Play function.
As shown in the diagram below, specifying the Start and End points for the Auto Return
and Auto Play functions allows you to easily rehearse as many times as you like. This
enables you to pay more attention to the recording level and your own performance.
Refer to pages "71" for more information on setting the Start/End points for the Auto
Return/Auto Play functions.
AUTO PUNCH IN point
AUTO PUNCH OUT point
○
○
○
AUTO RTN END point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AUTO RTN START point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Rehearsal will be repeated automatically as many times as
you like to make it easier to adjust the recording level.
1-3. Auto Punch In/Out Take mode (actual recording)
Proceed to recording after rehearsal.
Take
1. Check to see which tracks are in ready mode.
Please note that data will be recorded in all tracks set to ready mode.
2. As in Rehearsal mode, locate the point just before the Punch In point.
3. Auto Punch mode is "on".
4. Press the RECORD button while pressing and holding down the PLAY button.
The REHEARSAL LED (green) will go off and the TAKE LED (red) will light up.
5. Play the guitar while listening to the playback sound.
As shown in the illustration below, the recorder will start recording automatically
at the Punch In point, and stop recording at the Punch Out point.
79
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
* When recording is finished, the Auto Punch mode will be canceled, and both
REHEARSAL and TAKE LEDs will go off.
Take mode (Auto Punch In/Out)
○
3
REHEARSAL LED
TAKE LED
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Only Track 3 enters INPUT monitoring
status. (Unlike in Rehearsal mode, the
D-160 will record data.)
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status.
RECORD TRACK display
AUTO PUNCH OUT point
AUTO PUNCH IN point
3
Blink
TAKE LED will light up
○
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status.
Refer to "Caution after Punch
Out" for details.
3
Light up
TAKE LED will light up
Blink
Both LEDs will go off
PLAY
PLAY button LED
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY
PLAY LED will light up
RECORD
RECORD button LED
RECORD LED will light up
<Caution after Punch Out>
At "Take" of punch out, the punch-in recording track will not immediately
enter the repro monitor mode from the input monitor mode but enter
the repro monitor mode about two seconds after mute playback.
This is a functional feature of D-160 and not a malfunction.
1-4. Undo/Redo of Auto Punch In/Out
* If you press the UNDO key after performing the auto punch in/out operation, the original sound
recorded prior to auto punch in/out will be restored.
* If you press the REDO key after undoing the auto punch in/out operation, the auto punch in/out
data will be restored.
<Note>
You can use the undo/redo functions while the D-160 is in stop mode.
Under the following circumstances, you will be unable to use the undo/redo functions;
1. If you make a new recording,
2. If you make a new edit (copy & paste, move & paste, or erase),
3. If the Auto Punch In point was passed in play or record mode while Auto Punch
mode was on, or
4. If you turned off the power to the D-160, then turned it back on.
5. If you use the Program Change function.
80
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
2. Punch In/Out Recording using a foot switch
The "Take mode" and "Rehearsal mode" are also available in this application.
Pressing the foot switch repeatedly while holding down the STOP button
will toggle between "take" and "rehearsal." The REHEARSAL LED of the
AUTO PUNCH key will blink during Rehearsal mode, and the LED will turn
off during "Take mode."
1. Select the track onto which you wish to punch in/out record.
2. Start playback just before the punch in point.
3. Press the foot switch when you want to start recording.
4. Press the foot switch again when recording is finished.
In this lesson, we are going to replace part of the guitar solo recorded on
Track 3, as we did in the Auto Punch In/Out section.
*
*
*
Set the D-160 to the default setting.
Use an optional foot switch Model 8051 for punch in/out recording.
Set Auto Punch mode to OFF. (The REHEARSAL LED and the TAKE LED will be
turned off.)
*
Do not change the Program or sampling rate until the session is complete.
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
OFF (REHEARSAL LED/TAKE
LEDs will go off.)
FOOT SWITCH Model 8051
<CAUTION>
Turn off the D-160 before connecting or disconnecting any cables.
Connecting or disconnecting the footswitch or detachable controller
cables while the D-160 is turned on will cause it to malfunction.
81
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
2-1. Punch In/Out Rehearsal (Using a foot switch)
Rehearsal
1. Press the foot switch once while holding down the STOP button.
The D-160 will enter the "Rehearsal" mode, and the 35 dot display on the upper
row of the screen will show "Rehearsal On" for one second. Only the REHEARSAL
LED (green) will blink.
2. Press the RECORD TRACK select key “3” to set Track 3 to ready mode. (Indicator
“3” will flash.)
3. Press the PLAY button at a location just before the punch in point to play back
data.
4. Rehearse the guitar part while playing back the drum and bass sounds.
5. Press the foot switch once at the Punch In point, and press the foot switch
again at the Punch Out point. The following diagram illustrates this operation.
You will hear the guitar sound you are playing only between the punch in and
out points.
Rehearsal mode (manual Punch In/Out)
PUNCH OUT point
PUNCH IN point
○
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status.
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
REHEARSAL LED
TAKE LED
3
Blink
REHEARSAL LED will blink
○
○
○
○
○
○
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status.
Press the foot
switch again.
Press the foot
switch once.
RECORD TRACK display
○
Only Track 3 enters INPUT monitoring
status. (However, the D-160 will not
record any data in Rehearsal mode.)
3
Light up
REHEARSAL LED will blink
Blink
REHEARSAL LED will blink
PLAY
PLAY button LED
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY
PLAY
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY LED will light up
RECORD
RECORD button LED
RECORD LED will blink
End of rehearsal
1. Press the foot switch again while holding down the STOP button to cancel
Rehearsal mode.
The 35 dot display on the upper row of the screen will show "Rehearsal Off"
for one second. Also, the REHEARSAL LED (green) will turn off, indicating that
you have quit the Rehearsal mode.
82
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
<Hints>
PUNCH IN point
PUNCH OUT point
○
○
When you are rehearsing over and over, an effective time-saver is to use
the Auto Return function along with the Auto Play function.
As shown in the diagram below, specifying the Start and End points for
the Auto Return and Auto Play functions allows you to easily rehearse as
many times as you like. In this way, you can pay more attention to the
recording level and your own performance. Refer to pages "71" for more
information on setting the Start/End points for the Auto Return/Auto Play
functions.
○
AUTO RTN END point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AUTO RTN START point
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Rehearsal will be repeated automatically as many times as you
to make it easier to adjust the recording level.
2-2. Punch In/Out Take (manual Punch In/Out)
1. Locate the point just before the punch in point and play back the data.
2. Play the guitar while listening to the playback.
3. Press the foot switch once at the punch in point, and press it again at the
punch out point.
When you finish punch out recording, the D-160 will quit recording mode.
Take mode (manual Punch In/Out)
PUNCH IN point
○
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status.
○
○
○
PUNCH OUT point
○
○
○
3
REHEARSAL LED
TAKE LED
○
○
○
○
○
All tracks are under REPRO
monitoring status. Refer to
"Caution after Punch Out" for
details.
Press the foot
switch again.
3
Blink
Both LEDs will go off
○
Only Track 3 enters INPUT monitoring
status. (Unlike in Rehearsal mode, the
D-160 will record data.)
Press the foot
switch once.
RECORD TRACK display
○
3
Light up
Both LEDs will go off
Blink
Both LEDs will go off
PLAY
PLAY button LED
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY
RECORD
RECORD button LED
RECORD LED will light up
83
PLAY
PLAY LED will light up
PLAY LED will light up
D-160 Owner's Manual (Punch In/Out)
<Caution after Punch Out>
At "Take" of punch out, the punch-in recording track will not immediately enter
the repro monitor mode from the input monitor mode but enter the repro monitor
mode about two seconds after mute playback.
This is a functional feature of D-160 and not a malfunction.
<Note>
Once you perform Punch In/Out recording using a footswitch, you need to stop
the D-160 before performing the next Punch In/Out take.
<Hints>
Besides the foot switch, you can also use the PLAY button and RECORD
button for Manual Punch In/Out recording. (Please note that you can
use these buttons only once.)
1 . Start playing back from a point just before the punch in point.
2 . At the punch in point, press the RECORD button while holding down the
PLAY button. (Punch In)
3 . At the punch out point, press only the PLAY button. (Punch Out)
* You can also rehearse if you "press only the RECORD button" instead
of steps 2 and 3 described above.
2-3. Undo/Redo of Manual Punch In/Out
* If you press the UNDO key after performing the manual punch in/out operation, the original
sound recorded prior to auto punch in/out will be restored.
* If you press the REDO key after undoing the manual punch in/out operation, the manual punch
in/out data will be restored.
<Note>
You can use the undo/redo functions while the D-160 is in stop mode.
Under the following circumstances, you will be unable to use the undo/redo functions;
1. If you make a new recording,
2. If you make a new edit (copy & paste, move & paste, or erase),
3. If the Auto Punch In point was passed in play or record mode while Auto Punch
mode was on, or
4. If you turned off the power to the D-160, then turned it back on.
5. If you use the Program Change function.
84
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
Edit Function
This chapter describes the various editing functions on the D-160.
The D-160 uses a hard disk as the recording media, which allows for nonlinear, non-destructive, quick audio editing. The edit function includes
the Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, and Erase functions.
<Precautions for editing>
The D-160 accommodates ninety-nine Programs, P1-P99, each of which you can
record and edit individually. First, make sure that you are about to edit the correct
Program. If you start editing without first checking the Program, you may lose
important data. Refer to the Before operation section, “2-2. Program Change,” for
more information on how to set a Program. Do not change Programs or sampling
rates until a session is complete.
<Differences between Copy & Paste and Move & Paste>
* The Copy & Paste function allows you to copy data to the Clipboard, and paste it to
any location in any track. In this case, the copy source data remains as is, as does the
data on the Clipboard.
* The Move & Paste function is almost the same as the Copy & Paste, except that
executing the Move & Paste function will erase the move source data (the Clipboard
will be also cleared).
CLIPBOARD IN point
CLIPBOARD OUT point
Copy & Paste
Source track
COPY
Clipboard
PASTE
Paste track
AUTO PUNCH IN point
CLIPBOARD IN point
CLIPBOARD OUT point
Move & Paste
Source track
MOVE
Clipboard
PASTE
Paste track
AUTO PUNCH IN point
85
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
1. Copy & Paste
The Copy & Paste functions use the clipboard of the D-160, allowing you
to copy sound data and paste it to the specified area. The copied data
remains on the clipboard after you paste it, and you can paste the same
data as many times as you want to different places. The Copy & Paste
functions can reference any one of the following time bases: ABS time,
MTC time, MIDI Bar/Beat/Clock.
*
To perform the Copy operation, you first need to set the start point (Clipboard In point) and the
end point (Clipboard Out point) of the copied data and the copy source track.
To perform the Paste operation, you need to set the start point (Auto Punch In point) and the
paste destination point.
<Note-1>
The data on the Clipboard will be replaced by new data each time you press the COPY
key of the MOVE key.
<Note-2>
If pasted data overlaps the source data, the content of the source data will be altered.
1-1. Copying
First, you need to specify the area to be copied (using the Clipboard In/
Out points and copy track).
*
*
*
The following procedure is based on data with the ABS Time Base.
To change the Time Base to MTC or MIDI BAR/BEAT/CLK, press the DISP SEL key while
pressing and holding down the EXECUTE/YES key.
Before you start work, restore the default settings on the D-160.
Do not change Programs or sampling rates until a session is complete.
1, 3
4, 6
AUTO RTN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
3, 6
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
EXIT
/NO
RECALL
1, 4
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
7
8
2, 5
Entering and storing the CLIPBOARD IN point
1. Press the RECALL key, and then the CLIPBOARD IN key (or press only the
CLIPBOARD IN key). The D-160 will enter the edit mode.
2. Move the cursor to the digit you wish to change using the HOLD/> key or the
SHUTTLE dial, and change the value using the JOG dial.
86
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
3. After setting the value, press the STORE key, then the CLIPBOARD IN key.
The time value will be stored as the Clipboard In time, the edit mode will
disengage, and the display will return to the previous screen.
Entering and storing the CLIPBOARD OUT point
4. Press the RECALL key, and then the CLIPBOARD OUT key (or press only the
CLIPBOARD OUT key). The D-160 will enter the edit mode.
5. Move the cursor to the digit you wish to change using the HOLD/> key or the
SHUTTLE dial, and change the value using the JOG dial.
6. After setting the value, press the STORE key, and then the CLIPBOARD OUT
key.
The time value will be stored as the Clipboard Out time, the edit mode will
disengage, and the display will return to the previous screen.
* To check the stored In/Out points, press the CLIPBOARD IN key and CLIPBOARD
OUT key respectively. The time value you just stored will be shown on the display.
* You can perform steps 1-3 in real-time. (Pressing the STORE key, then the
CLIPBOARD IN key while playing back the recorder will store data.)
<Hints>
When you are storing the In/Out points in real-time while using the “BAR/BEAT/
CLK” Time Base, you can store them in steps of beats if the “ Resolution ?” menu
(Bar/Beat Resolution mode ON/OFF) in Setup mode is “On.”
When this bar/beat resolution menu is “On,” the CLK value will be rounded to
“00” (at the beginning of the beat) as soon as you press the STORE key.
This function is useful when you wish to use the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste
function in setups of beats. Refer to page “160” for detailed operation.
Copying the track data after storing the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT points
7. Select the copy track using the RECORD TRACK select keys (you can select
multiple tracks).
* You can select one (mono) track, multiple tracks, or all sixteen tracks.
When using the Copy & Paste function, however, you can change the paste
destination track only when you have selected a mono track, or an odd-numbered
track and the adjacent even-track (i.e.: 1-2, 3-4, or 13-14,15-16).
If you have copied multiple tracks (other than the above combination), the data will
be pasted to the copy source tracks. (track 1-> track 1.........track 3-> track 3 etc.)
8. Press the COPY key.
Upon finishing copying to the clipboard, "Copy Clip"/"COMPLETED!" will appear
in the display and then return to the original time base display.
In this way, the specified part of the sound data of the selected track(s) is
copied to the clipboard.
87
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
<Note 1>
If you press the COPY key without selecting a copy source track by the RECORD
TRACK select key, the display will show "Select Track!" (meaning “Select a copy track.”)
and return to the previous screen. In this case, select a copy source track and try to
copy the data again.
<Note 2>
If an Output point has been specified before the In point (the In point value is the
same or large than the Out point value), the display will show the error message
“Void In Point!” or “Void Out Point!” and return to the previous screen. In this case,
set the correct In/Out points and try again to copy the data.
<Note 3>
The data on the Clipboard will be replaced by new data each time you press the COPY
key or the MOVE key.
Listening to sound data copied on the clipboard (Clipboard Play function)
To listen to the sound data currently copied to the clipboard, press the
PLAY button while holding down the STOP button (Clipboard Play mode).
The data will be played back from the beginning. To stop the playback in
the middle, press the STOP button.
*
During the clipboard playback, the display show the position of the source data
referenced to the selected time base.
1-2. Copy & Pasting
You can paste data to the same track as the source. For example, if you
copied data on Track 1, data will be pasted on Track 1. Data will be pasted
starting from the Auto Punch In point.
<Note>
You need enough unrecorded space on the hard disk to execute the Copy & Paste operation.
If you press the PASTE key with insufficient disk space, the display will immediately show
the error message “Over !”, and then show the excess time using the currently-selected Time
Base (time or bar).
In this case, shorten the copy data by the amount of excess time. Alternatively, move ABS
END backward using the ERASE function as described in page “96” of this manual in order
to obtain more free space on the hard disk.
3
6
1, 3
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
DISP SEL
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
5
4
88
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
2
RECALL
1
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
Entering and storing the paste Punch In point
1. Press the RECALL key, then the AUTO PUNCH IN key (or press only the AUTO
PUNCH IN key). The D-160 will enter the edit mode.
2. Move the cursor to the digit you wish to edit using the HOLD/> key or the
SHUTTLE dial, and set the value using the JOG dial.
3. After setting the time value, press the STORE key, and then the AUTO PUNCH
IN key.
The time value will be stored as the start point of the pasting area, and the
display will go back to the previous screen.
Executing the paste operation
4. Press the PASTE key.
When the PASTE key is pressed, "Copy Paste" is momentarily show in the display,
then "Paste Repeat = 01 (01 blinks)" and "SURE?" will blink, and the copy source
track display will be lit.
5. Specifying the copy destination track and the number of repeats to paste.
* Specifying the Copy & Paste destination track:
Select the destination track using the RECORD TRACK select key. (You do not
need to specify the track if you are going to Copy & Paste data in the copy
source track.)
* Specifying the number of repeats to Copy & Paste:
Turn the JOG dial to change the blinking number “01” to any value between 1
and 99. (If there is not enough free space on the hard disk, the repeat time will
be limited to a number less than 99, and you will be unable to specify a larger
number when you turn the JOG dial.)
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
Simultaneous with execution of paste, the paste section length converted to
mono track time length will be shown in the upper line of the display and "Copy
Paste," "COMPLETED!" displayed after completing the paste.
Press the EXIT/NO key to go back to the previous screen.
Now the audio data on the Clipboard has been pasted to the specified
track starting with the AUTO PUNCH IN point.
For example, executing the function with a repeat number of “Paste Repeat=
03” (three times) will paste the data as shown in the diagram below.
AUTO PUNCH IN point
Repeat number of "01"
1
Repeat number of "03"
1
2
3
* To cancel the paste operation, press the EXIT/NO key while the message “SURE?” is
blinking on the display.
If you wish to cancel the paste operation after you press the EXECUTE/YES key, press
the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key before the “COMPLETED!” message appears on
the display.
If you abort the paste operation using this procedure (even in the middle of the operation),
no data will be pasted.
89
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
<Note 1>
The Copy & Paste function is available only when the hard disk has enough space
(REMAIN) to perform the following Undo/Redo operation.
If you try to copy & paste the data without enough free space on the hard disk, the
display will indicate the alarm message “Over !” (overtime error) as soon as you
press the PASTE key, then indicate the excessive time in the currently-selected
Time Base.
To avoid this, shorten the data to be copied, by the amount of the exceeding time,
or use the Erase function to create free disk space as described below in order to
move the ABS END point.
<Note 2>
Do not copy data and paste it partially over itself (same track and part of the same
time frame). This will alter both the copy source data and the data currently
contained in the clipboard.
If you accidentally do this, use the Undo function as explained in the following
section. You will be unable to restore the original data if you proceed with editing
without first performing the Undo operation.
You can also paste the move data repeatedly by specifying the number of repeats
(1-99). The difference between "Move & Paste" and "Copy & Paste" is that moving
data will cause the source sound data to move to the Clipboard, and then to the
destination, and the data in the source or in the Clipboard will be erased.
This operation is available with any Time Base.
1-3. Copy & Paste Undo/Redo
If you wish to restore data that existed before you executed the Copy & Paste
function, press the UNDO key to restore the status obtained before you pasted the
data. Pressing the REDO key after pressing the UNDO key will restore the status
before the Undo operation (that is, after pasting). The Undo and Redo functions
are effective only when the D-160 is stopped.
After the UNDO key or REDO key is pressed, the display will show "Undo" or "Redo",
and "COMPLETED!" and return to the previous screen.
<Note>
You can use the undo/redo functions while the D-160 is in the stop mode.
Under the following circumstances, you will be unable to use the undo/redo functions:
1.If you make a new recording,
2.If you make a new edit (Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase),
3.If the Auto Punch In point was passed in play or record mode while Auto Punch mode
was on, or
4. If you turned off the power to the D-160, then turned it back on.
5. If you use the Program Change function.
90
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
2. Move & Paste
The Move & Paste function “moves” sound data to the Clipboard, and
“pastes” the data in the same track or another track. You can specify the
number of repeats of the paste operation (1-99) to paste data repeatedly.
The difference between the Copy & Paste and the Move & Paste operation
is that, after the Move & Paste operation, the source data and the data on
the Clipboard will be removed. You can use this function with any Time
Base.
* To perform the Move operation, you first need to set the start point (Clipboard In point)
and the end point (Clipboard Out point) of the data to be moved, and the move source
track. To perform the Paste operation, you need to set the start point (Auto Punch In
point) and the paste destination point.
<Note>
The data on the Clipboard will be replaced by new data each time you press the
COPY key or the MOVE key.
2-1. Moving
First, you need to specify the area to be moved (using the Clipboard In/
Out points and move track).
* The following procedure is based on data with the ABS Time Base.
To change the Time Base to MTC or MIDI BAR/BEAT/CLK, press the DISP SEL key while
pressing and holding down the EXECUTE/YES key.
* Before you start working, restore the default settings on the D-160.
* Do not change Programs or sampling rates until a session is complete.
1, 3
4, 6
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
3, 6
AUTO RTN
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
AUTO PLAY
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
EXIT
/NO
RECALL
1, 4
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
8
7
2, 5
Entering and storing the CLIPBOARD IN point
1. Press the RECALL key, and then the CLIPBOARD IN key (or press only the
CLIPBOARD IN key). The D-160 will enter the edit mode.
2. Move the cursor to the digit you wish to change using the HOLD/> key or the
SHUTTLE dial, and change the value using the JOG dial.
3. After setting the value, press the STORE key, and then the CLIPBOARD IN key.
The time value will be stored as the Clipboard In time, the edit mode will
disengage, and the display will return to the previous screen.
91
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
Entering and storing the CLIPBOARD OUT point
4. Press the RECALL key, and then the CLIPBOARD OUT key (or press only the
CLIPBOARD OUT key). The D-160 will enter the edit mode.
5. Move the cursor to the digit you wish to change the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE
dial, and change the value using the JOG dial.
6. After setting the value, press the STORE key, and then the CLIPBOARD OUT
key.
The time value will be stored as the Clipboard Out time, the edit mode will
disengage, and the display will return to the previous screen.
* To check the stored In/Out points, press the CLIPBOARD IN key and CLIPBOARD
OUT key respectively. The time value you just stored will be shown on the
display.
* You can perform steps 1-3 in real-time. (Pressing the STORE key, then the
CLIPBOARD IN key while playing back the recorder will store data.)
<Hints>
When you are storing the In/Out points in real-time while using the “BAR/BEAT/
CLK” Time Base, you can store them in steps of beats if the “ Resolution ?" menu
(Bar/Beat Resolution mode ON/OFF) in the Setup mode is “On.”
When this bar/beat resolution mode is “On,” the CLK value will be rounded up
or off to “00” (at the beginning of the beat) as soon as you press the STORE key.
This function is useful when you wish to use the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste
function is steps of beats. Refer to page “160” for detailed operation.
Moving the track data after storing the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT points
7. Select the move track using the RECORD TRACK select keys (you can select
multiple tracks).
* You can select one (mono) track, multiple tracks, or all sixteen tracks.
When using the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste function, however, you can change
the paste destination track only when you have selected a mono track, or an oddnumbered track and the adjacent even-numbered track (i.e.: 1-2, 3-4, or 13-14, 1516). If you have moved multiple tracks (other than the above combination), the data
will be pasted to the move source tracks. (track 1-> track 1..........track 3-> track 3 etc.)
8. Press the MOVE key.
Upon finishing moving in the clipboard, "Move Clip"/"COMPLETED!" will appear
in the display and then return to the original time base display.
Now the sound data in the specified track has been moved to the Clipboard.
At this point, the move source data has yet been deleted. It will be deleted
after you perform the paste operation.
92
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
<Note 1>
If you press the MOVE key without selecting a move source track by the RECORD
TRACK select key, the display will show "Select Track!" (meaning “Select a move
track.”) and return to the previous screen. In this case, select a move source track
and try again to copy the data.
<Note 2>
If the Output point has been specified before the In point (the In point value is the
same or large than the Out point value), the display will show the error message
“Void In Point !” or “Void Out Point !” and return to the previous screen. In this case,
set the correct In/Out points and try again to move the data.
<Note 3>
The data on the Clipboard will be replaced by new data each time you press the
COPY key or the MOVE key.
Listening to sound data moved on the clipboard (Clipboard Play function)
To listen to the sound data currently moved to the clipboard, press the
PLAY button while holding down the STOP button (Clipboard Play mode).
The data will be played back from the beginning. To stop the playback in
the middle, press the STOP button.
* During the clipboard playback, the display shows the position of the source data
referenced to the selected time base.
2-2. Move & Pasting
The data will be move & pasted at the point stored in the Auto Punch In
key. You can select the paste destination track the RECORD TRACK select
key.
<Note>
You need to have enough unrecorded space on the hard disk to execute the Move
& Paste operation. If you press the EXECUTE/YES key to try to paste data with
insufficient disk space, the display will immediately show the error message “Over
!,” and then show the excess time using the currently-selected Time Base (time or
bar).
In this case, shorten the move data by the amount of excess time. Alternatively,
move ABS END backward using the Erase function as described in page “96” of this
manual in order to obtain more free space on the hard disk.
6
1, 3
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
DISP SEL
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
REDO
HOLD/
VARI PITCH
TAKE
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
5
4
93
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
1/9
3
2
RECALL
1
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
Entering and storing the paste Punch In point
1. Press the RECALL key, and then the AUTO PUNCH IN key (or press only the
AUTO PUNCH IN key). The D-160 will enter the edit mode.
2. Move the cursor to the digit you wish to edit using the HOLD/> key or the
SHUTTLE dial, and set the value using the JOG dial.
3. After setting the time value, press the STORE key, and then the AUTO PUNCH
IN key.
The time value will be stored as the start point of the pasting area, and the
display will return to the previous screen.
Executing the paste operation
4. Press the PASTE key.
When the PASTE key is pressed, "Move Paste" is momentarily shown in the display,
then "Paste Repeat = 01 (01 blinks)" and "SURE?" will blink, and the move source track
display will be lit.
5. Specify the Move & Paste destination track and the number of repeats to paste.
* Specifying the Move & Paste destination track:
Select the destination track using the RECORD TRACK select key.
You do not need to specify a track if you are going to Move & Paste data in the
copy source track.
* Specifying the number of repeats to Move & Paste:
Turn the JOG dial to change the blinking number “01” to any value between 1
and 99. If there is not enough free space on the hard disk, the repeat time will
be limited to a number less than 99, and you will be unable to specify a larger
number when you turn the JOG dial.
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
Simultaneous with the execution of paste, the paste section length converted to
mono track time length will be shown in the upper line of the display and
"Move Paste," "COMPLETED!" displayed after completing the paste.
Press the EXIT/NO key to return to the previous screen.
Now the audio data on the Clipboard has been pasted to the specified
track starting with the AUTO PUNCH IN point.
For example, executing the function with a repeat number of “Paste Repeat=
03” (three times) will paste the data as shown in the diagram below.
○
AUTO PUNCH IN point
○
1
○
○
○
Repeat number of "01"
○
1
2
3
○
Repeat number of "03"
* To cancel the paste operation, press the EXIT/NO key while the message “SURE?” is
blinking on the display.
If you wish to cancel the paste operation after you press the EXECUTE/YES key,
press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key before the “COMPLETED!” message
appears on the display.
If you abort the paste operation using this procedure (even in the middle of the
operation), no data will be pasted.
94
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
<Note 1>
The data on the Clipboard will be cleared after the Move & Paste operation is complete.
Unlike the Copy & Paste operation, you cannot repeatedly move and paste the same
data.
<Note 2>
The Move & Paste function is available only when the hard disk has enough space
(REMAIN) to perform the following Undo/Redo operation.
If you try to move & paste the data without enough free space on the hard disk, the
display will indicate the alarm message “Over !” (overtime error) as soon as you
press the PASTE key, then indicate the excessive time in the currently-selected Time
Base. To avoid this, shorten the data to be copied, by the amount of the exceeding
time, or use the Erase function to create free disk space as described later in order
to move the ABS END point.
<Note 3>
Do not copy data and paste it partially over itself (same track and part of the same
time frame). This will alter both the copy source data and the data currently
contained in the clipboard.
If you accidentally do this, use the Undo function as explained in the following
section. You will be unable to restore the original data if you continue to edit
without first performing the Undo operation.
You can also paste the move data repeatedly by specifying the number of repeats
(1-99). The difference between "Move & Paste" and "Copy & Paste" is that moving
data will cause the source sound data to move to the Clipboard, then to the
destination, and the data in the source or in the Clipboard will be erased.
This operation is available with any Time Base.
2-3. Move & Paste Undo/Redo
If you wish to restore data that existed before you executed the Move & Paste
function, press the UNDO key to restore the status obtained before you pasted the
data. Pressing the REDO key after pressing the UNDO key will restore the status
before the Undo operation (that is, after pasting). The Undo and Redo functions
are effective only while the D-160 is stopped.
After the UNDO key or REDO key is pressed, the display will show "Undo", "Redo"
and "COMPLETED!" and return to the previous screen.
<Note>
You can use the undo/redo functions while the D-160 is in stop mode.
Under the following circumstances, you will be unable to use the undo/redo
functions:
1 .If you make a new recording,
2 .If you make a new edit (Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, or Erase,
3 .If the Auto Punch In point was passed in play or record mode while Auto
Punch mode was on, or
4 . If you turned off the power to the D-160, then turned it back on.
5 . If you use the Program Change function.
95
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
3. Erase
There are three ways to erase data. Make sure that you learn the difference ways to erase
to avoid mistakes.
Erasing data for a specific part between ABS 0 and ABS END:
You can erase data (make silence) from the Auto Punch In point up to the Auto Punch Out
point between ABS 0 - ABS END. You may specify a mono track, multiple tracks, or all 16 tracks
for the erase operation. As shown in the diagram below, this operation erases data for any
specified part between ABS 0 and ABS END. But, the ABS END position will not be affected.
The REMAIN value (available recording time based on a single mono track) will increase by
the amount you erase.
AUTO PUNCH OUT point
○
○
No sound area
○
○
Any Track
○
○
○
Erase
○
○
○
○
○
Any Track
ABS END
○
○
○
AUTO PUNCH IN point
○
ABS 0
Erasing all data from a specified point up to ABS END:
You may erase data from a specified point (Auto Punch In point) up to ABS END of a selected
Program. You need to specify the erase start point as the Auto Punch In point, and the ABS
END point (the end point of recording) or any point (time) after the ABS END point as the Auto
Punch Out point. You may specify a mono track, multiple tracks, or all 16 tracks for the erase
operation. If you specify all tracks, the ABS END point of the selected Program will move back
and the REMAIN value will increase. If you specify any other track combination, the ABS END
point will not move; only the REMAIN value will increase.
AUTO PUNCH OUT point
ABS END
○
AUTO PUNCH IN point
○
ABS 0
○
○
Any Track
○
○
Erase
Non recorded area
○
○
Any Track
ABS END
Erasing specific Program data (Program Erase):
This function enables you to erase data entirety from a selected program and return the
initial settings of this program to its initial figures.
Unlike the other two erase functions, for Program Erase you do not need to specify tracks or
set the Auto Punch In/Out points. Executing this erase function will erase all data recorded in
the selected Program. The ABS time and the REMAIN value will return to their default settings.
Use caution, since you cannot UNDO this erase operation.
ABS 0
ABS END
All data recorded in
a random program.
Recorded area
Program Erase
ABS 0 = ABS END
Any Program
96
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
3-1. How to Erase data for a specific part between ABS 0 and ABS END
Storing the erase start point (Auto Punch In point) and the erase end point (Auto Punch Out point)
Refer to “1. Storing memory data,” to set the Auto Punch In/Out points.
Here, we use the procedure to “edit the stored data.”
5, 8
3, 7
11
1, 4
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
START
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
RECALL
1, 5
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
9
10
2, 6
1. Press the AUTO PUNCH IN key. (Or, press the RECALL key, then press the AUTO PUNCH IN
key.)
The time value of the Auto Punch In point (bar/beat/clock) appears and the D-160 will enter the
data edit mode.
2. Use the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits of the time value (bar/beat/
clock), and use the JOG dial to change the value.
3. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED lights up.)
4. Press the AUTO PUNCH IN key.
The changed time value (bar/beat/clock) is stored as a new Auto Punch In point, and the Time
Base indication will appear on the display. (The STORE LED turns off.)
5. Press the AUTO PUNCH OUT key. (Or, press the RECALL key, then press the AUTO PUNCH
OUT key.)
The time value of the Auto Punch Out point (bar/beat/clock) will appears and the D-160 will
enter the data edit mode.
6. Use the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits of the time value (bar/beat/
clock), and use the JOG dial to change their value.
7. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED lights up.)
8. Press the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.
The changed time value (bar/beat/clock) is stored as a new Auto Punch Out point, and the Time
Base indication appears on the display. (The STORE LED turns off.)
* To check the Auto Punch In/Out points, press the ATUO PUNCH IN/OUT keys
respectively. Or, press the RECALL key, and then press the AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT keys
respectively. The display will indicate the time value (bar/beat/clock) stored for the Auto
Punch In point or Auto Punch Out point.
Executing the erase operation
9. Press the RECORD TRACK select key for any track(s) you wish to erase (up to 16 tracks) so that
the corresponding track(s) enter “READY” mode.
10. Press the ERASE key.
The message “Erase” appears on the display, and “SURE?” flashes.
11. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
This executes the erase operation. The display will indicate “Wait Erasing!”. When the erase
operation is complete, the message “COMPLETED!” will light along with the message “Erase.”
97
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
Press the EXIT/NO key, DISP SEL key, or the STOP button to restore the original display.
The sound data in the specified range has been erased.
* To cancel the erase operation while the message “SURE?” is flashing on the display, press
the EXIT/NO key or the STOP key.
* If you wish to cancel the erase operation after you have pressed the EXECUTE/YES key,
press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button BEFORE the message “COMPLETED!” appears.
* If you cancel the erase operation during the process, nothing will be erased.
<Check points>
Erasing the specified area between ABS 0 and ABS END will not affect the ABS END position.
You can confirm this by pressing the F. FWD button while holding down the STOP button
after the erase operation is complete. You will see no change in the ABS END time on the
display. This means that erasing the specified area has replaced the data with silence,
without moving the ABS END point .
However, the available recording time will increase by the amount of data you erased.
You can check this by pressing the DISP SEL key to see the REMAIN value calculated based
on a single mono track.
3-2. Undo and redo of the erase operation
You can use the Undo and Redo functions for the erase operation.
* After the erase operation is complete, press the UNDO key.
The D-160 will restore the data that existed before you executed the erase operation.
* Press the REDO key after using the UNDO function.
The D-160 will restore the status that existed after you executed the erase operation.
Pressing the UNDO key or the REDO key will execute the corresponding operation
immediately, and the display will indicate the messages “COMPLETED!” and “Undo!” or
“Redo!”, and then return to the previous Time Base indication.
<Note>
You can use the Undo/Redo function while the D-160 transport section is stopped.
You cannot use the Undo/Redo function after one of the following operations:
1. You make a new recording.
2. You perform a new editing operation (such as copy & paste, move & paste, and erase).
3. When the Auto Punch mode is on, and playback or recording passes the Auto Punch In
point.
4. You turn off the power.
5. You use the Program Change function.
98
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
3-3. How to Erase data in its entirety from a specified point up to ABS END:
Storing the erase start point (Auto Punch In point) and the erase end point (Auto Punch Out point)
Refer to “1. Storing memory data,” to set the Auto Punch In/Out points.
Again, we use the procedure to “edit the stored data.”
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
3, 6
6
8
9
1, 4
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
EXIT
/NO
RECALL
1
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
7
5
2
1. Press the AUTO PUNCH IN key. (Or, press the RECALL key, then press the AUTO PUNCH IN
key.)
The time value of the Auto Punch In point (bar/beat/clock) appears and the D-160 will enter the
data edit mode.
2. Use the HOLD/> key or the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits of the time value (bar/beat/
clock), and use the JOG dial to change the value.
3. Press the STORE key. (The STORE LED lights up.)
4. Press the AUTO PUNCH IN key.
The changed time value (bar/beat/clock) is stored as a new Auto Punch In point, and the Time
Base indication appears on the display. (The STORE LED turns off.)
5. Press the F.FWD button while holding down the STOP button.
The D-160 will indicate the ABS END (the recording end) point of the selected Program.
* To make sure the data is erased completely, we recommend that you specify a time
after the ABS END point as an erase end point (Auto Punch Out point). To do so, press
the PLAY button following Step 5 so that the ABS time passes the ABS END time. Use the
ABS time, which is now positioned after the ABS END point, as an erase end point.
6. Press the STORE key, then the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.
The ABS END point is stored as a new Auto Punch Out point.
* To check the Auto Punch In/Out points, press the AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT keys
respectively. Or, press the RECALL key, then press the AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT keys
respectively. The display will indicate the time value (bar/beat/clock) stored for the
Auto Punch In point or Auto Punch Out point.
Executing the erase operation
7. Press the RECORD TRACK select key for a track you wish to erase (up to 16 tracks) so that the
corresponding track(s) enters “READY” mode.
8. Press the ERASE key.
The message “Erase” appear on the display, and “SURE?” will flash.
9. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
This executes the erase operation. The display will indicate “Wait Erasing!”. When the erase
operation is complete, the message “COMPLETED!” will light along with the message “Erase.”
Press the EXIT/NO key, DISP SEL key, or the STOP button to restore the original display.
The sound data between the Auto Punch In point and the ABS END point has been erased.
This area does not contain a recording, and the available recording time on the disk
(REMAIN value) increases.
99
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
* To cancel the erase operation while the message “SURE?” is flashing on the display, press
the EXIT/NO key or the STOP key.
* If you wish to cancel the erase operation after you have pressed the EXECUTE/YES key,
press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button BEFORE the message “COMPLETED!” appears.
* If you cancel the erase operation during the process, nothing will be erased.
<Check points>
Although erase is executed on other than all tracks (mono track or multiple tracks), the ABS
END which is the final recording position of the program, will not be affected (ABS END will
be affected, however, if it is erased as shown below).
After execution of erase, upon confirming the ABS END time by simultaneously pressing
the STOP and F. FWD buttons, you will notice that it is the same ABS END as that before
erasing. However, if REMAIN is put on display by pressing the DISP SEL key, REMAIN (disk
remaining time) can be confirmed to have increased by the erased time converted to mono
track. In order to shift the ABS END forward, carry out the previous step by specifying all
recorded tracks.
<Example>
When there is a recording on tracks 1~6 of a certain program as shown below, if it is located
to ABS END, this located ABS END will be at final recording point of tracks 3 and 4, and the
time will always be shown in the display.
Therefore, although tracks 1 and 2 or 5 and 6 of a program with such a content is erased
(from any point to ABS END), ABS END that is always displayed will be the track 3 and 4
time. However, if tracks 3 and 4 are erased, ABS END will change.
ABS END of Track 1 and 2
ABS END of Track 5 and 6
ABS END of Track 3 and 4
ABS 0
Track 6
Track 5
Track 4
Track 3
Track 2
Track 1
Erasing area
Any point
ABS END
3-4. Undo and redo of the erase operation
You can use the Undo and Redo functions for the erase operation.
* After the erase operation is complete, press the UNDO key.
The D-160 will restore the data that existed before you executed the erase operation.
* Press the REDO key after using the UNDO function.
The D-160 will restore the status that existed after you executed the erase operation.
Pressing the UNDO key or the REDO key will execute the corresponding operation
immediately, and the display will indicate the messages “COMPLETED!” and “Undo!” or
“Redo!”, and then return to the previous Time Base indication.
<Note>
You can use the Undo/Redo function while the D-160 transport section is stopped.
You cannot use the Undo/Redo function after one of the following operations:
1. You make a new recording.
2. You perform a new editing operation (such as copy & paste, move & paste, and erase).
3. When the Auto Punch mode is on, and playback or recording passes the Auto Punch In
point.
4. You turn off the power.
5. You use the Program Change function.
100
D-160 Owner's Manual (Edit function)
3-5. Erasing specific data (Program erase)
Here, erase all data recorded in any program that is no longer necessary.
Unlike the "erasing the program" explained in "Recording/Playback", the program number
will remain intact and other settings will all be in the initial state same as when the New
Program was made (at completion of erase, ABS 0=ABS END).
Therefore, the tempo map setting and program title will be in the initial figures.
<Note>
Note that the UNDO/REDO function cannot be used at Program Erasing.
4
AUTO RTN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
1
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
8/16
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
CLIPBOARD PLAY
MTC IN
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
2
3
1. Press the STORE key while holding down the HOLD/> key.
The D-160 will enter the Program Setup mode, and display the message “Select PGM!”, and then
the current Program number and title. (The Program number and “SURE?” will flash.)
Example:
“Select PGM!”
->
“P02 [*****”
(02 flash, 02 is the current program number)
2. Turn the JOG dial to select the number of a Program you wish to erase.
The selected Program number will flash. (Can not use "New Program?.")
3. Press the ERASE key.
The message
“Erase PGM**?” (where, ** is the selected Program number) appears on
the display, and “SURE?” will flash.
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
When the erase operation is completed, the display changes to the
“Title Edit PGM**?”
menu in Setup mode, where you can name the Program from which you erased the data.
* To name the Program, follow the explanation on page "147" regarding the “2-4. Title Edit
PGM?” menu in Setup mode.
If you do not wish to name the Program, press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.
The display will change to the ABS indication, with the Program number unchanged.
The title of the Program is erased, and the Program will use a temporary title.
101
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
Saving and loading data
The D-160 allows you to select the data (audio data and Setup data) from a current
Program and save it to a DAT machine as an S/PDIF digital signal or to an adat machine
as an adat digital signal, or save it to a SCSI device.
You can also re-load the saved data to the D-160. In particular, using a SCSI device
enables you to save and load the data of all Programs (up to 99 Programs), as well as an
individual Program. These save and load functions are convenient when you wish to
store Programs (complete or in progress) temporarily to a DAT, adat, or SCSI device to
clear enough space on the internal hard disk to make new recordings.
**********About saved and loaded data**********
The data format and time taken to save or load data varies depending on how you save or
load the data as follows:
S/PDIF digital signal (You can save and load each Program individually.):
Audio data will be output following a pilot signal of about five seconds.
In the S/PDIF digital signal format, two tracks of audio data (the black part in the diagram)
are input/output at a time (total of eight times, or twelve times if additional tracks are
included). Therefore, saving/loading one Program takes eight times longer (or twelve times
including the additional tracks) than the Program’s actual recording time (time duration
from ABS 0 to ABS END). When a pilot signal and Setup data (the grey part in the diagram)
are output or input, you will hear the beep sound, which enables you to confirm the position
of those signals.
Tr 1&2
Tr 3&4
Tr 21&22
Tr 23&24
adat digital signal (You can save and load each Program individually.):
Audio data will be output following a pilot signal of about five seconds.
In the adat digital signal format, eight tracks of audio data (the black part in the diagram)
are input/output at a time. Therefore, saving/loading one Program takes twice long (or
three times including the additional tracks) as the Program’s actual recording time (time
duration from ABS 0 to ABS END). When a pilot signal and Setup data (the grey part in the
diagram) are output or input, you will hear a beep sound, which enables you to confirm the
position of those signals.
Tr 9 & 10
& 11 & 12
& 13 & 14
& 15 & 16
Tr 1 & 2 &
3&4&5
&6&7&
8
Tr 17 & 18
& 19 & 20
& 21 & 22
& 23 & 24
SCSI (You can save and load each Program individually or all Programs at once.):
Only SCSI devices allow you to save the song data of all setup Programs. All sixteen tracks (24
tracks including the additional tracks) of audio data (the black part in the diagram) will be
input/output at a time. Therefore, the time taken to save or load one Program is much
shorter than an operation using a DAT or adat. No pilot signal or beep sound will be recorded
during the operation.
Tr 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 & 7
& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13
& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &
19 & 20 & 21 & 22 & 23 & 24
Program 1 (P01)
Program 2 (P02)
102
Program 99 (P99)
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
* The following items can be saved and loaded as song data:
Memory data (CLIPBOARD IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT)
Time Base (ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK)
Setup mode:
* Time signature setting (BAR BEAT), * Tempo setting, * Click On/Off setting
* Preroll Time setting, * Midi Sync Out setting, * MTC Frame Rate setting
* MTC Offset setting, * MTC Offset Mode setting, * Rec Protect On/Off setting
* Slave Mode on/off setting, * Slave Type setting, * FS (sampling frequency) setting
* The following items cannot be saved or loaded as song data:
Auto Play mode and Auto Return mode On/Off
Vari-pitch mode On/Off, and pitch data
Setup mode:
* Digital In setting, * Digital Out setting, * Bar/Beat Resolution On/Off setting
* Device ID setting
<Notes>
* You can save or load only one Program to and from a DAT or adat at a time.
Use a SCSI device to save or load all Programs.
* The D-160 can only save and load data to and from digital devices that support noncompression recording, and S/P DIF or adat format digital recording functions.
Basically, any device that supports the adat format can be used for the D-160’s saving and
loading operation.
However, for the S/P DIF format, you cannot use an MD or DCC that employs compression
recording system, a CD-R machine that automatically corrects the interval between Programs,
or other devices that automatically change the sampling rate. Devices with SCMS can be
used if they satisfy the conditions described above.
Basically, any digital device that supports non-compression recording, and the S/P DIF or
adat formats, should be able to save and load the D-160’s data correctly. However, some
devices may not, due to the occurrence of multiple errors. The following Fostex models
have been tested and approved for the save and load operation:
FOSTEX: D-15, D-10, D-5
103
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
1. Saving the data using DATA OUT
* Restore the initial settings on the D-160.
* Set the same sampling rate on the external digital device and the D-160.
Connecting an external device
Connect DATA OUTPUT 1-8 connector of the D-160 to the digital input connector on the
external digital device.
<Notes>
* The D-160 has DATA OUT connectors for an S/P DIF digital signal (OPTICAL) and for an adat
digital signal. These connectors have the same shape but carry different information.
* Use the DATA OUTPUT 1-8 connector to save data. Do not use the DATA OUTPUT 9-16
connector.
* At save/load using DAT and adat, independent save/load in 8 track units is possible.
In this case, the data in 8 track units are not distinguished as track 1~8 or 9~16 but simply
handled as eight track data. Therefore, because this 8 track data is compatible with D-90 if it
is in 8 track units (any one combination of 1~8, 9~16 or 17~24), data saved from D-160 can
be loaded in tracks 1~8 of the D-90. In this case, data in the tracks which were not loaded will
remain intact.
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
4
ANALOG IN
3
2
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
4
DATA
3
2
1
INPUT
9~16
8
7
6
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1~8
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
D-160
MIDI
OUTPUT
9~6
INPUT
1~8
OUTPUT
THRU
9
DATA OUTPUT 1-8
DIGITAL IN
External Digital Equipment (DAT or RD-8 or Adat)
• If the external device has only COAXIAL type (RCA) digital I/O connectors, connect an
optional COP-1 (optical/coaxial converter) to use an S/P DIF digital signal.
• Connecting both output and input connectors on the D-160 to the input and output
connectors on the external digital device respectively may generate a digital loop.
Refer to “4-3. Connecting a digital mixer” on page "65" for more information.
Setting up an external device
1. Set the same sampling rate to that of the D-160.
2. Select digital input on the external device so that the external device will accept a digital signal.
On some external devices, you may have to set up so that the external device will synchronize
with the incoming digital signal. For example, if you are using a Fostex RD-8, select “DIGITAL IN”
and set “Clock Source (external sync signal)” to “Word Optical (adat).”
<Note>
If the external device does not accept the digital signal or if you notice digital noise, check
the connection, cabling, and the settings of the D-160 and the external device.
* Refer to the instruction manuals that came with any external digital device for details.
Executing the save operation
Use the “Save PGM?” menu in Setup mode.
* Output format available: adat, DAT, SCSI
* Programs available: P1 - P99
* You can save one Program at a time.
104
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
1. Press the DISP SEL key to select “SETUP” (“SETUP” will flash), then press the EXECUTE/YES
key. (“SETUP” will light up.)
The D-160 enters Setup mode.
2. Use the JOG dial to select “Save PGM?” (“?” will flash.).
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The message “Save Device?” and an indication of the digital signal to be saved (“DAT,” “adat,” or
“SCSI”) will flash on the display.
4. Rotate the JOG dial to select a type of digital signal format to be used for the save operation.
Selecting “adat” will save data in the adat digital signal format.
Selecting “DAT” will save data in the S/P DIF digital signal format.
Select “SCSI” if you are saving or loading data via SCSI. The following operation will be that when
"adat" or "DAT" is selected for "Save Device?."
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
Selection of the digital signal format for the save operation will be confirmed, and the existing
Program numbers will flash on the display.
6. Rotate the JOG dial to select a Program to save.
You can select any existing Program (up to 99) to save.
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The duration of the selected Program appears on the display so that you can edit the time
shorter or longer, as necessary. Time length recorded in the selected program will be displayed
and the time can now be edited. Normally, it is saved in the time displayed but at this stage, it is
also possible to save in any shorter time or by setting the time longer than what is actually
recorded. This function is provided for the purpose of saving in a short section of insufficient
tape capacity. Maximum saving time is 60 minutes.
8. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.
“Save Trk? 1-16” (“1” is flashing) appears on the display and you can select tracks to save.
While “1” is flashing, rotate the JOG dial to select “1”->”9”->”17.” To select “8”->”16”->”24,” use
the SHUTTLE or press the HOLD/> key to flash “16” and rotate the JOG wheel.
You can select one of the following track combinations: “1-8,” “1-16,” “1-24,” “9-16,” “17-24.”
(Tracks 17-24 are additional tracks. Selecting “1-24” or “9-24” will cause the additional tracks to
be saved along with the real tracks.)
9. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
“Rec Start DAT!” (Start recording on the DAT) or “Rec Start adat!” (Start recording on the adat)
appears on the display, and “SURE?” flashes.
10. Confirm that the external device is syncing with the digital input signal, and start recording on
the external device (DAT or adat).
Setting a START-ID (DAT) or a locate point at the recording start point will facilitate future
loading operations.
11. Confirm that the recording on the external device has started, and press the EXECUTE/YES
key. (“REMAIN” will light.)
The save operation starts, and the time required for the save operation appears on the display
and a few seconds later, it will start counting down. This few seconds delay is due to the pilot
signal which is recorded to mark the beginning of the Program to facilitate future load operation.
Therefore, the actual save operation starts when counting down starts.
Two tracks are saved each time in the order of Track 1 and 2, 3 and 4, etc. to a DAT machine.
Eight tracks are saved each time in the order of Track 1-8, 9-16, etc. to an adat machine.
The level meter indication during save of DAT will always be for only tracks 1 and 2 and always
for tracks 1~8 in save of adat.
12. When the save operation is complete, “COMPLETED!” flashes on the display.
13. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key to quit the Setup mode. The display will return to the
previous time base indication.
• To cancel the operation or restore the indication shown before you pressed the EXECUTE/YES key, press the
STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Pressing one of these keys repeatedly takes you to the previous layer, finally
quitting the Setup mode, and the display will return to the previous time base indication. If you press the STOP
button or the EXIT/NO key any time after you execute the save operation but before it is complete, the saved song
data will be invalid.
* Refer to page "168" for more information on the “2-23. Save PGM?” menu in Setup mode.
105
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
2. Loading the data using DATA IN
* Restore the initial settings on the D-160.
* Set the same sampling rate on the external digital device and the D-160.
Connecting the external device
Connect DATA INPUT 1-8 connectors of the D-160 to the digital output connectors on the
external digital device.
<Notes>
* The D-160 has DATA INPUT connectors for an S/P DIF digital signal (OPTICAL) and for an adat
digital signal. These connectors have the same shape but carry different information.
* Use the DATA INPUT 1-8 connector to load data. Do not use the DATA INPUT 9-16 connector.
* When save/load using DAT and adat, independent save/load in 8 track units is possible. In
this case, the data in 8 track units are not distinguished as track 1~8 or 9~16 but simply
handled as eight track data. Therefore, as this 8 track data is compatible with D-90 if it is in 8
track units (any one combination of 1~8, 9~16 or 17~24), data saved from D-160 can be
loaded in tracks 1~8 of the D-90. In this case, data in the tracks which was not loaded will
remain intact.
4
ANALOG IN
3
2
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
4
DATA
3
2
1
INPUT
9~16
8
7
6
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1~8
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
D-160
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
MIDI
OUTPUT
9~6
1~8
INPUT
OUTPUT
THRU
9
DATA INPUT 1-8
DIGITAL OUT
External Digital Equipment (DAT or RD-8 or Adat)
• If the external device has only COAXIAL type (RCA) digital I/O connectors, connect an
optional COP-1 (optical/coaxial converter) to use an S/P DIF digital signal.
• Connecting both output and input connectors on the D-160 to the input and output
connectors on the external digital device respectively may generate a digital loop.
Refer to “4-3. Connecting a digital mixer” on page "65" for more information.
Setting up an external device
1. Setup the external device so that it can output a digital signal.
2. Locate the beginning of the pilot signal recorded in the saved data.
* Refer to the instruction manual that came with your external digital device for details.
Executing the load operation
You will use the “Load PGM ?” menu in Setup mode.
* Input format available: adat, DAT, SCSI
* Programs available: P1 - P99
* You can load one saved Program at a time.
1. Press the DISP SEL key to select “SETUP” (“SETUP” will flash) and press the EXECUTE/YES
key. (“SETUP” will light up.)
The D-160 will enter the Setup mode.
2. Use the JOG dial to select “Load PGM ?” (“?” will flash.).
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The message “Load Device?” and the type of digital signal to be loaded (“DAT,” “adat,” or “SCSI”)
will flash on the display.
106
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
4. Rotate the JOG dial to select the type of digital signal format to be used for the load operation.
Selecting “adat” will load data in the adat digital signal format.
Selecting “DAT” will load data in the S/P DIF digital signal format.
Select “SCSI” if you are loading data via SCSI. The following operation will be that when "adat" or
"DAT" is selected for "Load Device?."
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“SURE?” flashes.)
Selection of the digital signal format for the load operation will be confirmed, and the existing
Program numbers will flash on the display.
• If digital signal is being input correctly, a red “DIGITAL” indicator will light up on the
display. If the red “DIGITAL” indicator flashes, check the connection, cabling, and the
settings of the D-160 and the external device.
<Notes>
* If the sampling rate of the incoming S/P DIF digital signal is different, the FS indicator
in the display (44.1kHz or 48kHz) will flash to warn you.
* Even if the sampling rate of the incoming adat signal is different, no warning will
appear. Use caution when you set the sampling rate.
6. Rotate the JOG dial to select a Program into which to load data.
You can select any existing Program (from up to 99).
• If you select a Program that already contains data and execute the load operation, the
existing data will be overwritten by the new data.
If you do not wish to overwrite any data in any current Program, use the JOG dial to
select “New PGM” to execute the load operation. You can do this only when the number
of existing Programs is 99 or less and the hard disk has enough free space to
accommodate the new data.
<Note>
Once you start loading, all existing song data in the Program will be erased, even if you cancel
loading during the operation, and new song data and tempo map data etc. (data up to the
point at which you canceled the operation) will be recorded. For example, if you load two
minutes of song data into a Program that already contains a song of six minutes, the new
song data will be recorded and the old song data will be erased in its entirety. (ABS END is
“two minutes.”) Bear this in mind and be certain to check the Program before you execute
the load operation.
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
Now you can select tracks into which to load.
Use the SHUTTLE or the HOLD/> key to flash the characters, and use the JOG dial to select a
desired number. Select one of the following track combinations: “1-8,” “1-16,” “1-24,” “9-16,”
“17-24.”
8. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“SURE?” flashes.)
9. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.
“Play DAT!” (Start playing the DAT) or “Play adat!” (Start playing the adat) appears on the
display.
10. Play the corresponding external device (DAT or adat).
The load operation starts when the D-160 accepts the incoming digital signal. The time required
for the load operation appears on the display and starts counting down. Two tracks are loaded
at a time from a DAT machine in the following order: Track 1 and 2, 3 and 4, etc. from a DAT
machine. Eight tracks are loaded each time in the order of Track 1-8, 9-16, etc..
11. When the load operation is complete, “COMPLETED!” flashes on the display.
12. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key to quit Setup mode.
The display will indicate the time base set for the loaded Program.
• To cancel the operation or restore the indication shown before you pressed the EXECUTE/YES key, press the
STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Pressing one of these keys repeatedly takes you to the previous layer, finally
quitting Setup mode, and the display will return to the previous time base indication. If you press the STOP button
or the EXIT/NO key any time after you execute the load operation but before it completes, the loaded song data will
be largely invalid, though some portion may play back.
107
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
<Note>
Do not remove the optical cable or perform any other operation that would disconnect
the S/P DIF signal until the session is complete. Otherwise, the D-160 will generate noise,
and affect the connected device.
3. Saving the data using SCSI
SCSI devices you can use
Please use the following recommended SCSI devices that have already been performance
tested.
Recommended SCSI devices that have been tested for operation (as of January ‘97)
<MO>: 230MB
<MO>: 540MB
Removable hard disk
<PD>
Fixed hard disk
LF-3200 (Matsushita)
MOS331 (Olympus)
M2512A (Fujitsu)
OMD-7060 (Konica)/540MB only
zip 100 (IOMEGA)/100MB
jaz (IOMEGA)/1GB
ezflyer (SyQuest)/230MB
EZ135 (SyQuest)/135MB
SyJet (SyQuest)/1.5GB
LF-1000 (Matsushita)/640MB
FireBall 1080S (Quantum)/1.08GB
* Either disk should have SCSI-2 specifications.
<Note>
These SCSI devices have already been tested for performance at Fostex.
However, any product lot includes variance in quality.
The test at Fostex does not include inspection for such variance. When you use external
SCSI devices, check the operation carefully. Fostex is not liable for any damage (data loss or
damage) caused by using the D-160 with external SCSI devices.
* Restore the default settings on the D-160.
Connecting a SCSI device
Refer to the diagram to connect a SCSI device to a D-160.
<Notes>
* First, turn off the power to all the devices before you connect them.
* Connect only one SCSI device to the D-160.
You cannot chain SCSI devices. Install a SCSI terminator on the other connector. (If the
SCSI device has a termination switch, be suer to turn the switch ON to terminate the
device.)
* The D-160 will detect the SCSI ID number set on the connected device, and show it on the
display. (Refer to the SCSI device manual for setting the ID number.)
* You must format the SCSI disk after you connect it to the D-160. Refer to the “Formatting”
section on the next page for the formatting procedure.
108
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
WARNING:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS
ANALOG IN
3
2
4
ANALOG OUT
1
8
7
6
5
4
DATA
3
2
1
INPUT
9~16
8
7
6
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
:RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SCSI
OPTICAL
D-160
MIDI
OUTPUT
1~8
9~6
INPUT
1~8
OUTPUT
THRU
9
External SCSI Equipment
Formatting a SCSI disk
About formatting a SCSI disk:
You will format a SCSI disk in the “Disk Format?” menu in Setup mode.
During formatting, the D-160 automatically checks the performance of the connected SCSI
device, selects and displays an appropriate format type from TYPE 0 - TYPE 2 (TYPE 2 is
selected as a default setting). The user can manually select the desired type.
TYPE
Available
recording
time
SAVE/LOAD
It takes the same time to save
and load data using
TYPE 0 and TYPE 2.
<Short>
TYPE 0
Depends on
the disk.
<Long>
TYPE 2 Depends on
<Possible>
Real time recording
Real time playback
You need to select the SCSI drive
as the current drive.
You need to select the SCSI drive
as the current drive.
<Possible>
<Possible>
However, Fostex will not guarantee
the operation. Refer to "Notes on
real time recording/playback" for
more information.
However, Fostex will not guarantee
the operation. Refer to "Notes on
real time recording/playback" for
more information.
Remarks
You cannot specify TYPE 0.
The measuring function of the D-160 will
select this option.
We recommended that you use TYPE 2
<Not possible>
The D-160 will reject any attempt to <Possible but the sound will skip> format if you are using a SCSI drive only
to save and load data.
set it in recording mode.
<Possible>
the disk.
<Possible>
TYPE 3 is used to perform
simple formatting. Read the
notes below before proceeding
with the operation.
<Longest>
<Not possible>
<Notes>
TYPE 3 Depends on * TYPE 3 format will format the The D-160 will reject any attempt to
the disk.
disk, assuming that the entire set it in recording mode.
area in the disk is available, and
will not be able to identify the
area actually available.
The degree of sound skipping will
depend on the result of automatic
measurement with TYPE 0 and 2.
TYPE 0: Skip -> less
TYPE 2: Skip -> frequent
The merit of TYPE 3 is that a shorter
formatting time is required, compared to
TYPEs 0 and 2.
For example, if you are using an MO disk
that has already been formatted for DOS
or MAC, usually there are no bad blocks
on the disk. Using TYPE 3 format will be
quicker than TYPEs 0 and 2.
The D-160 will not select this type using
the measuring function. Only users can
specify this type.
* Bad blocks in the disk cannot
be selected. This may later
cause the sound to skip.
<Notes on real time recording and playback>
Logically, you can perform real time recording/playback if your case is described under the <Possible> category in
the table shown on the above. However, the sound might skip, depending on the condition of the connected SCSI
drive disk.
The D-160 performs experimental reading and writing at two points on the disk to measure the performance of the
connected SCSI device, and based on the results, such as the response time of the disk, it will determine the format
type (TYPE 0-2). Therefore, for parts of the disk other than the two measured points, you do not know if the disk
will maintain adequate speed to realize real time recording/playback.
It might be possible that the sound skips during real time recording or playback within the untested parts.
Measuring two points for performance can indicate tell whether or not the disk is reliable, but this is only an
“index.” Fostex will not guarantee the operation of the SCSI disk.
109
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
Although the following chart presents the SCSI disk formatting time in accordance to
each format type (measured by Fostex), please refer to this, as necessary, only for an
approximate formatting time.
SyJet (1.5GB)
FireBall (1GB)
PD (640MB)
MO (230MB)
MO (540MB)
EZ135 (135MB)
ezflyer (230MB)
zip (100MB)
jaz (1GB)
Formatting Time
TYPE 0, 2
TYPE 3
Approx. 20 minutes
Approx. 5 seconds
Approx. 16 minutes
Approx. 5 seconds
Approx. 50 minutes
Approx. 22 seconds
Approx. 12~15 minutes Approx. 27 seconds
Approx. 14~17 minutes Approx. 22 seconds
Approx. 3 minutes
Approx. 4 seconds
Approx. 6 minutes
Approx. 5 seconds
Approx. 4 minutes
Approx. 8 seconds
Approx. 15 minutes
Approx. 5 seconds
1. Connect the SCSI device to the D-160 and turn the power on to the both machines.
2. If you are using a removable disk, insert the disk into the drive.
To remove the inserted disk, press the STOP button and the EXIT/NO key on the D-160
simultaneously.
You cannot remove the disk from the SCSI device.
3. Press the DISP SEL key to select the Setup mode, and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The Setup mode menu appear on the display.
4. Turn the JOG dial to select “Disk Format?” (“?” flashes), and press the EXECUTE/YES key
again. “Disk Format IDE” (“IDE” flashes) appears.
CAUTION: If format is executed while "IDE" is blinking, the internal IDE hard disk will be
formatted and data in the IDE hard disk will be lost.
5. Rotate the JOG dial to display the flashing “SCSI” and press the EXECUTE/YES key. The ID
number and name of the connected SCSI device appear on the display, and “?” and “SURE?”
flash.
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The D-160 indicates “Please Wait!” followed by the results of a performance measurement of the
connected SCSI device, and flashes an appropriate format type and the message “SURE?”.
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
“REMAIN” lights up and formatting starts.
As the formatting operation progresses, the size of the area to be formatted on the disk will count
down on the display. (For example, indication “-125MB” will count down to “0MB”.)
Also, when the formatting operation starts, all the FL indicators (for Tracks 1-16) at level ∞ of
the level meters light up. As the formatting operation progresses, these indicators will be turned
off from Track 16. This condition indicates that the disk is being formatted correctly.
When formatting is complete, “COMPLETED!” will appears and all the FL indicators will turn off.
8. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button to quit the Setup mode.
The D-160 returns to the ABS display of the Program that was selected before it entered Setup
mode.
In addition to the formatting procedure mentioned above, you can also use the following
steps to format an unformatted disk.
Install an unformatted fixed disk or removable disk, and go to the “2-21. Drive Sel.?” menu
in Setup mode. Change the current drive from “IDE” to “SCSI”.
The D-160 will recognize that the SCSI disk is not formatted and automatically enter the
“2-24. Disk Format ?” menu in Setup mode, where you can follow the procedure mentioned
above to format the disk.
110
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
Name of data saved in the SCSI disk:
The D-160 manages data in the internal IDE hard disk using the name “Program” (such as
Program 1, Program 2, etc. which appears on the display as P01, P02, etc.). Data on the
SCSI disk is termed “Song” or “Backup” to differentiate it from Program data.
When you format a SCSI disk, Song #1 is created on the disk. When you switch the
current drive from “IDE” to “SCSI,” the D-160 will display “S01.”
When you save data from the D-160 to the SCSI disk, the data is treated as “Song” or
“Backup,” depending on how you saved the data.
How to save data
When one or all Programs were saved to one fixed
disk or removable disk.
When one Program was saved to multiple
removable disks.
Name
Display
Song
"S**"
Backup
"B**"
<Note>
You can use multiple removable disks, but not multiple fixed disks to save data.
Saving data of an individual Program
You will use the “Save PGM ?” menu in Setup mode.
* Input format available: adat, DAT, SCSI
* Programs available: P1 - P99, ALL
* You can save one Program or all Programs at once.
1. Press the DISP SEL key to select “SETUP” (“SETUP” will flash), and then press the EXECUTE/
YES key. (“SETUP” will light up.)
The D-160 will enter the Setup mode.
2. Use the JOG dial to select “Save PGM?” (“?” will flash.).
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“SAVE” lights up.)
The indication of the type of digital signal to be saved will flash on the display.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SAVE
4. Rotate the JOG dial to select a flashing “SCSI.”
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“SURE?” flashes.)
The external digital device is set to “SCSI,” and the existing Program numbers will flash on the
display. (e.g.: “P02 [current title...” with “02” flashing.)
6. Rotate the JOG dial to select a Program to save.
You can select any existing Program individually or all Programs (Save All). (Refer to the next
section for information on saving all Programs.)
As mentioned previously, the display indication differs as follows depending on whether the
selected Program to save requires only one removable disk or multiple disks.
* If you have selected a Program that has only the Program number and title indication on the
display:
e.g.: P02 [#******* (#***** is current title)
This indication means that saving Program P02 requires only one SCSI fixed or removable disk.
111
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
* If you have selected a Program that has the Program number and title indication, plus “nD”
(n=number) on the display:
e.g.: P01[********** ]2D (***** is title)
This indication means that saving Program 01 requires multiple SCSI disks.
“2D” in this example means that two disks are required.
When using the hard disk, if the program data to be saved is larger than the hard disk capacity,
"- ***MB" (insufficient capacity) will be displayed.
Also, if the EXECUTE/YES key is pressed while this is on the diaplay, "DISK FULL" will appear in
the display.
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“SURE?” flashes.)
The D-160 performs the save operation differently depending on the selected Program.
* If you have selected a Program that requires only one disk to save:
The current Song number (“S01”) in the SCSI disk appears on the display.
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key at this point will start the save operation. “REMAIN” will light up,
then the D-160 will display “P01>>S01-***MB”. “-***MB” indicates the remaining amount of
data to be saved, which will count down as the save operation is in progress.
* If you have selected a Program that requires multiple disks:
The save operation will start right away. “REMAIN” will light up, then the D-160 will display
“P01>>B01-***MB”. (The indication of the remaining amount of data to be saved will count down
as the save operation is in progress.) The Song number will automatically change to the Backup
number “B01.”
When saving to the first disk is complete, “Insert Disk 2” (Insert the second disk!) appears on the
display, and the D-160 will automatically eject the disk. When you insert the second disk, the D-160
will continue the save operation with the same Backup number. In this way, when the entire save
operation is complete, the D-160 will display an illuminated “COMPLETED!”, then change to the
Time Base of the saved Program.
Pressing the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key will turn the “COMPLETED!” indication off.
<Notes>
* You cannot abort a save operation on the SCSI device while it is in progress.
* To enter a title for a SCSI disk, go to “2-20. Drive Sel.?” menu in Setup mode and change
the current drive to “SCSI,” and then go to “2-4. Title Edit?” menu in Setup mode to enter
the title. Normally, the title of the program in the internal IDE hard disk will be directly
copied as the title of the song in the SCSI disk or the title of the backup data.
* If you try to save data to multiple disks or try to save all Program data to one disk, and
if those disks already have data recorded, the message (“B01[*****]DEL” or
“S01[*****]DEL”) will appear on the display, asking if you wish to erase the Backup data or
Song data already recorded on the disk, and “SURE?” will flash.
Subsequently, if you wish to erase the data, press the EXECUTE/YES key is and save will
start after erasing the data. If you do not want to erase the data, rotate the JOG dial and
select "Eject" while "SURE?" is blinking, and then press the EXECUTE/YES key and remove
the disk. The disk can also be removed after emerging from the SETUP mode by pressing
the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. In this case, the press the EXIT/NO key while pressing
down on the STOP button when in other than the SETUP mode.
Saving all Programs (Save ALL)
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 of the “Saving an individual Program” procedure.
2. Use the JOG dial to select “Save ALL?” (“?” flashes.).
Selecting “Save All?” will cause the following display to appear.
Save All? (nn/nn) (nn=number)
112
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
The number on the right of the slash (/) is the number of all Programs, and the number on the
left is the number of Programs that can be saved.
For example, “03/03” means that all three Programs can be saved. “01/03” means that one
Program out of three Programs can be saved.
“00/03” means that no Programs can be saved. If you press the EXECUTE/YES key at this point,
“Void Command!” appears and you cannot proceed with the save operation.
If you have selected “Save All”, you cannot use multiple disks to save. In this case, chose the save
operation for an individual Program.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key (“SAVE” light up.)
Data will be saved as Song data. Therefore, Program 1 (P1) on the internal hard disk will be saved
as Song 1 (S1), Program 2 (P2) as Song 2 (S2).
After the save operation is complete, “COMPLETED!” lights up. Press the STOP button or the
EXIT/NO key to return to the previous Time Base display.
<Notes>
* You cannot abort a save operation while it is in progress.
* To enter title for a SCSI disk, go to “2-20. Drive Sel.?” menu in Setup mode and change
the current drive to “SCSI,” then go to “2-4. Title Edit?” menu in Setup mode to enter
the title.
<Note>
If an error occurs during execution of save and "Error 35" appears in the display, carry out
the following steps:
1 . Press the EXIT/NO key.
"Retry?" will appear in the display.
2 . If save is to be executed again, press the EXECUTE/YES key upon display of "Retry?."
Save will be executed again.
If ALL save was carried out in this process, save will be executed again from where the
error occurred. Also, if several disks are used for the save, it will save again from the
head of the disk in which the error occurred.
3 . If it is to be canceled without executing save, press the EXIT/NO key upon display of
"Retry?."
Loading Song data
Use the “Load PGM?” menu in the Setup mode to load Song data.
* Input format available: adat, DAT, SCSI
* Programs available: P1 - P99, ALL
* You can save one Program or all Programs at a time.
1. Press the DISP SEL key to select “SETUP” (“SETUP” will flash) and press the EXECUTE/YES
key. (“SETUP” will light up.)
The D-160 will enter the Setup mode.
2. Use the JOG dial to select “Load PGM?” (“?” will flash.).
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“LOAD” will light.)
An indication of the type of the digital signal to be loaded will flash on the display.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LOAD
4. Rotate the JOG dial to select a flashing “SCSI.”
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The external digital device is set to “SCSI,” and the existing Song numbers will flash on the
display. (i.g.: “S01[*******” with “01” flashing.)
113
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
6. Rotate the JOG dial to select the data to load.
You can choose to load any existing Song individually or all Songs collectively.
The display indication differs as follows depending on whether you selected an individual Song
number or all Song numbers.
* If you have selected an individual Song:
e.g.: You have selected Song 2.
S02[***** (**** is title)
* If you have selected all Songs:
e.g.: Load ALL (**/**) (**=**)
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“SURE?” flashes.)
Now you can select a Program to load data into.
* If you have selected an individual Song number:
The D-160 will indicate the destination Program number on the internal hard disk. Use the JOG
dial to select a desired destination Program number into which to load data.
If you select a destination Program that already has data, pressing the EXECUTE/YES key will
execute the load operation and the loaded data will overwrite the existing data in the Program.
If you do not want to overwrite the existing data, use the JOG dial to select “New PGM.”
* If you have selected “Load All?(**/**):
The D-160 will indicate the destination Program number on the internal hard disk. Use the JOG
dial to select a desired destination Program number into which to load data.
If the destination hard disk already contains data and you select a Program, “DEL” (Delete)
appears following the Program number.
This is because the “Load All” operation will first erase any Program data on the disk before
loading Song data.
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key at this point will cause “Delete All PGM?” (deleting all Programs)
to appear, and then “SURE?” will flash.
8. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
Song data will be loaded to the selected Program.
For example, if Song 1 (S01) is loaded into Program 1 (P01), the D-160 will display “S01>>P01***MB” and “REMAIN” will light up. The remaining data to be loaded will count down on the
display as the load operation progresses.
During the all Program load operation, Songs are loaded into Programs sequentially; that is, Song
1 into Program 1, Song 2 into Program 2. (The display changes will correspond to this sequence:
“S01>>P01-***” --> “S02>>P02-***”, etc.)
When the load operation is complete, “COMPLETED!” will light and the D-160 will display the
Time Base that was shown before the unit entered the Setup mode.
9. Press the STOP button or the EXECUTE/YES key, and “COMPLETED!” will turn off.
<Notes>
* You cannot abort a load operation on a SCSI device while it is in progress.
* To enter a title for the SCSI disk, go to “2-20. Drive Sel.?” menu in Setup mode and change
he current drive to “SCSI,” then go to “2-4. Title Edit?” menu in Setup mode to enter the
title.
Loading Backup data
As an example here, we will load the data of a Program saved onto two removable disks.
1. Insert the first disk (Disk-1) into the SCSI device.
2. Follow Steps 1-4 of the “Loading Song data” procedure.
3. Select “SCSI” and press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“LOAD” lights up).
The external digital device is set to “SCSI”. The display flashes the number of the existing Backup
data in the SCSI disk, and then indicates that the first disk has been inserted.
114
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
B01[******]D1 (****** = current title, D1 = Disk-1)
Rotating the JOG dial will toggle between “B01” and “Eject.”
If you wish to cancel the load operation and remove the disk, select “Eject” and press the EXECUTE/
YES key.
4. While “B01[******]D1 appears on the display, press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“SURE?” flashes).
The current Program number flashes and you can select the load destination Program.
P01[****** (****** = current title)
5. Use the JOG dial to select a Program into which to load data. (“SURE?” flashes.)
If you select a Program that already contains data and execute the load operation, that existing
data will be overwritten by the new data. If you do not wish to overwrite data in the Program, use
the JOG dial to select “New PGM” to execute the load operation.
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. (“REMAIN” and “LOAD” light up.)
Load operation will start, and the D-160 will display “B01>>P01 -***MB.”
This means that Backup 1 (B01) data in the SCSI disk is being loaded into Program 1 (P01) on the
internal hard disk. As the operation progresses, the number “-***MB” (remaining data amount to
be loaded) will count down. When loading from the first disk is complete, the message “Insert
Disk2” appears and the first disk is automatically ejected.
7. Insert the second disk into the SCSI device.
Loading from the second disk automatically starts. The display and count down are the same as
those for the first disk.
After all data is loaded, “COMPLETED!” lights up, and Time Base of the destination Program will
be located. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key, and “COMPLETED!” will turn off.
<Notes>
* You cannot abort a load operation on a SCSI device while it is in progress.
* To enter a title for the SCSI disk, go to “2-20. Drive Sel.?” menu in the Setup mode
and change the current drive to “SCSI,” then go to “2-4. Title Edit?” menu in the
Setup mode to enter the title.
<Note>
If an error occurs during execution of load and "Error 36" appears in the display, carry out
the following steps:
1 . Press the EXIT/NO key.
"Retry?" will appear in the display.
2 . If load is to be executed again, press the EXECUTE/YES key upon display of "Retry?."
Load will be executed again.
If ALL load was carried out in this process, load will be executed again from where the
error occurred. Also, if several disks are used for the load, it will load again from head of
the disk in which the error occurred.
3 . If it is to be canceled without executing load, press the EXIT/NO key upon display of
"Retry?."
115
D-160 Owner's Manual (Saving and loading data)
4. Compatibility with D-90, D-80 V2.0, DMT-8 V2.0, and DMT-8
"FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-3)" for recording format of the D-160, and
"FDIO-1 Ver2.0 (Fostex Data In/Out-1 Ver2.0)" for save/load format of song data, are
employed. In the D-90, "FDMS-2 Ver2.0" and "FDIO-1 Ver2.0," in the D-80/D-80 Ver2.0
and DMT-8VL, "FDMS-2" and "FDIO-1", furthermore, in the DMT-8, "FDMS-1" and "FDIO1," respectively, are employed.
Due to these conditions, the hard disk recorded in the D-160 cannot be installed and
used in another equipment. However, as the save/load format is same for the D-160 and
D-90, data saved from the D-160 to an external digital equipment (adat or DAT) can be
loaded in 8 track units to the D-90 or data saved in the D-90 can be loaded in D-160.
Refer to list below for functional comparison of each product.
During save/load using DAT and Adat, independent save/load in 8 track units is possible.
In this case, the data in 8 track units are not distinguished as tracks 1~8 or 9~16 but simply
handled as eight track data.
Therefore, because this 8 track data is compatible with the D-90 if it is in 8 track units (any
one combination of 1~8, 9~16 or 17~24), data saved from the D-160 can be loaded in tracks
1~8 of the D-90.
In this case, data in the tracks which were not loaded will remain intact.
D-80 V2.0
D-160
D-90
DMT-8V2.0
DMT-8
DMT-8VL
Program
Editing the memory data
99 (P1~P99)
9 (P1~P9)
5 (P1~P5)
1 (P1)
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
~
~
~
~
23: 59: 59: 29: 59
23: 59: 59: 29: 59
06: 00: 00: 00: 00
06: 00: 00: 00: 00
44.1/48kHz
44.1/48kHz
Setting of the time base
Backup of the time memory
SETUP mode
Sampling frequency
44.1kHz
44.1kHz
Setting of the time signature
(64 points)
(64 points)
(64 points)
(16 points)
Setting of the tempo
(64 points)
(64 points)
(64 points)
(32 points)
Metronome function
Loading/Saving
adat, S/P DIF, SCSI
adat, S/P DIF
S/P DIF
S/P DIF
the song data
(P1~P99)
(P1~P9)
(P1~P5)
(P1)
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
00: 00: 00: 00: 00
Setting of the preroll time
Setting of MIDI sync output signal
Setting of the MTC frame rate
Setting of the MTC offset time
~
~
~
~
23: 59: 59: 29: 59
23: 59: 59: 29: 59
06: 00: 00: 00: 00
06: 00: 00: 00: 00
Setting of the digital input track
(adat, S/P DIF)
(adat, S/P DIF)
(S/P DIF)
Setting of the digital output track
(adat, S/P DIF)
(adat, S/P DIF)
(S/P DIF)
Setting of the MTC offset mode
Setting of the Rec protect
Setting of the bar/beat
resolution mode
Setting of the slave mode
Setting of the slave type
Setting of the MIDI device ID
Setting of the Undo function
116
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
MIDI sync function
The following are examples concerning general types of systems using MIDI
related functions contained in the D-160.
1. MIDI clock sync system
By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map
contained in the D-160, and by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer
according to the setting, a hardware type MIDI sequencer can be synchronized as a
MIDI clock slave. Consequently, in this system, the D-160 will be the master and
the MIDI sequencer the slave.
Unlike conventional tape type MTR, all sixteen tracks can be fully utilized without
wasting one track on a sync signal.
* Restore the default settings on D-160.
* Check for the correct program and proper sampling frequency.
D-160
AUTO RTN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
MIDI OUT
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
MIDI Clock &
Song position
pointer
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
INPUT 1 - 8
OUTPUT 1 - 16
INPUT L/R
Master
Recorder
TAPE IN 1 - 16
BUSS OUT (GROUP OUT) 1 - 8
123
123
123123
123
123
123
123123
123
123123
123
123123
123123
123123
123
123
123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
123123
123123
123
123123123123123
123123123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123123123123123123123123
123
STEREO OUT L/R
MIDI IN
MIDI sequencer
MIDI OUT
INPUT
External Mixer
MIDI sound sources
MIDI IN
Connecting external equipment (Refer to connecting schematic)
1. Connect the D-160 MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the MIDI sequencer.
2. Set the MIDI sequencer for "external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC) by MIDI clock."
* Refer to the Owners Manual of the equipment in use for details.
117
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Setup of D-160
1. Because the MIDI clock and song position pointer will be output from the D-160, set the SETUP
mode "MIDI sync signal output setting" to "CLK."
* Initial setting: CLK
* Permissible setting: CLK (MIDI clock and song position pointer:"CLK") / MTC (MIDI time code: "MTC")
/ Off (No output of MIDI sync signal)
* This item can be setup for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "150", SETUP mode "2-8. MIDI sync signal output setting" for correct
operating procedures.
2. The meter in the desired bar can be set by "Time signature setting" of the SETUP mode.
* Initial setting: 001 bar, 4/4 signature.
* Permissible bar setting: 001~999
* Permissible meter setting: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8, -- -- (Elimination of signature)
* Permissible setting of maximum number of points: 64 points
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "143", SETUP mode "2-2. Time Signature Setting" for operating procedure.
3. Tempo in the desired bar can be set by "Tempo setting" of the SETUP mode.
Tempo map is made in steps 2 and 3.
* Initial setting: 001 bar, 1st meter, Tempo120.
* Permissible bar setting: Follows the previous "Setup of the time signature."
* Permissible signature setting: Follows the previous "Setup of the time signature."
* Permissible setting of tempo: Quarter note=30~250 .... (Tempo elimination)
* Permissible setting of maximum number of points: 64 points
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "145", SETUP mode "2-3. Tempo Setting" for operating procedure.
4. Set the SETUP mode "Metronome setting" to ON if click sound is to be output according to the
setup tempo map.
* Initial setting: Off
* Permissible setup item: Off, On
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "148", SETUP mode "2-6. Metronome setting" for operating procedure.
5. Press the DISP SEL key while pressing the EXECUTE/YES key, and then change the time base
display to BAR/BEAT/CLK.
Confirming the MIDI clock sync
During recording and at playback following the recording, the time base (BAR/
BEAT/CLK) is displayed in accordance to the setup tempo map, and the MIDI clock
and song position pointer is also output.
Confirm that the travel position (BAR/BEAT/CLK) of the D-160 and the travel
position of the synchronized MIDI sequencer are matched.
118
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
* If correct sync cannot be obtained, re-check the connections/cables and setting
of both equipment.
<Note>
In the D-160, the "ABS 0" position is set at "002BAR/1BEAT /00CLK."
This setting is made in consideration of the time required (it will not sync immediately)
for the MIDI sequencer, etc. to enter into sync.
As a result, if the D-160 is played back from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync will be
completed by the time it reaches the first bar, and will thus synchronize from head
of the tune.
Execution of recording
Various ways of recording can be conducted while synchronizing the D-160 and
the MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock.
119
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
2. MTC sync/MIDI machine control system
The following will explain synchronization by the MTC (MIDI time code) output
and the computer controlling system using MMC (MIDI machine control). In this
system, the D-160 will be the master and the computer (with sequence software)
will be the slave.
The D-160 will attach any desired offset (time difference) against ABS time (absolute
time) and output it as MTC in any desired frame rate.
It can also carry out the proper operation upon receiving an MMC and Fostex
System Exclusive Message from outside. In this case, because the D-160 can setup
a DEVICE ID number by the SETUP mode "2-18. MIDI Device ID Setting" menu, a
multiple number of D-160's can be separately controlled by changing the DEVICE
ID numbers in the transmitted message from the computer.
In regards to the corresponding content for MMC, refer to the "MMC list" on page
"173" and on the Fostex System Exclusive Message, the "Fostex Exclusive List" on
page "174."
* Set D-160 in the initial state.
* Confirm the program and sampling frequency.
D-160
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
MIDI IN
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
MIDI OUT
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
MMC or Fostex System Exclusive Message
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
VARI PITCH
MTC
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
OUTPUT 1 - 16
INPUT 1 - 8
INPUT L/R
Master
Recorder
TAPE IN 1 - 16
BUSS OUT (GROUP OUT) 1 - 8
123
123
123123
12312
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
12
123
123
12
123
123
123
123123
123
123
12
123
123
123
123
12312123123123123
123123
123
123
123
12123
123
12312
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
123
12312
123123
123123
123
123
123123
12312
12123
123123
123123
123123
123123
123
STEREO OUT L/R
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Computer System
INPUT
External Mixer
with MMC/MTC
soft ware
MIDI OUT
MIDI sound sources
MIDI IN
MIDI
120
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Connecting to external equipment
Connect the D-160 MIDI IN/OUT to the computer (with MIDI interface) MIDI IN/
OUT (MMC/MTC complied sequence software is activated in the computer).
Setup of external equipment
Setup the following in the sequence software.
* Set to MTC external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC).
* Set for output of MMC.
* Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate.
* Set start time of the tune (which MTC time is to be the first bar). Refer to precaution in regards to MTC
offset, farther on.
# For details, refer to Owners Manual of the external equipment.
Setup of D-160
1. Because MTC will be output from D-160, set to "MTC" the SETUP mode "MIDI sync signal
output setting."
# Refer to page "150", SETUP mode "2-8. MIDI sync signal output setting" for operating
procedure.
2. Set a random offset time by the SETUP mode "MTC offset time setting."
* Initial setting: 00h (Hour) 59m (Minute) 57s (Second) 00f (Frame) 00sf (Sub Frame)
* Permissible setup time: 00h 00m 00s 00f 00sf ~ 23h 59m 59s 29f 99sf
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "152", SETUP mode "2-10. MTC offset time setting" for operating
procedure.
3. In the SETUP mode "MTC offset mode setting," whether the MTC offset time setup in Step 2
should be output (ABS) at the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf position or at the 001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK
(bar, signature) must be selected.
* Initial setting: ABS
* Permissible setup item: ABS, Bar
* This item can be setup for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "153", SETUP mode "2-11. MTC offset mode setting" for operating
procedure.
4. Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the sequence software by "MTC Frame rate
setting" of the SETUP mode.
* Initial setting: 25 frames
* Permissible setup of frame rate: 24, 25, 29nd, 29df, 30nd, 30df
* This item can be setup for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "151", SETUP mode "2-9. MTC Frame rate setting" for operating
procedure and details.
5. Set to the same figure as the sequence software MMC device number (and Fostex System
Exclusive Message device number) by the SETUP mode "MIDI device ID setting."
When the sequence software transmits by "7F," it means "ALL DEVICE" and therefore, it
need not be setup. The D-160 transmitting device ID will also function in parallel with this
setting.
121
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
* Initial setting: 00
* Permissible setup ID: 00 ~ 99
* This item will be the setting common to all programs.
* This setting cannot be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "161", SETUP mode "2-18. MIDI device ID setting" for operating
procedure and details.
6. Press the DISP SEL key while pressing the EXECUTE/YES key to show time base in the MTC
display.
<Notes on MTC related setups>
By "MTC offset time setting" and "MTC offset mode setting," at what position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/
1BEAT/00CLK) should the setup MTC (MTC offset time) is to be output is set. When setting the
start time of the tune in the sequence software by these setups, be careful of the following points.
* Offset mode: For ABS
If playback is started from ABS 0, since MTC will be output starting from the MTC offset time that
has been set, the start time of the tune set by the sequence software must be set about 3 seconds
later from the MTC offset time that was setup. This will provide time because the sequence
software cannot sync immediately after MTC is output. For example, if the initial setting of 00h
59m 57s 00f 00sf" is used, set the start time of the tune to "01h 00m 00s 00f." If playback is thus
started from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync will be obtained by the time it reaches the first bar and
therefore it can be made to sync from the head of the tune.
* Offset mode: For BAR
As mentioned before, because the "ABS 0" position is set at the "002BAR / 1BEAT / 00CLK" position,
the setup MTC offset time can be set to the head of the tune without taking into account the time
until reaching sync, as mentioned above. The length of the time two bars beforehand will change
in accordance to the first bar setting for "signature" and "tempo." For example, it will be long if
the tempo is set slow. This mode can be effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC in
parallel, and when using MTC for the sync signal while controlling the D-160 with time base BAR/
BEAT/CLK.
Confirming MTC sync/MMC
1. During recording and at playback after recording, time base MTC is displayed according to the
setting and MTC is output at the same time.
Check that the D-160 traveling position (MTC) and the traveling position of the sequence
software in sync are matched.
2. Send MMC commands such as PLAY, STOP and LOCATE from the sequence software to see
that the D-160 will be properly controlled.
When a correct MIDI command (MMC or FEX) is received, "MIDI" in the display will be lit
for about 40msec. There is no setting in the D-160 to receive MMC or FEX but it will
operate if a correct MIDI signal is input.
* If sync and control cannot be done correctly, re-check connections/cables and
the setting of both equipment.
Execution of recording
Carry out various recordings while synchronizing a D-160 and a MIDI sequencer
with the MIDI clock.
122
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
3. Multitrack system by the slave mode
The following will explain an example of constructing a 48 track system using
three D-160's and its slave mode functions.
* Initialize D-160.
* Confirm the program.
* Set all three D-160's to the same sampling frequency.
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
D-160 (#1)
(Master)
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
POWER
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
MIDI OUT
DATA OUT
DATA IN
MIDI IN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
D-160 (#2)
(Slave 1)
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
DISP SEL
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
POWER
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
DATA OUT
MIDI THRU
DATA IN
MIDI IN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
D-160 (#3)
(Slave 2)
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
Equipment interconnections
1. From D-160 (#1) to D-160 (#2), connect DATA OUT to DATA IN and MIDI OUT to MIDI IN.
2. From D-160 (#2) to D-160 (#3), connect DATA OUT to DATA IN and MIDI THRU (Note!!!) to MIDI
IN.
<Note>
In order to slave drive a D-160 with each other, the best setting is to supply Adat digital
signals together with MTC from the master.
Setup of D-160 (#1)
1. Because MTC, which is the reference for sync, is output from D-160 (#1), set the "MIDI sync
signal output setting" of the SETUP mode to "MTC."
# Refer to page "150", SETUP mode "2-8. MIDI sync signal output setting" for operating
procedure and details.
2. A random frame rate to be used is set by the SETUP mode "MTC Frame rate setting."
# Refer to page "151", SETUP mode "2-9. MTC Frame rate setting" for operating
procedure and details.
3. With the SETUP mode "MTC offset mode setting," whether the MTC offset time will be output
(ABS) at the ABS 00h 00s 00f 00sf point or at the 001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK (bar/signature) point
of the tempo map, is selected.
# Refer to page "153", SETUP mode "2-11. MTC offset mode setting" for operating
procedure and details.
123
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
4. A random offset time is set by the SETUP mode "MTC offset time setting."
# Refer to page "152", SETUP mode "2-10. MTC offset time setting" for operating
procedure and details.
5. "00" is set with the SETUP mode "MIDI device ID setting."
# Refer to page "161", SETUP mode "2-18. MIDI device ID setting" for operating
procedure and details.
6. Set to "adat" the digital signal to be output by the SETUP mode "Digital output track setting."
# Refer to page "159", SETUP mode "2-16. Digital output track setting" for operating
procedure and details.
7. Press the DISP SEL key while pressing the EXECUTE/YES key to change the time base display
to MTC.
Setup of D-160 (#2) (Slave 1) and D-160 (#3) (Slave 2)
1. Set the SETUP mode "MTC Frame rate setting" to the same frame rate as in D-160 (#1).
* Refer to page "151", SETUP mode "2-9. MTC Frame rate setting" for operating
procedure and details.
2. Set the SETUP mode "MTC offset mode setting" to the same mode as in D-160 (#1).
# Refer to page "153", SETUP mode "2-11. MTC offset mode setting" for operating
procedure and details.
3. Set the SETUP mode "MTC offset time setting" to the same offset time as in D-160 (#1).
# Refer to page "152", SETUP mode "2-10. MTC offset time setting" for operating
procedure and details.
4. Set the SETUP mode "MIDI device ID setting," to "01" in D-160 (#2), and to "02" in D-160 (#3).
# Refer to page "161", SETUP mode "2-18. MIDI device ID setting" for operating
procedure and details.
5. Using the SETUP mode "Slave mode setting," set slave mode to "On," and the SETUP mode
"Slave mode type setting," the slave type to "adat."
* Slave mode initial setting: Off
* Permissible setup item: On, Off
* Slave type initial setting: SP DIF
* Permissible setup item: Vari, SP DIF, adat, Free
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.
# Refer to page "154", SETUP mode "2-12. Slave mode setting" , and to page "155",
SETUP mode "2-13. Save mode type setting", for operating procedure and details.
6. Press the DISP SEL key while pressing the EXECUTE/YES key to change the time base display
to MTC.
<Note>
After this setup, check the following in D-160 (#2) and D-160 (#3).
* Blinking of "CHASE" in the display:
This will change to constant lit upon completing chase lock in later operation.
* "DIGITAL" is lit in the display:
This means it is externally synchronized against the input digital signal.
<Note>
Do not insert or remove the optical cable connected to DATA IN when the slave mode is
set to "On." Doing so could generate noise and affect external equipment.
124
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Check chase lock
1. When the master unit (D-160 (#1)) is played back, MTC IN LED of the slave unit (D-160 (#2) and D160 (#3)) will be lit, "CHASE" in the display will immediately change from blinking to lit and chase
lock will be completed.
Check that the MTC time on display are same in both master and slave units.
2. When the master starts recording, the slave will also start recording upon completing chase
lock.
3. When the master is stopped, the slave will also stop as MTC from the master will be interrupted.
"CHASE" in the display will change from lit to blinking.
4. During FF/REW, the master only will be in the FF/REW mode and the slaves will remain
stopped but when playback/recording is started, the slaves will immediately chase lock.
<Note>
The D-160 re-chase window is fixed at "10 frame." In other words, when MTC of the
master and slave drifts apart more than 10 frames, it will assume that chase lock is
disengaged and the slave will match the position again with the master (re-chase
operation). During the re-chase operation, sound output will be muted. If the drift is
within 10 frames, the slave will recognize this and continue to travel.
Because the master supplies digital signal to slave in this system, re-chase is rarely
carried out following chase lock.
* Should the D-160 fail to correctly chase lock and control, re-check the connection
/cables and all settings.
Selecting a recording track
Select the recording tracks for both master and slave.
Execution of recording
A variety of recording work can be carried out with all three D-160's in the chase
lock mode.
125
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
<One point advice>
1. Setting the “Digital input/output track” parameter in the Setup mode allows you to input and output a
digital signal. Note the following when you set this parameter.
* When you set up a digital input track and “DIGITAL (red)” lights up on the display, the D-160 is ready for
syncing with an external word clock via the input digital signal. Use caution not to make a digital signal loop
as mentioned previously.
* When you set up a digital input track, the settings for the external sync signal of the “Slave mode setting” in
the Setup mode (that is, Vari, SP DIF, adat, and Free) will be ignored, and the D-160 will sync with the
specified digital input signal. Refer to “2-13. Slave Type setting” in Setup mode on page "155" for more
information.
* When you set up a digital input track, the Vari-pitch function is turned off (the LED is also turned off).
2. You can integrate the “MIDI clock sync” operation or “MTC sync/MMC system” operation (as mentioned
before) into this multitrack system.
MMC/FEX
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
D-160 (#1)
DATA OUT
MIDI OUT
DATA IN
MIDI IN
D-160 (#2)
DATA OUT
MIDI THRU
DATA IN
MIDI IN
D-160 (#3)
COMPUTER
with MMC/MTC
software
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Connection:
MIDI OUT of D-160 (#3) is connected to MIDI IN of the external MIDI equipment.
Setup of the MIDI sync signal:
In D-160 (#3), select either the MIDI clock necessary for synchronizing or MTC.
* For MIDI clock sync, the external MIDI equipment and D-160 (#3) must be setup by the previously
discussed "MIDI clock sync" procedure.
* For MTC sync, the external MIDI equipment and D-160 (#3) must be setup by the previously discussed
"MTC sync/MMC system" procedure.
* Control of each D-160 becomes possible if the DEVICE ID in the sequence software MMC output (3 channels)
is set to comply with the DEVICE ID (00, 01, 02) setup in D-160.
* When in any mode other than output of MIDI CLOCK from the D-160, MMC from MIDI IN and also FEX are
automatically merged and output from MIDI OUT.
In the above schematic, the MMC and the reply message of MMC/FEX which are output from D-160
(master) itself and, MMC and FEX output from the computer, are merged and output from MIDI OUT.
126
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
4. External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode
Up to this point, synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with
the D-160 as the master and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave
mode setting, the MIDI equipment can be set as the master and D-160 as the slave.
<Note>
External MIDI equipment which can be used as the master is limited to those which
can output MTC.
* Initialize D-160.
* Confirm the program and sampling frequency.
* In the following, the explanation will be on the assumption that a computer (with sequence
software) is used.
Computer
with MMC/MTC
soft ware (Master)
MIDI OUT
D-160 (Slave)
MIDI IN
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
Connection to external equipment
Connect MIDI OUT of the computer (with MIDI interface) with MIDI IN of D-160.
The computer sequence software complying to MMC/MTC must be activated.
Setup of external equipment
Sequence software is setup as follows.
* Set for output of MTC.
* Set frame rate of the MTC to be output.
* Confirm start time of the tune.
# Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment for details.
Setup of D-160
1. Set to same frame rate as the sequence software by the SETUP mode "MTC Frame rate setting."
# Refer to page "151", SETUP mode "2-9. MTC Frame rate setting" for operating
procedure and details.
2. Set to the desired mode by the SETUP mode "MTC offset mode setting."
# Refer to page "153", SETUP mode "2-11. MTC offset mode setting" for operating
procedure and details.
3. A random offset time can be set by the SETUP mode "MTC offset time setting."
127
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
# Refer to page "152", SETUP mode "2-10. MTC offset time setting" for operating
procedure and details.
4. Set slave mode to "On" by the SETUP mode "Slave mode setting," and the slave type to "Vari"
by the SETUP mode "Slave mode type setting."
# Refer to page "154", SETUP mode "2-12. Slave mode setting" , and page "155",
SETUP mode "2-13. Slave mode type setting", for operating procedure and details.
5. Press the DISP SEL key while pressing on the EXECUTE/YES key to change the time base
display to MTC.
<Precautions at MTC related setups>
The position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/00CLK) when the setup MTC (MTC offset
time) should be output was setup by the "MTC offset time setting" and "MTC offset
mode setting." In accordance to start time of the tune set by the sequence software,
setup as explained below.
Offset mode: For ABS
Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the start time of the tune set by
the sequence software. Because the D-160 cannot immediately chase lock after input
of MTC, in order to sync the D-160 from head of the tune, set the preroll using the
sequence software, and playback from before the actual head of the tune to allow the
D-160 to enter into sync by the time it arrives at the head of the tune.
Offset mode: For BAR/BEAT
The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the start time of the tune set by
the sequence software. Because the "ABS 0" position is set at the "0002BAR/1BEAT/
00CLK" position in the D-160, as mentioned before, the preceding time required for
sync is already set. The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in length
depending on the first bar's "signature setting" and "tempo setting" mentioned before.
For example, it will be longer if the tempo is slowed down.
Confirming chase lock
1. When the sequence software is played, MTC IN LED of the D-160 will light, "CHASE" in the
display will change from blinking to lit and the chase lock will be completed.
Check that the MTC output by the sequence software and MTC time displayed in the D-160
are the same.
2. When the sequence software stops, MTC will be interrupted and the D-160 will also stop.
"CHASE" in the display will change from lit to blinking.
3. During FF/REW of the sequence software, D-160 will remain stopped but upon starting to record,
the D-160 will immediately chase lock.
<Note>
Chase lock of the D-160 by MTC only is permissible when speed difference of the MTC
from the master is within +/- 5.6%. Against the MTC within this range, variable pitch
will be constantly applied internally for chasing. Chase lock, however, will not function
against MTC at a speed difference outside this range.
Also, when the master speed difference is large, it is advised to let D-160 learn the
master speed by entering PLAY prior to recording. By doing so, it will be lock faster
from the second and later sessions.
* Should it not be possible to chase lock, re-check connections / cables and all
settings.
128
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Execution of recording
Carry out various recordings while the D-160 is chase locked to the sequence
software.
<One Point Advice>
Sync signal "Free" of the "Slave mode setting" menu:
When the D-160 is made to chase lock by MTC only, variable pitch will be constantly
applied by external MTC. If a digital signal is output to an external digital equipment
from the D-160, it will not be able to follow the speed difference (MTC speed difference
of the master) of the D-160 and the external digital equipment, in some cases, may
not be able to input a continuous digital signal.
As a counter measure, the sync signal should be set to "Free" by the "Slave mode
setting" menu. Using this setting, the D-160 will enter self operation by the internal
clock, after completion of chase lock, and it will be possible to supply a stable digital
signal to the external equipment.
Under this setting, when MTC drift between the master unit and slave unit exceeds 10
frames, the D-160 will assume that chase lock has been disengaged and the slave unit
will carry out position matching again with the master unit (re-chase operation).
During the re-chase operation, sound output will be muted and the digital signal will
also be interrupted. If it is within 10 frames, the slave unit will continue to run while
admitting this drift.
<Note>
When you select “Vari” for the Slave mode setting, the D-160 will use the Vari-pitch
function to lock to the MTC coming from the master device.
However, if you select an S/P DIF digital signal or an adat digital signal for the digital
input track in Setup mode, the D-160 will sync with the word clock via the input
signal.
Therefore, when you set up a digital input track, the D-160 will not sync with the MTC
even if “Vari” has been selected for the Slave mode setting. Once the D-160 locks to
the master device, it will sync to the external digital input signal (in the same manner
as when SP DIF or adat signals are used).
129
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
5. Sync system with "adat" by the slave mode
This section will explain the sync system using "adat" equipment such as the Fostex
RD-8.
* Initialize D-160.
* Confirm the program.
* Set RD-8 and D-160 to the same sampling frequency.
RD-8 (Master)
MIDI OUT
D-160 (Slave)
DIGITAL OUT
MIDI IN
DATA INPUT
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
REDO
HOLD/
POWER
STORE
RECALL
PGM CHANGE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
Equipment connections
Make connections, respectively, RD-8 DIGITAL OUT to D-160 DATA IN, and RD-8
MIDI OUT to D-160 MIDI IN.
<Note>
In order to slave operate adat equipment and the D-160, the best setting is to supply
"adat" digital signals together with MTC from the master unit.
Setup of RD-8 (master)
1. Setup for output of MTC.
2. Setup the MTC frame rate to be output.
3. Check the MTC time to be output.
4. If necessary, set to allow output of "adat" digital signals.
This is unnecessary for the RD-8.
# Refer to the RD-8 Owners Manual for details.
Settings on the D-160
1. Set the same frame rate as the RD-8 for the “MTC Frame rate setting” in the Setup mode.
# Refer to “2-9. MTC Frame rate setting” in Setup mode on page "151" for the operation and
more information.
2. Select a desired mode for “MTC offset mode setting” in the SETUP mode. (*)
# Refer to “2-11. MTC offset mode setting” in Setup mode on page "153" for the operation
and more information.
130
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
3. “MTC offset time setting” in Setup mode allows you to set the MTC time to start the Chase Lock
operation. (*)
# Refer to “2-10. MTC offset time setting” in Setup mode on page "152" for the
operation and more information.
4. Set Slave mode "On" for “Slave mode setting” in Setup mode, and select “adat” as a slave mode
type for “Slave mode type setting” in Setup mode.
# Refer to “2-12. Slave mode setting” in Setup mode on page "154", and "2-13. Slave mode
type setting" in Setup mode on page "155", for the procedure and information.
5. Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the EXECUTE/YES key to select the MTC indication
for the Time Base.
<Notes on setting the MTC offset time>
“MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode setting” determine at which point
(ABS 0 or 001BAR/1
/00CLK) the MTC (MTC offset time) is output. Refer to the
following, depending on the song start time set in your sequence software, to set the
MTC output from the RD-8.
* Offset mode: ABS
When the master device (RD-8) outputs the specified MTC (MTC offset time), the slave
D-160 will start the Chase-Lock operation. Remember that it will take a little time for
the D-160 to start chase-lock after the MTC is input. Setting the MTC offset time will
allow the Chase-lock operation to start from the specified point of the master device.
For example, when the master device (RD-8) outputs MTC as 00h 00m 00s 00sf ~ 00h
40m 00s 00sf, if the D-160 offset (ABS mode) is 00h 20m 00s 00sf, the D-160 ABS time
will lock from 23h 40m 00s 00sf, and if the frame rate setting is 30 frame, lock will
disengage temporarily at 23h 29m 59s 29f.
Later on, it will lock again at ABS time in the vicinity of 00h 00m 03s.
This is an indication that the ABS time 24h is set as access maximum time in the D-160
and that return to "0" is not continuous.
Should no overshooting of 24h occur in the ABS time, overshooting of 24h with a
random MTC OFFSET can be carried out correctly.
* Offset mode: BAR
As described previously, the D-160 uses “-002BAR/1 /00CLK” as an “ABS 0” point,
there is enough time until the Chase Lock starts, and Chase Lock will be complete by
the specified MTC offset time. The time length of the two bars before the Chase Lock
will vary depending on the settings in the first bar for the “Time signature setting”
and the “Tempo setting.” Setting the MTC offset time will also allow the Chase Lock
operation to start from the specified point of the master device.
<Note>
After this setting, check the following items on the D-160:
* “CHASE” is flashing on the display: When the Chase Lock operation is complete,
this indicator will light.
* “DIGITAL” lights up on the display: The unit is syncing to the external digital signal.
<Note>
Do not connect or remove the optical cable from the DATA IN connector while Slave
mode is on. Otherwise, the unit may generate noise, affecting the connected external
devices.
131
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Checking Chase Lock
1. When the master device (RD-8) is played, the MTC IN LED on the slave machine (D-160) will light,
then “CHASE” will light in the display, and Chase Lock will be complete.
Check to make sure the display shows the correct MTC time.
2. When you stop the master device, the MTC transmission from the master device will be interrupted
and the slave machine will also stop.
The illuminated “CHASE” will flash.
3. While the master device is in fast forward or rewind mode, the slave machine will remain stopped.
When you start playing the master device, the slave machine will start the Chase Lock
operation.
<Note>
The D-160’s re-chase window is “10 frames” fixed. That is, when the MTC of the master
device and the MTC of the slave machine slip from each other by 10 frames or more, the
slave machine will interpret this as being out of sync, and it will try to lock with the master
device again (this is called a “re-chase” operation). During the re-chase operation, audio
output will be muted. If slippage is within 10 frames, the slave machine will continue running
while accepting the slippage. Since the master device supplies a digital signal to the slave
machine in this system, the slave machine will not perform the re-chase operation after
chase lock is complete.
* If the Chase Lock operation or control is not correct, check all connections, cables, and
settings.
Recording
You may perform recording while the RD-8 and the D-160 are chase-locked.
* Setting the “Digital input track setting” and “Digital output track setting” on the
D-160 will allow audio to be transferred between devices in the digital domain.
Please note that a track specified for digital input will not accept an analog signal.
When this system is to be used with the digital input track set to "adat," because
an analog can be input to the adat track not connected, a digital 8 track and
analog 8 track can be simultaneously recorded.
For example, if DATA INPUT 1-8 are being used and DATA INPUT 9-16 are not
connected, analog signals can be input in the analog input 9-16 connectors.
132
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
6. Multitrack system using a D-90 / D-80 (Ver. 2) / DMT-8 (Ver.2/VL)
This section explains a multitrack system that uses the D-160 as master and a D-90, D-80,
D-80Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver. 2, or DMT-8VL as slave. Using the D-160 as a master device
allows for Chase Lock operation using the Vari-pitch function or the MTC.
The example explained here uses Fostex DMT-8 Ver. 2 as a slave machine, but you can
use another model with the same settings to configure the multitrack system.
<Note>
A DMT-8, which does not have a Slave Sync function, cannot be used in this system.
However, it can be used as a master device. Refer to the “Hint” described later.
<Note>
Note the following when you use the D-160 along with a D-90, D-80, D-80 Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver.
2, DMT-8VL, or DMT-8.
1. Use only Programs P1 - P5.
2. Select 44.1kHz for the sampling frequency.
3. Select S/P DIF for the digital signal. An adat digital signal can be used only on the D-90.
* Initialize the D-160 and the DMT-8 Ver. 2.
* Check the Programs on both machines (P1-P5).
* Set the sampling frequency on both machines to 44.1kHz.
Connecting the devices
* Connect DATA OUT of the D-160 to DATA IN of the DMT-8 Ver. 2, and MIDI OUT of the
D-160 to MIDI IN of the DMT-8 Ver. 2.
<Note>
The best setup is to supply the MTC and S/P DIF digital signal from the master device so
slave operation will be successful.
D-160 (Master)
D-160
DIGITAL MULTITRACK RECORDER
AUTO RTN
AUTO PLAY
CLIPBOARD
IN
OUT
START
AUTO PUNCH
IN
OUT
END
AUTO RTN
COPY
MOVE
AUTO
PUNCH
REHEARSAL
PASTE
ERASE
DISP SEL
EXECUTE
/YES
REDO
POWER
HOLD/
STORE
PGM CHANGE
LOCATE
VARI PITCH
TAKE
1/9
2/10
3/11
4/12
RECORD TRACK
5/13
6/14
RECORD
7/15
8/16
STOP
PLAY
REWIND
F FWD
SHIFT
PUNCH
IN / OUT
LOCKED
HD ACCESS
MTC IN
CLIPBOARD PLAY
LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE ABS END
DATA OUTPUT 1-8
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
DATA IN
DMT-8 ver.2(Slave)
133
EXIT
/NO
TIME BASE SEL
UNDO
RECALL
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Procedure for the Chase Lock operation
1. Press a RECORD TRACK select key on both machines to set the tracks in the “READY” mode.
2. Press the RECORD and PLAY buttons on the D-160 to start recording.
The DMT-8 Ver. 2 will also start recording. This is because the master device will send
a RECORD command.
This procedure is used to create an area that can be played back on the DMT-8 Ver. 2;
you do not need to input audio (silence recording). If you make a silent recording of
almost the same length as the song to be recorded, sync operation can be started at
any point in the song.
3. Press the STOP button on both machines.
* If something has been previously recorded, you do not need to perform this procedure.
<Note>
The D-90, D-80, D-80 Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver. 2, DMT-8VL, and DMT-8 can play back only
the recorded area (ABS 0 through ABS END).
Therefore, if nothing is recorded, they cannot output the MTC or perform the Chase Lock
(sync).
At this point the devices are not chase-locked, but recording separately.
Follow the procedure below so that the two units will chase-lock to each other.
Setting the D-160 (Master)
1. The D-160 will output the MTC for the sync operation.
Set the “MIDI sync output signal setting” in the Setup mode to “MTC.”
# Refer to “2-8. MIDI sync output signal setting” in the Setup mode on page "150" for the
procedure and additional information.
2. Set any frame rate for the “MTC Frame rate setting” in the Setup mode.
# Refer to “2-9. MTC Frame rate setting” in the Setup mode on page "151" for the procedure
and additional information.
3. Select “ABS” for the sake of compatibility with the DMT-8 Ver. 2 for “MTC offset mode setting”
in the Setup mode.
# Refer to “2-11. MTC offset mode setting” in the Setup mode on page "153" for the
procedure and additional information.
4. Set an offset time for “MTC offset time setting” in the Setup mode.
# Refer to “2-10. MTC offset time setting” in the Setup mode on page "152" for the procedure
and additional information.
5. Set the “MIDI device ID setting” in the Setup mode to “00”.
# Refer to “2-18. MIDI device ID setting” in the Setup mode on page "161" for the procedure
and additional information.
6. Select “SP DIF” as the digital output signal for the “Digital output track setting” in the Setup
mode.
* Only an S/P DIF digital signal can be used with the D-80, D-80 Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver. 2,
DMT-8 VL, and DMT-8.
# Refer to “2-16. Digital output track setting” in the Setup mode on page "159" for the
procedure and additional information.
7. Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the EXECUTE/YES key to select MTC as the Time
Base indication.
134
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Setting the DMT-8 Ver. 2 (Slave)
# Refer to the DMT-8 User’s Guide for the procedure and additional information.
1. Use the same frame rate as the D-160 for the “MTC frame rate setting” in the Setup mode.
2. Use the D-160’s offset time for the “MTC offset time setting” in the Setup mode.
There is no “MTC offset mode setting” on the D-80, D-80 Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver. 2, and
DMT-8 VL. When you use the D-160’s setting, the MTC offset mode will automatically
become “ABS.”
3. Set the “MIDI device ID setting” in Setup mode to “01” on the DMT-8 Ver. 2.
4. Set the Slave mode to “On” for the “Slave mode setting” in the Setup mode.
You can set the Slave mode on the D-80, D-80 Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver. 2, and DMT-8 VL, but
you cannot select a sync signal (SLAVE TYPE). If you use the D-160’s setting, “SP DIF”
will be automatically selected.
5. Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the EXECUTE/YES key to select MTC as the Time
Base indication.
<Note>
After this setting, check the following items on the DMT-8 Ver. 2:
* “LOCKED” LED is flashing: When the Chase Lock operation is complete, this indicator
will light.
* “DIGITAL” lights on the display: The unit is syncing to the external digital signal.
<Note>
Do not connect or remove the optical cable the DATA IN connector while
Slave mode is on. This can generate noise, affecting the connected external devices.
Checking Chase Lock
1. When the master device (D-160) is played, the flashing “PLAY” button lamp will light and
Chase Lock will be complete.
Check to make sure the display shows the correct MTC time.
2. When you start recording on the master device, the slave device will start recording after the
Chase Lock operation is complete.
3. When you stop the master device, the MTC transmission from the master device will be interrupted
and the slave machine will also stop.
The illuminated “PLAY” button's lamp will begin to flash.
4. While the master device is in fast forward or rewind mode, the slave machine will remain stopped.
When you start playing or recording on the master device, the slave machine will start
the Chase Lock operation.
<Note>
The re-chase window of the D-90, D-80, D-80 Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver. 2, and DMT-8 VL is “10
frames” fixed. This is the same as the D-160. When the MTC of the master device and
the MTC of the slave machine slip from each other by 10 frames or more, the slave
machine will interpret this as being out of sync, and will try to lock with the master
device again (this is called a “re-chase” operation). During the re-chase operation,
audio output will be muted. If slippage is within 10 frames, the slave machine will
continue running while accepting the slippage. Since the master device supplies a digital
signal to the slave machine in this system, the slave machine will not perform the rechase operation after chase lock is complete.
* If the Chase Lock operation or control is incorrect, check all connections, cables, and
settings.
135
D-160 Owner's Manual (MIDI sync function)
Selecting a recording track
Select the recording tracks for both master and slave.
Recording
You can record while the D-160 is chase locked.
<One Point Advice>
You can use the D-160 as a slave machine. In this case, set the Slave mode to “On”
for the D-160’s “Slave mode setting”, and set Slave type to “SP DIF” for "Slave mode
type setting."
In this system, on the D-160 you can use only those functions available on the
D-80, D-80 Ver. 2, DMT-8 Ver. 2, DMT-8 VL, and DMT-8.
Therefore, you cannot use the Vari-pitch function.
136
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
SETUP mode
The setup mode allows you to set up parameters for the D-160 according to your
requirements.
The contents that you can set up are listed below.
There are two types of setup modes. Some modes are commonly applicable to all
programs from 1 to 99 and some others are applicable to each program individually,
except for Load, Save & Format.
You can save or load those set up modes, which are applicable program by program as a
part of the song data, as we described before in the "SAVING/LOADING SONG DATA"
section. But, those which are applicable to all programs are not saved or loaded.
Nevertheless, they are memorized even if you turn off the power.
Mode
"Track Exchange?"
"Signature Set?"
"Tempo Map Set?"
"Title Edit?"
"Delete PGM?"
"Click ?"
"Preroll Time?"
"Midi Sync Out?"
"Frame Rate?"
"MTC OFFSET"
"MTC Offset Mode?"
"Slave Mode?"
"Ref.TC?"
"Slave Type?"
"Rec Protect?"
"Digi. in?"
"Digi. out?"
" Resolution?"
"Device ID?"
"Sample Rate?"
"8345 Clock?"
"Word Out?"
"Sync Preset?"
"NOs Of Event?"
"Drive Sel.?"
"Load PGM?"
"Save PGM?"
"Disk Format?"
Functions
Community
_
Track Swapping
Time Signature Setting (Chosen from 11 setting from 1/4 ~ 8/8)
Tempo Setting (30Å`250 bpm)
Program Name Setting (Up to 16 digits)
_
Program Deleting
Metronome ON/OFF Setting
Preroll Time Setting for LOCATE Function
Midi Sync Out Signal Setting
MTC Frame Rate Setting
Offset Time Setting between ABS and MTC
MTC Offset Mode Setting
Slave Mode ON/OFF Setting
Available with Option Model 8345 (Refer to the Model 8345 Owners Manual)
Slave Mode Type Setting
Record Protect ON/OFF Setting
Digital Input Track Setting
Digital Output Track Setting
Bar/Beat Resolution ON/OFF Setting
MIDI Device ID Setting
Sampling Frequency Setting
Available with Option Model 8345 (Refer to the Model 8345 Owners Manual)
Available with Option Model 8345 (Refer to the Model 8345 Owners Manual)
Available with Option Model 8345 (Refer to the Model 8345 Owners Manual)
_
Event Number Check of a Track
_
Current Drive Setting
_
Loading Song Data from External Device
_
Saving Song Data to External Device
_
Initializing Internal Hard disk/SCSI disk
Initial Setting
Trk=01 <-> Trk=01
001 bar 04 04 (4/4 beat)
001 bar 1
=120 (Tempo 120)
#0001
Off
00s (00 second)
CLK (MIDI Clock)
25 Frames
0h 59m 57s 00f 00sf
ABS
Off
Vari
Off (Record Enable)
L--, R-- (Nothing is assigned)
Adat
Off
00 (Device No. =00)
44.1kHz
IDE (Internal Hard disk)
: Modes applicable program by program. They can be saved/loaded.
: Modes applicable to all programs. They cannot be saved/loaded.
The " " means a quarter note(1/4 note) through out this manual.
1. How to enter the Setup Mode
This is the procedure to arriving at the stage for choosing the other modes you
require. The procedure from now on is written assuming the required program
has already been selected. So, make sure the program you want to work on is
already selected.
1. Press the Display key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display stops flashing.
This is the first step in the set up mode.
137
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
<Note>
The setup menu will show the "Track Exchange?" mode as for the factory default setting
or just after you have formatted the internal hard disk drive. However, except for these,
the setup menu will show the last mode you chose.
3. Turn the JOG dial and choose the mode you want.
If you rotate the JOG dial either clockwise or counter clockwise, the modes appear one after the
other. Some modes also show their current settings.
When you turn the JOG dial, SETUP menus will be displayed in the following order.
As you change the menu, the position indicators in the FL tube display will also start flashing
and moving on one after another.
"Track Exchange?"
"Signature Set?"
Tempo Map Set?"
"TitleEdit PGM**?" (PGM01)
"Delete PGM**?"(PGM01)
"Click ?"(Off)
The position of the SETUP menu that you choose will
start flashing on the level meters. Each SETUP menu
has a dedicated position in the FL tube display.
When you change the menu with the JOG dial, the
position indicators start flashing one after another.
Use this feature as a reference to choose the SETUP
menus.
"Drive Sel. ?"
"PrerollTime?"(00s)
"Track Exchange ?"
"MidiSyncOut?" (CLK)
"Frame Rate?" (25 frame)
"MTC OFFSET" (00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf)
"Offset Mode?" (ABS)
"Slave Mode?"(Off)
"Ref. TC?" (Void!)
"SlaveType?" (Vari)
"Rec Protect?" (Off)
"Rec Protect ?"
"MTC OFFSET"
"Digi. in?" (L--, R--)
"Digi. out?"(adat)
" Resolution?" (Off)
"Device ID?" (00)
"SampleRate?" (44.1)
"8345Clock" (Void!)
"Word Out"(Void!)
This feature also shows these four menus; "Ref.TC?",
"8345 Clock", "Word Out" and "Sync Preset". However,
since these menus will only work when the optional
accessory Model 8345 is installed, there is no
explanation of these functions in manual.
Refer to the Model 8345 owners' manual for details.
"SyncPreset"(Void!)
"NOs Of Event"
"Drive Sel. ?"(IDE)
"Load PGM?"
"Save PGM?"
"Disk Format?"
138
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. The mode you wanted has been chosen.
This is the second step in the SETUP mode.
Refer to the pages below for details of each SETUP mode. For your information, the actual
display will appear as follows. (the
means flashing display) :
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Track Exchange?" -> Track Swapping
(Initial setting : Trk=01<->Trk=01)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"Signature Set?" -> Time Signature Settig
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
(Initial Setting : 001 bar 04 04(4/4beat))
SIGNATURE
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"Tempo Map Set?" -> Tempo Setting
(Initial Setting : 001 bar 1
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
=120)
TEMPO
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"TitleEdit?" -> Program Name Setting
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
(Initial Setting : #0001)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"Delete PGM?" -> Program Deleting
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
(Initial Setting : PGM01)
44.1kHz
SURE ?
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"Click ?" -> Metronome ON/OFF Setting
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
(Initial Setting : Off)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"Preroll Time?" -> Preroll Time Setting for LOCATE
function
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
(Initial Setting : 00s)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"MidiSyncOut?" -> MIDI Sync Out Signal Setting
(Initial Setting : CLK)
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
139
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Frame Rate?" -> MTC Frame Rate Setting
(Initial Setting : 25 frame)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MTC
SETUP
"MTC OFFSET" -> Offset Time Setting between
ABS and MTC
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
(Initial Setting : 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf)
OFFSET
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"MTC Offset Mode?" -> MTC Offset Mode Setting
(Initial Setting : ABS)
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Slave Mode?" -> Slave Mode ON/OFF Setting
(Initial Setting : Off)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Slave Type?" -> Slave Mode Type Setting
(Initial Setting : Vari)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"Rec Protect?" -> Record Protect ON/OFF Setting
(Initial Setting : Off)
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
"Digi. in?" -> Digital Input Track Setting
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
(Initial Setting : L--, R--)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Digi. out?" -> Digital Output Track Setting
(Initial Setting : adat)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
" Resolution?" -> Bar/Beat Resolution ON/OFF
Setting
44.1kHz
∞
(Initial Setting : Off)
_
140
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Device ID?" -> MIDI Device ID Setting
(Initial Setting : 00)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Sample Rate?" -> Sampling frequency Setting
(Initial Setting : 44.1kHz)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"NOs Of Event?" -> Event Number Chec k of a
Track
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Drive Sel. ?" -> Current Drive Setting
(Initial Setting : IDE)
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Load PGM?" -> Loading Song Data from
External Device
44.1kHz
∞
(Initial Setting : DAT)
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
LOAD
16
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
"Save PGM?" -> Saving Song Data to
External Device
44.1kHz
∞
(Initial Setting : DAT)
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SAVE
SETUP
"Disk Format?" -> Initializing Internal Hard disk
/SCSI disk
(Initial Setting : IDE)
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
FORMAT
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step to the first or to quit
SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so that you can correct the
setting, choose another SETUP mode or eventually return to the normal time base display.
141
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2. How to set each Mode
2-1. Track Swapping ("Track Exchange?")
tracks 17
This mode allows you to swap a mono track with one of the other recorded tracks, e.g.
swapping track 1 with track16. Mono track swapping can be done on any two tracks
from track 1 to track 24 including the additional tracks.
The mode also allows you to swap 8 real tracks with 8 additional tracks at once. In this
case, you can either swap tracks 1 ~ 8 with tracks 17 ~ 24 or tracks 9 ~ 16 with
~ 24.
<Note>
You can only swap tracks within a program. It is not possible to swap tracks between
different programs.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display.
Then, press the EXECUTE/YES key. The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. Choose "Track Exchange?" with the JOG dial. The "?" display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
You have arrived at the second step of the "Track Exchange?" menu.
The display will now show "Trk=01<->Trk=01" in the current program as in the figure below.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. Use the JOG dial to enter the track you want.
Then, use either the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing track number so that you
can choose another track.
For example, If you choose "02" on the left hand side "Trk=**" and "08" on the right hand side,
it means you are swapping Track 2 with Track 8.
Even if you chose the numbers the other way round, i.e. Trk=08<->Trk=02, the result would be
the same. In the case you want to swap 8 tracks with the additional tracks, you can choose either
Trk=1-8<->Trk=17-24 with the left hand side "Trk=**" flashing on the display or Trk=17-24<>Trk=9-16 with the right hand side "Trk=**" flashing on the display. because these 8 track
settings are situated between Track 24 and Track 01, find them by rotating the JOG dial.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the two tracks you want.
The display will now show "Exchange 02 <-> 08" and be flashing "SURE?".
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again to proceed.
After swapping the recorded data on track 2 with one on track 8, the display will show
"COMPLETED!". Then go back to the normal time base display as before you entered SETUP
mode.
142
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-2. Time Signature Setting ("Signature Set?")
This mode sets up the time signature of a song.
The way it sets this up is, for example, to start a song with a 4/4 beat from the first bar,
then to change it to a 2/4 beat at bar number 17. The time signature and next section
tempo setting make up a tempo map. After the tempo map is figured out by completing
the time signature and tempo setting, the D-160 will be able to handle "BAR /BEAT/
CLOCK" and the metronome function. You need to set up the time signature and tempo
to generate the MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer.
* Refer to page "117" for details of "MIDI Clock Synchronization".
<Note>
The D-160 will still run the time counter in PLAY mode even after the ABS END. Thus, it will
continue generating the MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer even if you have not recorded
anything, provided a tempo map has been set up.
* Initial Setting: 001Bar 4/4 Beat
* Available bars: 001 ~ 999
* Available time signature: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8, - -/- - (Delete)
* Maximum setting points : 64
* The setting is applicable song by song.
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
* Make sure you choose the right program before setting this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display stops flashing.
2. Choose "Signature Set?" with the JOG dial. The "?" display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The D-160 will display "SIGNATURE" and the last recalled bar number with the time signature
that has been registered. In the case of the initial setting, as only the first bar is registered with
a 4/4 beat, it will show "001 bar • 4/4 beat".
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
SIGNATURE
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Time Signature Setting Check
4. Turn the JOG dial when the D-160 displays "SIGNATURE".
If there are some setting changes registered in a song, you can see the next set up point by
rotating the JOG dial clockwise. ("*** bar */* )
If you turn the JOG dial fully clockwise, "- - BAR - -/- - " will be displayed.
This means there are no more time signature changing points registered.
<Note>
The D-160 counts a beat with the last registered time signature, i.e. one bar before the "- - bar
- -/- - " . In the case of the initial setting, because only the first bar is registered with a 4/4
beat, the beat counts with a 4/4 beat until the end unless you register a different time
signature after the second bar.
Time Signature Register
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key when the D-160 displays "SIGNATURE".
The display will show "*** bar" flashing to allow you to enter a new time signature changing
point.
143
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
6. Use either the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to choose "bar" or " beat". Then, use the JOG
dial to enter the bar number or time signature you want.
The bar numbers you can enter are from 001 to 999. And the time signatures you can enter are
"1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8". For your information, the "- -/- -" means
"No Signature registered" and can be used to delete a signature change point. When you turn
the JOG dial while the display shows "*** bar" flashing, it will either show the time signature as
"*/*" on the already registered bars or as "- -/- -" if a bar has no time signature registered.
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have entered a required bar number and time signature.
The setting will now be registered. Then, the display will go back to Item 5 and show "*** bar"
flashing, allowing you to enter a new time signature setting.
8. Repeat the procedures described in items 5 ~ 7 to register further time signatures.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step to the first
or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so that
you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
<Note>
You can register the setting up to 64 points. If you try to register over 64 points, the 65th
point onwards will be ignored.
Time Signature Edit & Delete
Follow the procedures described as in Items 1
~
5.
6. When the display shows flashing "*** bar", choose the bar that carries the signature you want to
edit with the JOG dial.
7. Press the HOLD/> key or turn the shuttle dial to choose the "*/* ".
The flashing display will move to the "*/* " and allows you to change the time signature setting.
8. With the JOG dial, choose a required time signature.
If you choose "- -/- -", the time signature on the bar will be deleted.
9. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have changed or deleted the time signature on the bar
number you wanted.
The setting will now be registered. Then, the display will return to Item 5 and show "*** bar"
flashing, which allows you to enter a new time signature setting.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step to the first
or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so that
you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
<Notes>
* You cannot register the "- -/- -" setting on the 001bar.
* If the registered tempo changing point becomes unavailable, after you alter the time
signature, the particular beat which used to carry some tempo changing will automatically
disappear. For example, the registered tempo at 010 bar 4 will disappear if you edit the
time signature at the 010 bar to 3/4 beat.
Delete all Time Signature Setting at once
Follow the procedures described as in items 1
~
5.
6. While the display shows "*** bar" flashing, turn the JOG dial fully counter clockwise.
The display will now show "All Clear?" and flashing "SURE?".
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key to proceed.
All the registered time signature settings will be erased and go back to the initial setting.
Then, the display will go back to item 5 and show "*** bar" flashing.
<Note>
Be careful because this procedure wipes out the tempo setting as well as time signature
setting.
144
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step to the first
or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
2-3. Tempo Setting ("Tempo Map Set?")
This mode sets up the tempo on a song. The way it sets this up is, for example, for the
tempo to become 150 bpm at the 3rd beat in the 12th bar.
The tempo setting and time signature in the previous section make up a tempo map.
After the tempo map has been calculated by completing the tempo and time signature
setting, the D-160 will be able to handle "BAR /BEAT/CLOCK" and the metronome
function. You need to set up the tempo and time signature to generate the MIDI Clock &
Song Position Pointer.
* Refer to page "117" for details of "MIDI Clock Synchronization".
<Note>
The D-160 will still run the time counter in PLAY mode even after the ABS END. Thus, it will
continue generating the MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer even if you have not recorded
anything, provided a tempo map has been set up.
* Initial Setting: 001Bar 1st Beat 120 bpm
* Bar to register: Follows to the time signature setting
* Beat to register : Follows to the time signature setting
* Available tempo : 30 ~ 250, - - (Delete)
* Maximum setting points : 64
* The setting is applicable song by song.
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
* Make sure you choose the right program before setting this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display.
Then, press the EXECUTE/YES key. The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. Choose "Tempo Map Set?" with the JOG dial. The "?" display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The D-160 will display "TEMPO" and last recalled bar number with its tempo setting which is
already registered. In the case of the initial setting, because only the first bar, first beat is registered
with a 120 bpm, it will show "001 bar ,1 • =120 ".
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
TEMPO
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Tempo Setting Check
4. Turn the JOG dial when the D-160 displays "TEMPO".
If there are some setting changes registered in a song, you can see the next set up point by
rotating the JOG dial clockwise.("*** bar * , =***)
If you turn the JOG dial fully clockwise, "- - BAR - - , = - -" will be displayed.
This means there is no more tempo changing points registered.
<Note>
The D-160 counts a beat with the last registered tempo, i.e. one bar before the "- - bar - - ,
= - -" . In the case of the initial setting, because only the first beat of first bar is registered
with a 120bpm, the beat counts with a 120bpm until the end unless you register a different
tempo after the second beat of first bar.
145
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
Tempo Register
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key when the D-160 displays "TEMPO".
The display will show flashing "*** bar" so that it allows you to enter a new tempo changing
point.
6. Use either the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to choose "bar", " beat" or "TEMPO".
Then, use the JOG dial to enter a required bar/beat and tempo that you want to register.
The bar numbers and beat you can enter follows the time signature setting described in the
previous section, and the tempo settings you can enter are 30 ~ 250 bpm. For your information,
the "- - -" means "No tempo setting registered" and can be used to delete a tempo change point.
When you turn the JOG dial while the display shows "*** bar" or "* " flashing, it will either
show the tempo as "***" on the already registered bar/beat or as "- - -" if a bar/beat has no tempo
setting registered.
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have entered a required bar/beat and tempo.
The setting will now be registered. Then, the display will go back to Item 5 and show "*** bar"
flashing so which you to enter a new tempo setting.
8. Repeat the procedures described in items 5 ~ 7 to register further tempo settings.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step to the first or
to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so that you
can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the normal
time base display.
<Note>
You can register the setting up to 64 points. If you try to register over 64 points, the 65th point
onwards will be ignored.
Example : A tempo map can be setup as in the following example, i.e. set the required tempo after having set
time signature.
Time Signature Setting
001 bar 4/4
005 bar 3/4
Tempo Map
Tempo Setting
001 bar 1 , =120
003 bar 1 , =90
005 bar 3 , =60
007 bar 2 , =120
Tempo Setting Edit or Delete
Follow the procedures described as in Items 1 ~ 5.
6. Use either the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to choose "bar", " beat" or "TEMPO".
Then, use the JOG dial to enter a required bar/beat and tempo that you want to edit.
The display will show tempo as "***" on the already registered bar/beat.
7. Press the HOLD/> key or turn the shuttle dial to choose the " =*** ".
The flashing display will move to " =*** " so that it allows you to change the tempo setting.
8. With the JOG dial, choose a required tempo.
If you choose "- - -", the tempo setting on the bar/beat will be deleted.
9. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have changed or deleted the tempo setting on the bar/
beat you wanted.
The setting will now be registered. Then, the display will go back to Item 5 and show "*** bar"
flashing, which allows you to enter a new tempo setting.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other setup mode, or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
<Note>
You cannot register the "- - -" at the 001 bar 1
146
.
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
Delete all Tempo Setting at once
If you proceed with "Delete all Time Signature Setting at once" as described in the previous
section, the D-160 will erase all the tempo settings as well as the time signature settings.
* Refer to the "Delete all Time Signature Setting at once" section for details.
2-4. Program Title Setting ("Title Edit PGM?")
This mode gives a name to the individual program (maximum of 99 programs).
Also, the registered name can be edited.
Choose a required program before you enter to the SETUP mode if you are newly giving
a title or editing a title.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display stops flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose "TitleEdit PGM?".
The "?" display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The D-160 will enter the second step menu of "TitleEdit PGM?" and show the current program
title. In the case of the initial setting, the display will show "#0001" with "#" flashing.
The flashing digit allows you to enter a letter. The available letters are a maximum of 16 digits of
alphabet or numbers. The D-160 handles ASCII code.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. Use the JOG dial to enter a required letter. Then, use either the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to
move the flashing digit.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have entered the required title.
The title will now be registered and the display will then go back to the normal time base display
as before you entered SETUP mode.
2-5. Program Delete ("Delete PGM?")
This mode allows you to delete program data which you no longer need.
You can delete the currently chosen program to obtain more recording space.
<Notes>
* The D-160 automatically renumbers the remained programs after deleting a program between
the other two programs. For example, if you delete program number 2 of program numbers
1,2,3 and 4, number 3 will automatically become the new program number 2 and number
4 will become the new program number 3. Then, the D-160 will end up having three programs
rather than four.
* If you try to delete program number 1 when there is only one program available, the D-160
will set up a new blank program 1 after erasing the current program 1 data.
* This program delete mode does not have an "UNDO" function.
* The Program delete mode will not work if the "Rec Protect ?" mode is set to On. The D-160
will display "Disable REC!" as a warning message and go back to the normal time base
display the same as before you entered SETUP mode.
147
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose "Delete PGM?". The "?" display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will start flashing "SURE?" which indicates it is ready to delete.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
SURE ?
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again to proceed.
The D-160 will show "Deleting!" while proceeding and "COMPLTETED!" after deleting the currently
displayed program. The display will then go back to the normal time base display on the program
before the one you deleted.
2-6. Metronome Setting ("Click ? " )
The D-160 is able to generate the metronome click tone according to the tempo map
figured out by the time signature and tempo setting.
You can record a track at the same time as listening to the metronome click tone.
If you set this mode to ON, track 16 will generate the metronome click tone in either play
or record mode.
<Notes>
*If you set this mode to ON, the D-160 cannot playback the recorded sound from track 16, as
track 16 will be the click track exclusively. In conjunction with this, do not record track 16
with this mode on. If track 16 is in record mode, the click will not be generated.
*The D-160 will still run the time counter in PLAY mode even after the ABS END. Thus, it will
continue generating the metronome click tone even if you have not recorded anything, provided
a tempo map has been set up.
* Initial setting : Off
* Available setting : Off, On
* The setting is applicable song by song.
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of song data
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
*
Make sure to choose the right program before setting up this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display.
Then, press the EXECUTE/YES key. The SETUP display stops flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose "Click ?". The "?" display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will start flashing either "Off" or "On" of current setting.
In the case of initial setting it will show "Off".
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4. Choose either ON or OFF with the JOG dial.
On : Click tone will be generated.
Off : Click tone will not be generated.
148
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
5. Press EXECUTE/YES key after choosing the setting you want.
* Press either the "STOP" button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
2-7. Preroll Time Setting ("Preroll Time ? ")
The D-160 has a preroll function, which stops at the backwards specified time location.
This function is useful when you want to start monitoring the recorded audio from just
before a locate point.
○
○
○
○
○
Locate Point
○
Locate
○
○
○
○
○
Locate
You can set 'backwards specified locate point.
Stop Point
* Initial setting : 00sec
* Available setting : 00 ~ 10sec in 1sec step
* The setting is applicable song by song.
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the powering off.
*
Make sure to choose the right program before setting up this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Preroll Time?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of initial setting, it will show 00 second.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing “**” which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, enter the required preroll time.
You can set the preroll time between 0 and 10 sec in 1 second steps.
If you turn the JOG dial clockwise, the time value will increase. And if you turn the JOG dial
counter clockwise, the time value will decrease vise versa.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have entered the preroll time you want.
The setting will be registered and the display will go back to the Item 2 above.
* Press either the “STOP” button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit the SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key
so that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
149
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-8. MIDI Sync Signal Output Setting (“Midi Sync Out ?”)
This mode sets up the type of MIDI sync signal for external MIDI equipment.
The type of signal the D-160 outputs is either MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer or MTC
(MIDI Time Code). Choose one so that the external MIDI equipment can recognize it
when synchronizing to the D-160.
In case of the MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer, you need to set the section "2-2. Time
Signature" and section "2-3.Tempo as previously mentioned."
In case of the MTC ( MIDI Time Code), you need to set the section "2-9. MTC Frame Rate",
"2-10. MTC Offset Time" and "2-11. MTC Offset Mode" described below.
* See page "117" “MIDI Synchronization Function” for details of the MIDI sync.
<Note>
The D-160 will still run the time counter in PLAY mode even after the ABS END. Thus, it will
continue generating the MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer and MTC even if you have not
recorded anything, provided a tempo map has been set up.
* Initial setting : CLK
* Available setting : CLK, MTC, Off
Clock : MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer, MTC : MIDI Time Code
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
*
Make sure to choose the right program before setting up this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “MidiSyncOut?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of initial setting, it will show CLK.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing “**” which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, enter a required Midi Sync Signal.
Choose the type of MIDI signal you want.
If you choose “CLK”, the D-160 generates the MIDI Clock & Song Position Pointer.
If you choose “MTC”, the D-160 generates the MIDI Time Code.
If you choose “Off”, the D-160 generates no MIDI Sync signal.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have entered the Midi Sync Signal you wanted.
The setting will be registered and the display will go back to step 2 above.
* Press either the “STOP” button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to
the first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key
so that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
150
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-9. MTC Frame Rate Setting (“Frame Rate?”)
If you choose MTC as the MIDI sync signal in the previous section “2-8. MIDI Sync Signal
Output Setting”, you need to set up this mode.
You can set up the frame rate of the MTC generated for external MIDI equipment such as
computer based sequencer software. Choose the frame rate so that the external MIDI
device can receive it.
* See page "120" “MIDI Synchronization Function” for details of the MTC sync.
<Note>
The D-160 will still run the time counter in PLAY mode even after the ABS END. Thus, it will
continue generating the MTC even if you have not recorded anything.
* Initial setting : 25 Frames
* Available setting : 24, 25, 30df, 30nd,29df, 29nd
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
*
Make sure to choose the right program before setting up this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Frame Rate?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of initial setting, it will show 25 frames.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing “**” which indicates it is ready to change the setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, enter the frame rate you want.
Choose the frame rate you want from;
24, 25, 30 non drop frame, 30 drop frame, 29nd (29.97 non drop frame) and 29df (29.97 drop
frame).
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again.
The setting will be registered and the display will go back to the Item 2 above.
* Press either the “STOP” button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit the SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key
so that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
<Note>
There are no 29.97nd or 29.97df in the MTC standard. Use either 30nd or30df unless you
definitely need to synchronize the D-160 with NTSC video.
151
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-10. MTC Offset Time Setting (“MTC Offset”)
If you choose the MTC as the MIDI sync signal in the previous section “2-8. MIDI Sync
Signal Output Setting”, you need to set up this mode.
You can set up the offset time between the MTC output and internal ABS time.
In the case of the initial setting, MTC will output 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf at the ABS 00h
00m 00s 00f 00sf point which is ABS 0. You can also set the MTC offset based on the
001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK position rather than ABS 0.
Refer to the next section “2-11. MTC Offset Mode Setting” for details.
* See “Before Operation” section “3. Time base” for the time relation between MTC and
ABS or BAR/BEAT/CLK.
* See page "120" MIDI synchronization function for details of the MTC sync.
<Note>
The D-160 will still run the time counter in PLAY mode even after the ABS END. Thus, it will
continue generating the MTC even if you have not recorded anything.
* Initial setting : 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf
* Available setting : 00h 00m 00s 00f 00sf ~ 23h 59m 59s 29f 99sf
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
*
Make sure to choose the right program before setting up this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “OFFSET”.
The display will show the current setting. In the case of initial setting, it will show 00h 59m 57s
00f 00sf.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The “s” , second digits, display will start flashing which is asking you to specify the second digit
of the offset time you want.
MTC
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
OFFSET
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. Use either the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to choose time digits, i.e. “h”, “m”, “s”, “f”, “sf”.
Then, use the JOG dial to enter the required time value that you want to register.
The available setting is from 00h 00m 00s 00f 00sf to 23h 59m 59s 29f 99sf.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have entered the required Offset.
The MTC Offset will now be registered and the display will then go back to Item 2 above.
* Press either the “STOP” button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key.
<Note>
We recommend you set about three seconds of preroll time because in the MTC OFFSET of
00h 59m 57s rather than 01h 00m 00s, considering the preparation time to start the external
sequencer in the event that you have chosen “ABS” in the MTC OFFSET mode.
152
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-11. MTC Offset Mode Setting (“MTC Offset?”)
If you choose the MTC as the MIDI sync signal in the previous section “2-8. MIDI Sync
Signal Output Setting”, you need to set up this mode. This mode chooses the MTC time
with offset, which you have already set in the previous section, to start either from the
ABS 0 position or from the 001 BAR 1 BEAT 00 CLK on the tempo map.
* See “Before Operation” section “3.Time base” for the time relation between MTC and
ABS or BAR/BEAT/CLK.
* See page "120" MIDI synchronization function for details of the MTC sync.
<Note>
The D-160 will still run the time counter in PLAY mode even after the ABS END. Thus, it will
continue generating the MTC even if you have not recorded anything.
* Initial setting : ABS
* Available setting : ABS, BAR
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the powering is off.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Offset Mode?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of the initial setting, it will show ABS.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, enter a required setting either ABS or Bar .
If you choose the “ABS”, the MTC time with offset will output at the ABS 0 position.
If you choose the “Bar ”, the MTC time with offset will output at the 001 BAR 1 BEAT 00 CLK
position which according to the tempo map.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again.
The setting will be registered and the display will go back to step 2 above.
* Press either the “STOP” button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
<Note>
We recommend that you set about three seconds of preroll time as in the MTC OFFSET of 00h
59m 57s rather than 01h 00m 00s, considering the preparation time to start the external
sequencer in the event that you have chosen “ABS” in the MTC OFFSET mode. If you have
chosen “Bar ” , the D-160 automatically sets two bars worth of preroll time. You can leave the
MTC OFFSET as 01h 00m 00s.
153
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-12. Slave Mode Setting (“Slave Mode”)
This mode allows you to choose the D-160 slave mode setting either ON or OFF.
If you set the mode to ON, the D-160 will synchronize to the incoming MTC(MIDI time
code)from master unit. It will also synchronize to a type of external sync signal which
you have chosen with the section “2-14. Sync Signal Setting”.
You can make up a multi track recording system using Fostex D-90, D-80 (Ver 2), DMT-8
(Ver 2) or DMT-8VL, and also with some sequencer software.
* See Page "117" for MIDI synchronization for more details.
* Initial setting : Off
* Available setting : On, Off
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
*
*
Make sure to choose the right program before setting up this mode.
Make sure you choose the right sampling frequency before setting up this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Slave Mode?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of the initial setting, it will display Off.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, choose either “On” or “Off”.
If you choose “Off”, the slave function will not work.
5. Press EXECUTE/YES key after choosing the setting you want.
If you have chosen “Off”, the display will go back to step 2 described above.
However, if you have chosen “On”, as well as the display going back to step 2, the “CHASE”
indicator on the display will start flashing.
This means that the Slave Mode has been set to On but, “Chase Lock” has not been achieved yet.
When the “Chase Lock” is completed, the “CHASE” indicator will stop flashing.
You can now choose which type of sync signal the D-160 should follow, after you have set this
mode to On. Refer to next section “2-13. Slave Type Setting” for more details.
6. Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to go back to the normal time base display before
entering the SETUP mode.
154
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-13. Slave Mode Type Setting (“Slave Type?”)
If you have set the Slave Mode to ON in the previous section “2-12. Slave Mode Setting”,
you can choose what type of external sync signal that the D-160 synchronizes to.
This mode allows you to choose the external sync signal type.
* See Page "117" for MIDI synchronization for more details.
* Initial setting : Vari
* Available setting : Vari, SPDIF, adat, Free
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
sure you choose the right program before setting up this mode.
* Make
Make sure you choose the right sampling frequency before setting up this mode.
*
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Slave Type?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of the initial setting, it will show Vari.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, choose the setting you want.
If you choose “Vari”, the D-160 as a slave will only rely on the incoming MTC while synchronizing.
If you choose “SPDIF”, the D-160 will lock to the MTC first. Then, it will sync lock to the incoming
SPDIF digital signal.
If you choose “adat”, the D-160 will lock to the MTC first, Then, it will sync lock to the incoming
adat digital signal.
If you choose “Free”, the D-160 will freely play back on its own internal clock, after locking to the
MTC.
<Note>
You need to connect an external MTC whatever type of sync signal you have chosen.
5. Press EXECUTE/YES key after choosing the setting you want.
The display will then go back to step 2 described above.
<Note>
If you have chosen either “SPDIF” or “adat” as a sync signal, the “DIGITAL” indicator on the
display will light up provided the appropriate digital signal has been input. If the signal you
input is not suitable for the setting, the display will start flashing “DIGITAL” and “FS” indicator.
The FS means sampling frequency and it is only applicable to the SPDIF signal.
6. Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to go back to the normal time base display before
entering the SETUP mode.
* Press either the “STOP” button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
155
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
<Notes>
* The re-chase window of the D-160 is fixed at 10 frames. This means that when the time
difference(offset)between a master machine and the slave D-160 becomes larger than 10
frames, the D-160 will recognize it is out of chase lock and re-chase the position again. The D160 will mute its audio during the re-chasing process. However, if the difference between
two machines is less than 10 frames, the slave D160 will ignore the difference and run it as it
is.
* The digital signal used with the Slave Mode is solely for sync lock. If you want to record a
digital signal, follow the procedure as described in sections “2-15. Digital Input Track Setting”.
For your information, the digital signal you set with the “2-15. Digital Input Track Setting”
for recording will override and be prioritized over the external sync signal which you have
chosen this mode.
* The Vari Pitch function will be automatically OFF if you set the Slave Mode to ON.
* The D-160 will mute audio for about two seconds when it locks/unlocks the external sync
source if you have chosen the slave type to “SPDIF” or “adat”.
To avoid this problem, supply a reliable and stable digital source signal to the D-160.
2-14. Record Protect Setting (“Rec Protect?”)
The D-160 carries a record prohibit function.
This function works as if you had removed the Record Protect tag from a conventional
compact cassette tape. This mode allows you to choose either the ON or OFF function.
* Initial setting : Off
* Available setting : Off, On
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
* Make sure you choose the right program before setting up this mode.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Rec Protect?”.
The “?” display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will start flashing either “Off” or “On” of current setting.
In the case of the initial setting, it will display “Off”.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. Choose either On or Off with the JOG dial.
If you choose “Off”, there is no protection and you can record, paste, erase, etc. over it.
If you choose “On”, there is protection and you cannot record, paste, erase, etc. over it.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again to proceed.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit the SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key
so that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
<Note>
If you set this mode to record protect, the D-160 will not perform such functions as recording,
pasting or erasing. And it will show “Disable REC” on the display for one second as a warning
message. Change the protect mode setting to “OFF” in this situation.
156
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-15. Digital Input Track Setting (“Digi. In?”)
This mode sets up the incoming digital signal to assign the D-160 recording track you
have chosen. Using this function to digitally record from external digital equipment.
The SPDIF stereo digital signal can assign D-160 tracks from track 1 to track 16 according
to what pair you want.
In the case of adat digital signal input, this mode will assign 8 track adat signals to either
tracks 1 ~ 8 or 9 ~ 16. You need to set the D-160 sampling frequency to match the
incoming digital signal sampling frequency.
* Initial setting : L- - R- - (Nothing is assigned on Lch and Rch)
* Available setting : Lch = 1 ~ 16, adat, - -(No assign) Rch = 1 ~ 16, - - (No assign)
* This setting is commonly applicable to all the programs .
* This setting cannot be saved or loaded.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
<Notes>
* The D-160 has two sets of DATA INPUT connectors: 1-8 and 9-16.
In the case of adat, change over the connection depending on which group of tracks you
want to assign the digital signal to. In the case of SPDIF, the signal input can only be done
via the DATA INPUT 1-8 connector. Do not use the 9-16 connector. The input signal will be
applicable to all 16 tracks.
* The D-160 will mute audio for about two seconds when it locks/unlocks the external sync
source if you have chosen the slave type to “SPDIF” or “adat”. To avoid this, supply a
reliable and stable digital source signal to the D-160.
<Important>
* Again, remember that you need to set the D-160 sampling frequency to match the incoming
digital signal sampling frequency.
* The D-160 cannot record digitally if the D-160 sampling frequency is different from the
incoming SPDIF digital signal sampling frequency.
* In the case of the adat digital signal input, the D-160 will record the signal digitally but
with the incorrect speed. This is because, when the D-160 has been set up with this mode
ON, the D-160 will be working in the external word clock sync mode, i.e. incoming SPDIF or
adat signal clock timing runs the D-160 internal clock rather than the D-160's own internal
clock. In the case of the SPDIF signal, it contains the sampling frequency information in the
signal itself. So, the D-160 will recognize if the incoming sampling frequency is different
from the one set up in the D-160 and refuse to synchronize to it. However, an adat signal
does not contain this sampling frequency info as in the standard. The D-160 will ignore the
sampling frequency difference and synchronize with the incorrect rate and record at the
wrong speed.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Digi.In?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting. In the case of the
initial setting, it will show “L- - R- -”.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current assign setting on the Lch will start flash asking you to choose the setting you want.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
157
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
4-A. In the case of SPDIF signal input, enter whichever two tracks you want with the JOG dial.
Use either the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing Channel display between Lch
and Rch.
Available track settings are tracks 1 ~ 16 and “- -” which means no tracks are assigned.
<Note>
You cannot assign the same track to both Lch and Rch. If you accidentally do this, the later
setting will be effective and the D-160 will automatically cancel the previous track assignment
to “- -”, so that nothing is assigned there. The later setting will always be prioritized.
* The D-160 can also record only one channel from the stereo SPDIF signal.
For example, if you assign Lch to track 4 and Rch to NIL, “L04 R- -”, the D-160 will record
only SPDIF Lch on track 4.
4-B. For an adat digital signal, enter “adat” with the JOG dial after making the Lch flash with either
the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial.
You cannot choose “adat” when the Rch is flashing.
* The adat digital input signal will be assigned as DATA INPUT 1-8 to tracks 1 ~ 8 and
DATA INPUT 9-16 to tracks 9 ~ 16 accordingly.
* For analog input, you need to select nothing on either the Lch and Rch.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key to register the tracks you have chosen.
The display will go back to the display of item 2.
When the D-160 recognizes an incoming digital signal correctly, the red “digital” display will
stop flashing.
* If the red “DIGITAL” indication is flashing, check the connection and cable between D-160
and the external digital equipment.
<Notes>
* If you set up the wrong sampling frequency for the incoming SPDIF, the display will flash
either 44.1k or 48kHz on the FS indicator as a warning message.
* For adat signal input, there is no warning message indication. Be careful of the frequency
sampling setting.
6. Press the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to exit this mode.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode, or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
<Notes>
* Tracks assigned for digital input will become exclusively digital input only. Hence no
analog recording on those tracks is possible. If you want to use some D-160 tracks for
analog input, you have to select “- -” in both the Lch and the Rch or assign some other
tracks. In the “adat” setting, either tracks 1-8 or 9-16 will automatically be assigned for
digital input. So, the tracks which have not been assigned can still be used for analog
recording. For example, if you connect the adat signal to DATA INPUT 1-8, you can
record digital on tracks 1-8 and analog on tracks 9-16. The D-160 can manage digital/
analog 16 track simultaneous recording.
* Vari Pitch function will be automatically OFF ( No LED lights up), when you set up this
digital input mode.
* The input digital signal you choose in this mode will override the type of external sync
signal you might have chosen with “2-12. Slave Mode Setting” such as Vari, SPDIF, adat or
Free. Therefore, the D-160 will ignore the Slave Mode setting and the slave function will
become the sync lock synchronization with the chosen input digital signal in this mode.
158
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-16. Digital Out Track Setting (“Digi. out?”)
This mode sets up the outgoing digital signal from the D-160 with what type and which
recorded tracks. The D-160 can digitally transmit the recorded audio as it is to external
digital equipment. When you use this function, set the identical sampling frequency on
the external digital equipment as the D-160 sampling frequency.
* Initial setting : adat
* Available setting : adat, Lch 1 ~ 16, Rch 1 ~ 16
* This setting is commonly applicable to all programs.
* This setting cannot be saved or loaded.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
<Note>
S/P DIF output (1 ~ 16) will all be output from DATA OUTPUT 1-8.
DATA OUTPUT 9-16 is constantly fixed to "adat" output.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Digi.out?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of the initial setting, it will show “adat”.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start to flash which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4-A. If you want to choose an SPDIF digital signal, when the Lch display is flashing, choose the
track you want with the JOG dial.
Then, use the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to move to the Rch. Using the same method for
choosing the Lch, choose the track in the Rch.
If you choose normal numerical pairs such as “L01-R02”, “L03-R04”, ........“L13-R14”, “L15-R16”,
a two channel stereo signal will be transmitted in SPDIF digital audio format.
In this case, the odd channels will be directed to the Lch and even channels to the Rch accordingly.
<Note>
You cannot assign the same track to both Lch and Rch. If you accidentally do this, the Lch
setting will be effective and the D-160 will automatically cancel the Rch track assignment to “-” as nothing is assigned. For example, if you chose channel 02 for both Lch and Rch and
pressed the EXECUTE/YES key, the D-160 would automatically assign as “L02 - R- -”.
4-B. In the case that you want to choose an adat signal, when the Lch display is flashing, choose
“adat” with the JOG dial. As you cannot choose “adat” while the Rch display is flashing, use
the HOLD/> key or SHUTTLE dial to move to the Lch.
All 16 track signals will be transmitted in adat digital format.
* The adat digital output signal will be assigned as tracks 1 ~ 8 to DATA OUTPUT 1-8 and
tracks 9 ~ 16 to DATA OUTPUT 9-16 accordingly.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key to register the tracks you have chosen.
The display will go back to the display of Item 2.
6. Press the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to come out of this mode.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
159
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
* All the analog output tracks are available regardless of the above settings.
2-17. Bar/Beat Resolution Mode Setting (“ Resolution?”)
This mode sets up the display resolution mode in either “ON” or “OFF”.
If you set this mode to “ON”, the D-160 will register the memory points rounding up or
down so that clock digits are always kept at 00. This mode is only relevant when you
choose Bar/Beat/Clock as a time base.
This function is very useful for edit functions such as copy paste or move paste when you
use the Bar/Beat/Clock as the time base. For example, when you register a memory point
that picks up a real time in play mode, you press the STORE button and then some
memory keys. The position you choose will be automatically corrected based on the Bar/
Beat resolution. The position will always register in clock accuracy. This setting is
memorized even when the power is off.
* For example, if you are to register 001 Bar 1 Beat 46 Clock to the CLIP BOARD IN point and
002 Bar 4 Beat 51 Clock to the CLIP BOARD OUT point, if the resolution mode is set, the actual
memory will be corrected in the following key. This example is mentioned based on the time
signature of a 4/4 Beat.
001 Bar 1 Beat 46 Clock -> 001 Bar 1 Beat 00 Clock : round down on clock
002 Bar 4 Beat 51 Clock -> 003 Bar 1 Beat 00 Clock : round up on clock
* Initial setting : Off
* Available setting : Off, On
* This setting is commonly applicable to all the programs.
* This setting cannot be saved or loaded.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display stops flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “ Resolution?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting. In the case of the
initial setting, it will show “Off”.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, choose either “On” or “Off”.
If you choose “Off”, the slave function will not work.
If you choose “On”, the clock will be rounded up or down always ending in 00.
5. Press EXECUTE/YES key after choosing the setting you want.
The display will go back to the display of item 2.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to the
normal time base display.
160
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-18. MIDI Device ID Setting (“Device ID?”)
This mode sets up the MIDI device ID number on the D-160.
The set ID applies to both receiving and transmitting when an external sequence software
controls the D-160 via MMC or the Fostex system Exclusive Message.
This mode is necessary to arm the slave machine record track selectors from the master
machine. The available device ID is between 00 and 99. But, if the D-160 receives a
message with ID No 7F, The D-160 will recognize it and follow the command regardless of
the device ID setting.
* Initial setting : 00
* Available setting : 00 ~ 99
* This setting is applicable to all programs.
* This setting cannot be saved or loaded.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Device ID?”.
The “?” display will start flashing.
The display will also show the current setting. In the case of the initial setting, it will show “00”.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing “**” which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, enter a required ID number.
The available setting is from 00 ~ 99.
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again.
The setting will be registered and the display will go back to step 2.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either
key so that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually
return to the normal time base display.
161
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-19. Sampling Frequency Setting (“Sample Rate?”)
The D-160 can handle two types of sampling frequency, either 44.1k or 48 kHz.
This mode allows you to set either sampling frequency. The display will show the registered
sampling frequency.
* Initial setting : 44.1kHz
* Available setting : 44.1kHz, 48kHz
* This setting is applicable song by song.
* This setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data.
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display.
Then, press the EXECUTE/YES key. The SETUP display stops flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Sample Rate?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting. In the case of the
initial setting, it will show “44.1”.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, choose either “44.1” or “48” .
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key to process.
The setting will be registered and the display will go back to step 2. Or If you are not changing
the sampling frequency, press the EXIT/NO key or STOP button to quit the SETUP mode.
6. Press the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to come out of this mode.
The display will go back to the normal time base display.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
<Notes>
* The total recording length will be shorter with 48kHz sampling than 44.1kHz sampling due
to the hard disk space usage. The REMAIN time display will be shorter with 48kHz than
44.1kHz as well.
* Except for certain special use, avoid changing the sampling frequency within a program .
It is possible to set the D-160 to a different sampling frequency than its original song
recording frequency. However, the play back speed will become different from the original
and the registered memory key data will become a different value.
162
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-20. Event Number Check on Each Track (“NOs Of Event?”)
This mode allows you to check event numbers on each recorded track individually.
As we have described in the “Before Operation” section, each recorded track data (TRK 1
~ 24) on a program is made up with the Audio Files and 0 Files.
The event number is calculated by adding these two types of Files.
The D-160 is able to carry up to 512 events per track. When the event numbers exceed
508, the D-160 will no longer be able to record new data. This situation is called “event
over”.
For an ordinary song length, about 6 minutes, however intense the editing process is,
you should never experience an event over problem.
This is because the D-160 automatically tries to optimize the disk management system as
much as possible so that the event numbers are always kept minimum.
However, you need to be careful in certain circumstances as:
* when recording short lengths of audio bit by bit in many separate places.
* when taking advantage of a D-160 feature in which you can record wherever
you like within the 24 hours in ABS.
* when doing lot of editing on a very long mono track recording.
This mode is especially useful to check the data stored in the virtual tracks as the data
transferred to virtual tracks cannot be seen.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “NOs Of Event?”.
The “?” display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show the actual event number of track one.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
Displayed a current
Event Number
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. By turning the JOG dial, the display will show the track numbers one after the other so that you
can check the event number on each track.
5. Press the EXIT/NO key or STOP button to quit the SETUP mode.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
* For details on audio files and events, refer to "2. Audio File and Event" in "Before operating."
163
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-21. Current Drive Setting (“Drive Sel.?”)
The “Current Drive” here means the medium drive device, either the internal IDE or SCSI,
to be used in real time recording or playing back.
For example, you need to set this mode to “SCSI” if you want to directly record data on to
the external SCSI device at real time or enter a title in the song number/back up number
on the SCSI device.
This mode allows you to choose the current drive from either the internal IDE hard disk
which is installed in the D-160, or a SCSI device which is externally connected.
If you choose the SCSI device whose medium has not been formatted, the D-160 will
automatically recognize it as an “unformatted medium” and move on to the “Disk Format?”
menu in the SETUP mode.
Then, after completing the format process, the “SCSI” will be chosen as the current drive.
* Initial setting : IDE (internal hard disk)
* Available setting : IDE, SCSI
* The setting will go back to “IDE” when you turn the power to off.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Drive Sel.?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
In the case of the initial setting, it will show “IDE”.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, choose either “IDE” or “SCSI” you want.
5. Press EXECUTE/YES key after choosing the setting you want.
The display will go back to the display of item 2.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key so
that you can correct the setting, choose some other SETUP mode or eventually return to
the normal time base display.
<Notes>
* When you are to choose “SCSI” as the current drive, the display will show “Initializing ....”
then, “No SCSI Device!” and go back to the display of Item 2 if the power of the externally
connected SCSI device is not turned ON, or if it is not connected properly. Similarly, the
display will show “No Disk!” if the SCSI device does not have a medium inserted correctly.
* To eject the medium from the SCSI device, press the EXIT/NO key while holding down the
STOP button with the normal time base display.
164
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-22. Loading Song Data (“Load PGM?”)
Prior to loading externally saved song data back on to the D-160 internal hard disk drive,
this mode allows you to choose which DAT, adat or SCSI port will be used.
* See page "102" “Saving/Loading Song Data” for details of Loading Song Data.
* Available setting : adat, DAT, SCSI
* Available program : P1 ~ P99 or ALL (In the case of SCSI only)
* You can load one program or all the programs (in the case of SCSI only).
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display.
Then, press the EXECUTE/YES key. The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Load PGM?”.
The “?” display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “LOAD”.
The display will also show the current setting. In the case of initial setting, it will show “DAT”.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LOAD
4. With the JOG dial, choose which type digital signal you want to use to load song data.
If you choose “adat”, the song data will be loaded via adat digital signal.
If you choose “DAT”, the song data will be loaded via SPDIF digital signal.
If you choose “SCSI”, the song data will be loaded via SCSI.
Load from “DAT”
5-a. Choose DAT with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “LOAD” and be flashing “SURE?”. The display will also start flashing the
currently chosen load target program number on the internal hard disk drive, which you are
loading the song data back on to.
6-a. With the JOG dial, choose the program number onto which you want to load on to.
You can choose any program available on the internal IDE drive to load song data on to.
If you want to load the data onto a new program rather than the program already available,
choose “New PGM” at this stage.
7-a. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. The display will show “LOAD” .
The display will also start to show the menu from which you can choose the tracks you want to
load on to. Choose the setting with the JOG dial.
The available loading track settings are ;
1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 9-16, 9-24, 17-24. We recommend you choose the loading tracks in the same
way as when you saved the data.
8-a. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the tracks you want.
The display will start flashing “SURE?”.
9-a. Press the EXECUTE/ YES key once again.
The display will show “Play DAT!”. This means the D-160 is asking you to start playing back the
DAT machine connected to the D-160, which has a tape recorded with the song data.
10-a. Start playing back the DAT.
The display will start showing “REMAIN”.
In few seconds, the D-160 will recognizes the pilot signal from the DAT. The display will then
start showing the program number you are loading the data to and the count down time display
indicating how long the load process is going take. The D-160 has now started loading the data.
The actual load process starts at the moment the display starts showing the count down time.
Loading from DAT is done via using a pair of stereo signals one after the other, e.g. 1-2 then 3-4
then....23-24. While loading, the D-160 will display track 1 and 2 indicators flashing with their
level meters moving.
165
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
11-a. When the D-160 has successfully loaded song data, “COMPLETED!” will be displayed.
Press the EXIT/NO key to cancel the message and return to the normal time base display.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key.
If you press these keys after you have started the loading process at Item 10, only the data
that has already been loaded will be effective.
The data that has not been loaded yet will be void.
Load from “adat”
5-b. Choose “adat” with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “LOAD” and flashing “SURE?”. The display will also start to flash the
currently chosen load target program number on the internal hard disk drive, which you are
loading the song data back to.
6-b. With the JOG dial, choose the program number which you want to load on on to.
You can choose any program available on the internal IDE drive to load song data to.
If you want to load the data onto a new program rather than the program already available,
choose “New PGM” at this stage.
7-b. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. The display will show “LOAD” .
The display will also start showing the menu from which you can choose the tracks you want to
load on to. Choose the setting with the JOG dial.
The available loading track settings are ;
1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 9-16, 9-24, 17-24. We recommend you should choose the loading tracks in the
same way as when you saved the data.
8-b. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the tracks you want.
The display will start flashing “SURE?”.
9-b. Press the EXECUTE/ YES key once again.
The display will show “Play adat!”. This means the D-160 is asking you to start playing back the
adat machine connected to the D-160, which has a tape recorded with the song data.
10-b. Start playing back the adat.
The display will show “REMAIN”. For your information, you need to set the clock source of the
adat unit as INTERNAL when you play back the tape.
In a few seconds, the D-160 recognizes the pilot signal from the adat.
The display will then start showing the program number to loading to and the counting down
time display indicating how long the load process is going take. The D-160 has now started
loading the data. The actual load process is start at the moment the display starts showing
count down time.
Loading from adat is done via using an 8 track adat signal one after the other, e.g. 1-8 then 9-16
then 16-24. While loading, the D-160 will display track 1-8 indicators flashing with their level
meters moving.
11-b. When the D-160 has successfully loaded song data, “COMPLETED!” will be displayed.
Press the EXIT/NO key to cancel the message and return to the normal time base display.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key.
If you press these keys after you have started loading process at Item 10, only the data that
has been loaded will be effective. The data that has not been loaded yet will be void.
Load from “SCSI” (Song Data Load)
5-c. Choose “SCSI” with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “LOAD”. The display will also start to flash the currently chosen load
source song number saved on the SCSI drive, which you are loading the data from.
6-c. With the JOG dial, choose a song number you want to load.
You can choose any ONE or ALL of the programs (songs) available in the external SCSI drive to
load the data from.
7-c. Choose the song number with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “LOAD” and flash “SURE?”. The display will also start to flash the
currently chosen load target program number on the internal hard disk drive.
166
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
With the JOG dial, choose a program which you want to load the song data back on to. If you
choose a program which has no data, the display will show “0MB”. If you want to load the
data onto a new program rather than to the program already available, choose “New PGM”.
8-c. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the program number.
The D-160 will start loading the song data you have chosen in 6-c to the program number you
have chosen in 7-c.
When the D-160 has successfully loaded song data, “COMPLETED!” will be displayed.
Press the EXIT/NO key to cancel the message and return to the normal time base display.
Warning
Be careful that If you choose “ALL” in the loading song/program options and start
loading the data, all the prerecorded material stored in the internal hard disk will
be erased even though you have set the “Rec Protect” mode to ON in the SETUP
mode.
Load from “SCSI” (Back Up Data Load)
The example described here is loading back up data “B01” which is saved on to two SCSI
disks. Let’s assume the first disk (DISK 1) has already been inserted in the SCSI device.
5-d. Choose “SCSI” with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “LOAD”.
The D-160 will also show “B01[Title] D1” on the display, which means;
B01(flashing)
: back up number currently chosen on the loading source
D1
: disk number 1
6-d. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again.
The display will start flashing “SURE?”.
The display will also start flashing the currently chosen load target program number on the
internal hard disk drive. With the JOG dial, choose a program which you want to load the song
data back on to. If you choose a program which has no data, the display will also show “0MB”.
If you want to load the data to a new program rather than to the program already available,
choose “New PGM” at this stage.
7-d. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the program number.
The D-160 will start loading the back up data “B01” onto the program number you chose in 6-d.
When finishing loading data from the first disk, the D-160 will show “Insert Disk 2” and eject Disk
1 automatically.
8-d. Insert the second disk in the SCSI device.
The D-160 will automatically start loading from the second disk.
When the D-160 has successfully loaded the song data, “COMPLETED!” will be displayed.
Press the EXIT/NO key to cancel the message and return to the normal time base display.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key.
If you press these keys after you have started the loading process, only the data that has
already been loaded will be effective. The data that has not yet been loaded will be invalid.
167
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
2-23. Saving Song Data (“Save PGM?”)
Prior to saving song data onto the externally connected device, this mode allows you to
choose which DAT, adat or SCSI port will be used.
* See page "102" “Saving/Loading Song Data” for details of saving Song Data.
* Available setting : adat, DAT, SCSI
* Available program : P1 ~ P99 or ALL (In the case of SCSI only)
* You can load one program or all the programs (in the case of SCSI only).
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display. Then, press the
EXECUTE/YES key.
The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Save PGM?”.
The “?” display will start flashing.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “SAVE”. The display will also show the current setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SAVE
4. With the JOG dial, choose which type digital signal you want to use to save song data.
If you choose “adat”, the song data will be saved via adat digital signal.
If you choose “DAT”, the song data will be saved via SPDIF digital signal.
If you choose “SCSI”, the song data will be saved via SCSI.
Save to “DAT”
5-a. Choose “DAT” with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “SAVE”. The display will also start flashing the current program number
on the internal hard disk drive, which you are saving the song data from.
6-a. With the JOG dial, choose the program number which you want to save.
You can choose any program available in the internal IDE drive to save the song data.
7-a. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the program.
The display will show “SAVE”. The display will also show the recorded program length “Length?
**m**s”. This length is limited up to 59 minutes 59 seconds.
If you want to save the full length of the recorded data, follow the procedure below.
However, you can also edit the song length to be saved, which means either increasing or decreasing
it, at this stage.
8-a. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again. The display will show “SAVE”.
The display will also start to show the menu from which you can choose the tracks that you want
to save. Choose the setting with the JOG dial.
Available loading track settings are ;
1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 9-16, 9-24, 17-24.
9-a.Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the tracks you want.
The display will start flashing “SURE?”.
The display will also show “Rec Start DAT!”. This means the D-160 is asking you to start recording
onto the DAT machine connected to the D-160, which has a tape you will record the song data on
to.
10-a. Start recording DAT first then press the EXECUTE/YES key afterwards.
The display will start showing “REMAIN”.
In few seconds, the display will start showing the count down time display indicating how long
the save process is going take. The D-160 has now started saving the data.
The actual save process starts at the moment the display starts showing the count down time.
Saving to DAT is done via using a pair of stereo signals one after the other, e.g. 1-2 then 3-4
then....23-24.
168
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
11-a. When the D-160 has finished saving the song data, it will display “COMPLETED!” and then
return to the normal time base display.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key.
If you press these keys after you have started the saving process in 8, only the data that
has already been saved will be effective. The data that has not been saved yet will be invalid.
Save to “adat”
5-b. Choose “adat” with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “SAVE”. The display will also start flashing the current program number
on the internal hard disk drive, which you are saving the song data from.
6-b. With the JOG dial, choose the program number which you want to save.
You can choose any program available on the internal IDE drive to save the song data.
7-b. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the program.
The display will show “SAVE”. The display will also show the recorded program length “Length?
**m**s”. This length is limited up to 59 minutes 59 seconds.
If you want to save the full length of the recorded data, follow the procedure below. However,
you can also edit the song length to be saved, which means either increasing or decreasing it, at
this stage.
8-b. Press the EXECUTE/YES key once again. The display will show “SAVE”.
The display will also start showing the menu from which you can choose the tracks you want to
save. Choose the setting with the JOG dial. Available loading track settings are ;
1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 9-16, 9-24, 17-24.
9-b. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the tracks you want.
The display will start flashing “SURE?”.
The display will also show “Rec Start adat!”. This means the D-160 is asking you to start recording
onto the adat machine connected to the D-160, which has a tape you will record with the song
data.
10-b. Start recording adat first then press the EXECUTE/YES key afterwards.
The display will start showing “REMAIN”.
In a few seconds, the display will start showing the count down time display indicating how
long the save process is going take. The D-160 has now started saving the data.
The actual save process starts at the moment the display starts showing the count down time.
Saving to adat is done via using an 8 track signal one after the other, e.g. 1-8 then 9-16 then1724.
11-b. When the D-160 has finished saving song data, it will display “COMPLETED!” and then return
to the normal time base display.
* Press either the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to return from the second step menu to the
first or to quit SETUP mode. The menu will go backwards each time you press either key.
If you press these keys after you have started the saving process in 10, only the data that
has already been saved will be effective. The data that has not been saved yet will be invalid.
Save to “SCSI” (Program by Program)
5-c. Choose “SCSI” with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “SAVE”. The display will also start flashing the current program number
on the internal hard disk drive, which you are saving the song data from, e.g. “P02[Title]”.
6-c. With the JOG dial, choose the program number which you want to save.
You can choose any program available in the internal IDE drive on which to save the song
data. (See next section if you want to save ALL the programs at once .)
As far as saving is concerned, there are two types of program available:
One is a type of program whose data can fit on only one disk and another is one that requires
more than two disks. The display will appear as follow.
* A program that displays only the program number. This type of program can be saved on one
disk, e.g. “P02 [Title]”.
169
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
* A program that displays the program number and the indicator “*D” after the program number.
This type of program requires more than two disks to save, e.g. “P03[Title]2D”. “2D” means it
needs two disks to save.
7-c. Press the EXECUTE/YES key after you have chosen the program you want. The display will
show “SAVE”.
* If you choose the program that can be saved using one disk only:
The display will show the current song number (S**) and its available memory size on the SCSI
disk, e.g. “S01[Title]0MB” with “SURE?” flashing.
This means you are saving song data whose number is 01 onto a SCSI disk which has 0MB, i.e.
nothing stored. Press the EXECUTE/YES key to proceed.
* If you choose the program that requires more than two disks to save:
The saving will start immediately after you have pressed the EXECUTE/YES key. For example, if
you choose the program containing “P01[Title]2D”, the display will show “P01>>B01-***MB”.
Then, by the time saving is in progress, “-***MB” will be counting down.
The “B01” here means that the data which is being saved to the SCSI device is so called back up
data and the allocated number as “01”.
When finishing saving data to the first disk, the D-160 will show “Insert Disk 2” and eject Disk 1
automatically.
When you insert the second disk in the SCSI device, the D-160 will continue saving the remaining
data with the same back up number.
When the D-160 has successfully saved song data, “COMPLETED!” will be displayed. Press the
EXIT/NO key to cancel the message and return to the normal time base display.
<Notes>
* Unlike saving to DAT or adat, saving song data to SCSI cannot stop in the middle of
saving.
* If you want to change the title of the song data you are saving to SCSI, use “2-20. Drive
Sel?” to switch over the current drive to “SCSI” and proceed with “2-4. Title Edit?” in the
SETUP mode.
* When you are choosing “Save All” or saving song data on more than two disks on the
SCSI device, if you try to save on a disk which already has some data recorded, the D-160
will ask you whether you want the D-160 to erase all the data completely, e.g. the display
will show “B01[Title]DEL” or “S01[Title]DEL” with “SURE ?” flashing.
Press the EXECUTE/YES key if you don’t mind the disk being overwritten. But, if you do,
press the EXIT/NO key or STOP button to quit the mode and insert the correct disk.
To eject the disk, press the EXIT/NO key while holding down the STOP button.
Save to “SCSI” (Save All)
5-d. Choose “SCSI” with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The display will show “SAVE”. The display will also start flashing the current program number
on the internal hard disk drive, which you are saving the song data from, e.g. “P02[Title]”.
6-d. With the JOG dial, choose “Save All”.
The display will show “Save All? (**/**)”, which indicates the numbers of programs you are
saving and the numbers of programs that the current SCSI disk can save. For example, if the
display shows “03/03”, this means that there are a total of three programs to be saved and all
three programs can be saved to the current disk. However, if the display shows “01/03”, this
means that there are a total of three programs to be saved but only one program can be saved.
Or if the display shows “00/03”, none of the available programs can be saved due to the shortage
of SCSI disk space. In this last case, even though you press the EXECUTE/YES key to try to save the
song data, the D-160 cannot proceed with saving and will display “Void Command!” as a warning
message.
Basically, it is not possible to use more than two disks for saving the data with the “Save All”
option, unlike the “Program by Program” option described in the previous section. Therefore,
you have to find a large enough disk or try to save the data program by program.
7-d. Press the EXECUTE/YES key. The display will show “SAVE”.
The data which is being saved is called Song Data with the “Save All” option rather than back up
data with the “Program by Program” option.
170
D-160 Owner's manual (SETUP mode)
So, P1 in the internal IDE drive will be saved as S1, P2 as S2, etc. All the programs will be saved in
the same way.
When the D-160 has finished saving song data, it will display “COMPLETED!” and then return to
the normal time base display.
2-24. Formatting IDE/SCSI disk (“Disk Format?”)
When you format or initialize the internal hard disk or externally connected SCSI device,
use this “Disk Format?” menu. If the formatting has been completed, all the recorded
song data will be wiped off completely and the hard disk setting will go back to the initial
factory setting. You need to format a brand new IDE hard disk or SCSI disk before you
start using them.
* See page "39" for details of the Removable Hard disk Cartridge and the replacing Hard disk.
* See page "108" for details of the Handling SCSI disk.
1. Press the DISP SEL key and choose the flashing SETUP mode on the display.
Then, press the EXECUTE/YES key. The SETUP display will stop flashing.
2. With the JOG dial, choose “Disk Format?”.
The “?” display will start flashing. The display will also show the current setting.
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it is ready to change setting.
SETUP
OL
0
3
6
9
12
18
24
30
42
FORMAT
44.1kHz
∞
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4. With the JOG dial, choose the “IDE” or “SCSI” you want.
5. Press EXECUTE/YES key after choosing the setting you want.
The display will show the drive you have chosen. Also, the D-160 will ask you whether you want
to proceed with formatting by displaying the message “SURE?”.
* If you want to cancel the format, press the EXIT/NO key at this stage. If you proceed with
the operation described in step 6 below, you will not be able to stop formatting.
6. If you really want to format, press the EXECUTE/YES key.
If you have chosen “IDE”, the format process will start immediately. The display will start showing
“REMAIN” and the count down memory space display (MB) indicating how long the formatting
process is going take.
Warning
Once the formatting starts, there is no way to stop it. Even the EXIT/NO key or STOP
button won’t help you! If you don’t want to lose the recorded data, never press the
EXECUTE/YES key at this stage.
If you have chosen “SCSI”, the formatting process will still not start. But instead, the display will
show the Format Type which the D-160 has automatically measured on the externally connected
SCSI device.
We recommend you format the disk with this Format Type. However, you can also change the
Format Type with the JOG dial at this stage.
Press the EXECUTE/ YES key after you have chosen the Format type you want.
Now the format process on the SCSI will start.
7. When the format finishes, the display will show “COMPLETED!” in either case.
8. Press the STOP button or EXIT/NO key to quit the SETUP mode and return to the normal time
base display.
171
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
(
Digital Multitrack Recorder
Model D-160
Function................
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
Mode
Default
Message
Altered
Note
Number :
)
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Date:
Version : V1.00
Remarks
***********************
True voice
Velocity
Note ON
Note OFF
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change :
True #
System Exclusive
System
***********************
(rem. 1)
(rem. 2)
: Clock
Real Time : Commands
(rem. 3)
: Local ON/OFF
Aux.
Mes-
: All Notes OFF
sag
: Active Sense
: Reset
Notes
rem. 1: MMC (Device ID=00 ~ 99, 127), MTC, Identity reply, FOSTEX Exclusive
rem. 2: MMC (Device ID=00 ~ 99, 127), MTC, Inquiry, FOSTEX Exclusive
rem. 3: START, STOP, CONTINUE
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
: Yes
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
: No
172
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
MMC Command List
Command List
Movement (Recorder)
01: STOP
STOP
02: PLAY
03: DEFERRED PLAY
PLAY
DEFERRED PLAY
04: FAST FORWARD
05: REWIND
F FWD
REWIND
06: RECORD STROBE
07: RECORD EXIT
REC
PUNCH OUT
09: PAUSE
40: WRITE
STOP
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
41: MASKED WRITE
42: READ
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
44: LOCATE
46: SEARCH
LOCATE to Setting Data
CUE/REVIEW (±1~60 times)
47: SHUTTLE
4C: MOVE
CUE/REVIEW (±1~60 times)
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
4D: ADD
4E: SUBTRACT
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
MMC Response/Information Field List
Command
01: SELECTED TIME CODE
03: REQUESTED OFFSET
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
READ/WRITE
04: ACTUAL OFFSET
08: GP0
READ
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
09: GP1
0A: GP2
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0B: GP3
0C: GP4
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0D: GP5
0E: GP6
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0F: GP7
48: MOTION CONTROL TALLY
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
READ
4C: RECORD MODE
4E: TRACK RECORD STATUS
READ/WRITE
READ
4F: TRACK RECORD READY
51: RECORD MONITOR
READ/WRITE/MASKED WRITE
READ/WRITE
Inquiry Message List
IDENTITY REQUEST : F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7
IDENTITY REPLY : F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 0C, 00, **, **, **, **, F7
51: Fostex ID
01, 00 : Device family code
0C, 00 : Device family number D-160
**, **, **, ** : Software version
173
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Fostex MIDI System Exclusive Message Format for D-160
<Note>
Following protocol is effective only in equipment which will reply by Identity Reply=F0 7E<channel>06 02 51 01 00 0C 00 01 ** ** ** F7 (D-160)
against the Inquiry Message=F0 7E<channel>06 01.
Fostex System Exclusive Message
General Structure=F0 51<device id><sub id 1>(<data>)F7
* Numbers are all expressed in hexadecimal units.
Table: <sub id 1> (<data>)
Command or Model Set
Controller to D-160
Acknowledge or Status
D-160 to Controller
Loop on/off
Post locate
Auto rec
Lock enable
Lock mode
Copy clip
12 22 (<on/off>)
12 28 (<post locate mode>)
12 2D (<on/off>)
12 41 (<lock enable>)
12 42 (<lock mode>)
12 45 (<count><mmc track>)
12 46 (<count=01><repeat count>)
Copy paste
or
12 46 (<count><repeat count><mmc track>)
Erase
12 47 (<count><mmc track>)
Clipboard play
12 49
Undo
12 4A
Redo
12 4B
Move clip
12 4D (<count><mmc track>)
12 4E (<count=01><repeat count>)
Move paste
or
12 4E (<count><repeat count><mmc track>)
Track exchange
12 4F (<channel><channel>)
All erase current PGM 12 50
Product new PGM 13 3E
Delete current PGM 13 3F
Digital in ch.
13 41 (<channel><channel>)
13 41 (<channel=7F><count=0>)
Adat in
or
13 41 (<channel=7F><count><mmc track>)
Digital out ch.
13 42 (<channel><channel>) * Refer to Note.
Adat out
13 42 (<channel=7F><channel=0>)
Program change
13 43 (<program>)
Click on/off
13 44 (<on/off>)
Resolution on/off 13 46 (<on/off>)
Midi Sync out
13 47 (<nidi sync>)
MTC offset mode
13 48 (<MTC offset mode>)
13 49 (<count=3><on/off><vari data>)
Vari pitch
or
13 49 (<count=1><on/off>)
Signature set
14 01 (<signature map>)
Tempo set
14 02 (<tempo set map>)
Tempo map all erase14 03
Preroll time set
14 04 (<mmc time>)
Frame rate set
14 06 (<frame rate>)
Fs rate set
14 07 (<fs rate>)
Time base set
14 08 (<time base>)
174
32 2D (<edit message>)
32 45 (<edit message>)
32 46 (<edit message>)
32
32
32
32
32
47 (<edit message>)
49 (<edit message><count><mmc track>)
4A (<edit message>)
4B (<edit message>)
4D (<edit message>)
32 4E (<edit message>)
32
32
33
33
4F (<edit message>)
50 (<edit message>)
3E (<edit message>)
3F (<edit message>)
34 00 (<edit message>)
34 00 (<edit message>)
34 00 (<edit message>)
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Status Request
Status request command
Controller to D-160
Loop op. status
Loop status
Post locate status
Auto rec status
Lock status
Lock mode status
Copy clip status
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
Status reply
D-160 to controller
21
22
28
2D
41
42
45
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Copy paste status 22 46
or
32
32
Erase status
22 47
or
32
Move clip status
22 4D
32
32
Move paste status 22 4E
or
32
Digital in ch. st.
23 41
33
Adat in status
23 41
33
Digital out ch. st.
23 42
33
Adat out status
23 42
33
Program status
23 43
33
Click status
23 44
33
Level status
23 45
33
resolution status
23 46
33
midi sync out status23 47
33
MTC offset mode status 23 48
33
vari pitch status
23 49
33
signature map req. 24 01 (<event number>) 34
tempo set map req. 24 02 (<event number>) 34
preroll time req.
24 04
34
remain time req.
24 05
34
frame rate status
24 06
34
fs rate status
24 07
34
time base status
24 08
34
21 (<Loop op. mode = 12>)
22 (<on/off>)
28 (<post locate status>)
2D (<edit message>)
41 (<lock status>)
42 (<lock mode>)
45 (<edit message=01 or =14>)
46 (<edit message=02><mmc time>)
46 (<edit message=00>)
47 (<edit message=02><mmc time>)
47 (edit message=00>)
4D (<edit message=01 or =14>)
4E (<edit message=02><mmc time>)
4E (<edit message=00>)
41 (<channel><channel>)
41 (<channel=7F><count><mmc track>)
42 (<channel><channel>)
42 (<channel=7F><channel=0>)
43 (<program>)
44 (<on/off>)
45 (<count=10><level data>)
46 (<on/off>)
47 (<midi sync>)
48 (<MTC offset mode>)
49 (<count=3><on/off><vari data>)
01 (<signature map>)
02 (<tempo set map>)
04 (<mmc time>)
05 (<mmc time>)
06 (<frame rate>)
07 (<fs rate>)
08 (<time base>)
<Note>
There is a limitation on specifying the <channel><channel> setting. For details,
refer to "Explanation on Command/Mode Set" mentioned in later pages.
175
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
<Allocation of GP0~GP7>
Edit point memory of this equipment is alloted to the response/information field
of 08~0F (GP0~GP7) as shown below.
GP7 however, will be used as the work memory for small adjusting of the
registered figure (Refer to Examples 4 and 5).
<Response/Information Field>
08 GP0 : locate memory
0A GP2 : clipboard out memory
0C GP4 : auto punch in memory
0E GP6 : end memory
09 GP1 : clipboard in memory
0B GP3 : start memory
0D GP5 : auto punch out memory
0F GP7 : work memory
[Example 1] <mmc time> is registered in the start memory (using the write command).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <write = 40> <count> <GP3 = 0B> <mmc time> F7
[Example 2] Locate memory is recalled (using the read command).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <read = 42> <count> <GP3 = 08> <mmc time> F7
[Example 3] On-the-fly registering in the punch in memory (using the move command).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <move = 4C> <count> <destination = 0C (GP4) > <source =
selected time code = 01> F7
[Example 4] When + 1 frame is to be set in the punch in memory (using the add
command).
* Time figure to be added is pre-registered in GP7 (Set 00h 00m 00s 01f in GP7).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <add = 4D> <count> <destination = 0C (GP4)> <source #1 = 01
(GP4)> <source #2 = 0F (GP7)> F7
[Example 5] When -1 frame is to be set in the punch in memory (using the subtract
command).
* Time figure to be subtracted is pre-registered in GP7 (Set 00h 00m 00s 01f in
GP7).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <substract = 4E> <count> <destination = 0C (GP4)>
<source#1 = 0C (GP4)> <source #2 = 0F (GP7)>F7
176
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Data Type
<loop op.mode>
<post locate mode>
<count>
<mmc track>
<edit message>
<mmc time>
<on/off>
<repeat count>
<channel>
<lock enable>
<lock status>
<program>
<lock mode>
12=stop
Indicates the next operating mode following locating to the start point (GP1) upon
arriving at the end point (GP6) by the play mode.
In D-160, 12=stop only is effective.
12=stop
15=play
Specifies operating mode in which D-160 should enter upon completing the
locate operation. Corresponds to the setting of AUTO PLAY ON ("15")/OFF ("12") on
the main unit.
01~7F
Specifies succeeding data byte numbers.
Complies to the MMC (MIDI MACHINE CONTROL) standard track bit map.
In D-160, you always need to specify three byte combinations of "r0", "r1" and "r2."
00 = no message
01 = completed (completion flag)
02 = active (execution flag)
02<mmc time> = Indicates unprocessed time by active (execution flag) and <mmc
time>.
02<count><mmc track> = Indicates source track by active (execution flag) and
<mmc track>. Used for clipboard play.
03 = cancel (execution stop)
05 = Indicates rehearsal (rehearsal mode of auto rec). Possible of undo.
06 = Indicates take (take mode of auto rec). Possible of undo.
10 = over value error
10 <mmc time> = Capacity shortage time is indicated by over value error (error by
capacity shortage) and <mmc time>. In copy paste, it indicates capacity shortage
time required for a minimum one time paste.
11 = Indicates in point error (incorrect in point).
12 = Indicates out point error (incorrect out point).
14 = Indicates void data (data necessary for paste does not exist).
18 = Indicates track select error (track necessary to execute copy/move or erase/cut
is not correctly setup).
19<repeat count> = Indicates repeat number error and repeat numbers executable
by <repeat count>.
1A = Indicates disable rec (record disable mode).
71 = Indicates on.
72 = Indicates off.
hr mn sc fr {ff/st} complies to the MMC standard time code.
70 = default
71 = on
72 = off
01~7F
Especially when executing commands such as paste, the number of pasting times to
be continuously repeated following the auto punch in point is specified.
1~18, 7F
Select recorder tracks 1~18. "00" in particular, is not specified (default setting). "7F"
indicates input/output of Adat optical. For details, refer to explanation on setting
the Command/Mode.
00 = lock disable, chase disable
01 = lock enable, chase enable
Corresponds to SLAVE ON ("01")/OFF ("00") in the main unit.
00 = lock disable, chase disable
01 = lock enable (unlocked), chase enable (unlocked)
11 = lock enable (locked), chase enable (locked)
01~63H
Indicates program numbers (P1~P99) on the main unit. However, D-160 can specify
only 01 (corresponds to P1)~63H (corresponds to P99).
40 = Free
42 = Vari
45 = SP DIF
46 = adat
Indicates the slave mode when this equipment is set to slave ON.
177
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
<signature map>
<tempo set map>
<event number>
<midi sync>
<vari data>
<frame rate>
<fs rate>
<MTC offset mode>
<time base>
<level data>
bar2, bar1, bar0, sign, sigd
bar2: The 100th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar1: The 10th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar0: The 1 digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
sign: Numerator of the signature to be set is expressed in BCD.
sigd: Denominator of the signature to be set is expressed in BCD.
When specified as sign=00 and sigd=00, signature data of that bar position will be
deleted. Also, bar2=bar1=bar0=sign=sigd=00 indicates "no corresponding data"
(such as when a figure specified by <event number> do not exist at receiving the
signature map request).
bar2, bar1, bar0, beat, tmp2, tmp1, tmp0
bar2: The 100th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar1: The 10th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar0: The 1 digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
beat: The beat figure is expressed in BCD.
tmp2: Numerator of the tempo to be set is expressed in BCD.
tmp1: Denominator of the tempo to be set is expressed in BCD.
tmp0: The 1 digit of the tempo is expressed in BCD.
When specified as tmp2=tmp1=tmp0=00, tempo data of that bar and meter position
will be deleted. Also, bar2=bar1=bar0=sign=sigd=00 indicates "no corresponding
data" (such as when a figure specified by <event number> do not exist at receiving
the signature map request).
When one data registered by <signature map> and <tempo set map> is declared as
one event, the number of events from head of the tune (the umpteenth event
counted from head of the tune) must be specified. <event number="00"> is the first
event.
00: Off
01: CLK (MIDI CLOCK)
02: MTC
This corresponds to "Midi Sync Out?" of the SETUP menu.
Will be composed of two bytes (Q, P).
Q: 0qqqqqqq (binary) -> <vari data> = "qqqqqqqppppppp" A 14 bit data of X0.1
P: 0qqqqqqq (binary)
attached with a minus symbol.
Vari-pitch must be specified, at +0.1% when MSB (q)=0 (Example: 0000000000001),
and at -0.1% when MSB (q)=1 (Example: 1111111111111).
00: 30nd
01: 29.97nd
02: 29.97df
03: 25
04: 24
05: 30df
Corresponds to selecting "Frame Rate?" of the SETUP menu.
00: 48kHz
01: 44.1kHz
Corresponds to selecting "Sample Rate?" of the SETUP menu.
00: ABS
01: Signature
Corresponds to selecting "MTC Offset Mode?" of the SETUP menu.
00: ABS
01: BAR BEAT
02: MTC
t1, t2 ...... tn
n: Indicates the track number.
tn: Indicates absolute 8 bits of the Audio 16 bit data.
178
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Explanation on the Command/Mode Set
12 22 (<on/off>): loop on/off command
The command for setting the "loop mode on/off" (=ON/OFF of AUTO RTN) of D-160.
Default figure of the loop operation mode is "12=stop" and this cannot be changed.
12 28 (<post locate mode>): post locate command
The command for setting the "post locate mode" (=ON/OFF of AUTO PLAY) of D-160.
It will stop after locating if "post locate mode=12." It will enter play after locating if "post
locate mode=15."
12 2D (<on/off>): auto rec command
The command for setting "auto rec mode on/off" (=ON/OFF of AUTO PUNCH) of D-160.
Upon receiving this command, D-160 will immediately reply the operating condition by
sending "32 2D (<edit message>)".
12 41 (<lock enable>): lock enable command
The command for setting "slave mode on/off" (setup menu) of D-160.
12 42 (<lock mode>): lock mode command
The command for setup of the slave mode (setup menu) when this equipment is set to
"slave mode on."
12 45 (<count><mmc track>) : copy clip command
When this command is received, D-160 will copy (multiple number of tracks can be
copied simultaneously) the sound data, as data for copy paste, from the pre-registered
clipboard-in point to the clipboard-out point in the track specified by <mmc track>.
With completion of copying the data into the clipboard, D-160 will immediately reply
with "32 45 (<edit message=01 (completed)>)".
If copy cannot be executed due to improper figures of the pre-registered clipboard in/
clipboard out points or incorrect track section, the corresponding <edit message> will be
returned.
12 46 (<count=01><repeat count>): copy paste command
12 46 (<count><repeat count><mmc track>): copy paste command
When this command is received, D-160 will paste the sound data which has been copied
into the clipboard, on the same track from the pre-registered auto punch in point as the
starting point for the number of time specified by <repeat count>.
However, if the sound data length in the clipboard is less than 10ms, the specifying the
<repeat count> will be limited to "01."
Also, by specifying <mmc track>, paste can be executed on other tracks in mono (in one
track units) or stereo units (in combinations of tracks 1&2, 3&4, 5&6.......15 & 16).
Since time corresponding to length of the copy clipped sound data is required to complete
the copy paste operation, D-160 immediately replies with "32 46(<edit message=02
(active)>)" after receiving the command.
Successively upon completing the paste operation, "32 46 (<edit message=01
(completed)>)" is transmitted.
If paste cannot be executed due to improper figures of the pre-registered auto punch in
point, insufficient disc capacity, no sound data in the clipboard, etc., the corresponding
<editmessage> will be replied.
12 47 (<count><mmc track>): erase command
When this command is received, D-160 will erase the data (writes in "0" data) in the
section from the pre-registered auto punch in point through auto punch out point in the
track specified by <mmc track>. Since time corresponding to length of the erase section
is required to complete the erase operation, D-160 will immediately reply by "32 47
179
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
(<edit message=02 (active)>)" after receiving the command.
After the completion of erase operation, "32 47 (<edit message=01 (completed)>)" will
be transmitted.
If erase cannot be executed due to improper figures of the pre-registered auto punch in
point/auto punch out point, incorrect track section, etc., the corresponding <edit message>
will be replied.
12 49: clipboard play command
When this command is received, D-160 will playback once from the head of the sound
data copied in the clipboard by the copy clip and move clip commands.
Immediately after receiving the command, D-160 will reply with "32 49 (<edit message=02
(active)><count><mmc track>)." The sound data track number is indicated by (mmc
track>.
Upon completion of playback, "32 49 (<edit message=01 (completed) is sent and clipboard
play is ended. If there is no sound data in the clipboard, "32 49 (<edit message=14 (void
data)>)" will be sent and clipboard play operation will be interrupted.
12 4A: undo command
Upon receiving this command, D-160 will revert to the condition prior to editing copy
paste,erase, move paste, cut, redo operation. With completion of undo operation, D-160
will reply with "32 4A (<edit message=01(completed)>)."
If D-160 is not possible to undo, "32 4A (<edit message=00 (no message)>)" will be
replied.
12 4B: redo command
When this command is received, D-160 will return to the condition prior to undo operation.
With completion of redo operation, D-160 will reply with "32 4B (<edit message=01
(completed)>)."
If D-160 is not possible to redo, "32 4B (<edit message=00 (no message)>)" will be replied.
12 4D (<count><mmc track>): move clip command
When this command is received, D-160 will copy (multiple tracks can be copied
simultaneously) the sound data from the pre-registered clipboard in point to the clipboard
out point, as data for move paste operation.
With completion copying the data into the clipboard, D-160 will immediately reply with
"32 4D (<edit message=01 (completed)>)."
If copy cannot be executed by the reason of pre-registered improper clipboard in/clipboard
out point figures or incorrect track section, etc., the corresponding <edit message> will
be replied.
12 4E (<count=01><repeat count>): move paste command
12 4E (<count><repeat count><mmc track>): move paste command
When this command is received, D-160 will paste the sound data which have been move
clipped in the clipboard, for the number of times specified by <repeat count> on the
same track from the pre-registered auto punch in point as the starting point.
At the same time, the move clipped original sound data will be erased (data "0" is written
in). However, when sound data length in the clipboard is less than 10ms, specifying
the <repeat count> will be limited to "01."
Also, by specifying the <mmc track>, paste operation can be executed on other tracks in
mono (one track unit) or stereo units (tracks 1&2, 3&4, 5&6....... 15&16).
Since time corresponding to length of the move clipped sound data is required to complete
the move paste operation, D-160 will immediately reply with "32 4E (<edit message=02
(active)>)" after receiving the command.
Following completion of the move paste operation, "32 4E (<edit message = 01
(completed)>)" will be sent.
180
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
If paste cannot be executed due to improper figures of the previously registered auto
punch in point, insufficient disc capacity, no sound data is in the clipboard, etc., the
corresponding <edit message> will be replied.
12 4F (<channel><channel>): track exchange command (Exclusive command for FDMS-3.)
When the D-160 receives this command, the track can be exchange between the specified
<channel><channel>. Especially, if the first <channel=0>, then exchange by grouping
will be executed between channel 1-8 and channel 17-24, and if the next byte <channel=0>,
then the exchange will be between channel 9-16 and channel 17-24.
If it cannot be executed for some reason, an error message will be sent back.
12 50: all erase current program command (Exclusive command for FDMS-3.)
When the D-160 receives this command, all audio of the current program will be erased
to return it to the initial state of compiling a new program.
As execution of all erase is completed in a comparatively short time, the D-160 will reply
with "32 50 (<edit message=01 (completed)>)" immediately after completion of exchange.
If it cannot be executed for some reason, an error message will be sent back.
13 3E: product new program command (Exclusive command for FDMS-3.)
When the D-160 receives this command, a new program is compiled and the current
program is transferred to the new program.
As compilation of the new program is comparatively short time, it is replied with "33 3E
(<edit message=01 (completed)>)" immediately upon completion of execution.
If it cannot be executed for some reason, an error message will be sent back.
13 3F: delete current program command (Exclusive command for FDMS-3.)
When the D-160 receives this command, the current program is deleted and succeeding
programs moved up and renumberd. If the deleted program is the only tune existing in
the track, a new program will be made automatically.
As this delete current program is executed in a comparatively short time, "33 3F (<edit
message=01 (completed)>)" will be sent back immediately upon completing the execution.
If it cannot be executed for some reason, an error message will be sent back.
13 41 (<channel><channel>): digital in ch.select command
The audio signal input from SPDIF digital in to assigned to the destination track specified
by <channel>. The first <channel> shown in the command is the SPDIF L channel input,
and the second <channel> the R channel input. "<channel=0> <channel =0>" indicates
the normal analog input.
13 41 (<channel=7F><count><mmc track>): Adat in select command
Channel = 7F indicates that it is Adat In.
Normally, it will be "<count=0>" and all channels will be inputs from Adat In.
If <count=0><mmc track> is indicates, then only the tracks selected will be Adat In inputs.
"<channel=0><channel=0>" indicates the normal analog input.
13 42 (<channel><channel>): digital out ch.select command
The source channel for digital out is selected.
Normally, the first <channel> shown will be the SPDIF L channel data, and the second
<channel> the SPDIF R channel output.
By FDMS-2 (D-80, DMT-8) in particular, the following five types only can be setup.
(<01><02>), (<03><04>), (<05><06>), (<07><08>), (<00><00>). (<00><00>) is the
default setting. By FDMS-3 (D-160), any channel within "1 ~ 16" can be selected.
13 42 (<channel=7F><channel=0>): Adat out select command
In a device which can be switched between SPDIF and Adat, if the first display is
<channel=7F>, then Adat Out can be setup.
181
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
13 43(<program>): program change command
The command for PROGRAM CHANGE of D-160. The present program number can be
changed to the figure indicated by <program>.
13 44 (<on/off>): click on/off command
The command for setting the metronome on/off of D-160. When ON is set, the
metronome signal will be fed to the track 16 output (analog output only) of D-160.
13 46 (<on/off>): Bar/Beat Resolution ON/OFF command
The command for ON/OFF of the bar/beat resolution function of this equipments' current
program.
13 47 (<midi sync>): Midi Sync Out command
The setup command for MIDI Sync Out mode of this equipments' current program.
13 48 (<MTC offset mode>): MTC offset mode command
The setup command for MTC offset mode of this equipments' current program.
13 49 (<count=3> <on/off> <vari data>): Vari pitch command
13 49 (<count=1> <on/off>): Vari pitch command
The command for setting this equipments' vari pitch ON/OFF and pitch data.
Control of ON/OFF only is possible at <count=1> and both ON/OFF and pitch data can be
set at <count=3>.
14 01 (<signature map>): Signature set command
The command for setting the meter of this equipment. If a new data is registered at the
bar position where a data exists, the former data will be written over. When this command
is received, this equipment will reply with "34 00 (<edit message>)." Upon completing
the registeration, <edit message> will reply with "01 (completed)," or with "10 (over
value error)" if registeration is attempted at a non-existing point or an erroneous figure
is used.
14 02 (<tempo set map>): Tempo set command
The command for tempo set of this equipment. If a new data is registered in a bar/meter
where data already exists, the former data will be written over. When this command is
received, this equipment will reply with "34 00 (<edit message>)." Upon completing the
registeration, <edit message> will reply with "01 (completed)," or with "10 (over value
error)" if registeration is attempted at a non-existing point or an erroneous figure is
used.
14 03 : Tempo map all erase command
When this command is received, this equipment will erase all meter and tempo data in
the current program and thus return it to the default state (meter=4/4, tempo: =120).
Also, when this command is received, this equipment will reply with "34 00 (<edit
message>)." Upon completing the registeration, <edit message> will reply with "01
(completed)," or with "10 (over value error)" if registeration is attempted at a non-existing
point or an erroneous figure is used.
14 04 (<mmc time>): Preroll time set command
The command for setting the current program preroll time at the figure indicated by
<mmc time>.
14 06 (<frame rate>): Frame rate set command
The command for setting the current program frame rate at the figure indicated by
<frame rate>.
182
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
14 07 (<fs rate>): Fs rate set command
The command for setting the current program fs (sampling frequency) at the figure
indicated by <fs rate>.
14 08 (<time base>): Time base set command
The command for setting the current program time base of this equipment to that indicated
by <time base>.
The Status Request Command
22 21: loop operation status request
The command inquiring the loop operation mode setup status.
D-160 will reply with "32 21 (<loop op.mode=12>)."
22 22: loop on/off status request
The command inquiring the loop on/off (=ON/OFF of AUTO RETURN) setup status.
D-160 will reply with "32 22 (<on/off>)."
22 28: post locate status request
The command inquiring the post locate mode (ON/OFF of AUTO PLAY) setup status.
D-160 will reply with "32 28 (<post locate mode>)".
22 2D: auto rec status request
The command inquiring the auto rec mode setup status and this is replied by "32 2D
(<edit message>)." Reply from D-160 against this status request will be either one of the
following:
<edit message> =05: Possible to undo rehearsal mode.
=06: Possible to undo take mode.
=72: off
22 41: lock status request
The command inquiring the slave on/off setup status and the lock status.
D-160 will reply with "32 41 (<lock status>)."
22 42 : lock mode status request
The command for inquiring the lock mode setup status and this is replied with "32 42
<lock mode>."
22 45: copy clip status request
The command inquiring the clipboard condition. If there is a copy paste data in the
clipboard, D-160 will reply with "32 45 (<edit message=01>)." If data in the clipboard is
for move paste or there is no valid data in it, it will reply will "32 45 (<edit message=14
(void data)>)."
22 46: copy paste status request
The command inquiring execution status of copy paste editing.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply with either "32 46 (<edit message=02>
<mmc time>)" or "32 46 (<edit message=00>)." <mmc time> indicates unprocessed time
until completion.
22 47: erase status request
The command inquiring execution status of erase.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply by either "32 47 (<edit message=02>
<mmc time>)" or "32 47 (<edit message=00>)." <mmc time> indicates unprocessed time
until completion.
183
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
22 4D: move clip status request
The command inquiring the clipboard status. If there is a move paste data on the clipboard,
D-160 will reply with "32 4D (<edit message=01>)." If data in the clipboard is for copy
paste or there is no valid data on it, "32 4D (<edit message=14 (void data)>)" will be
replied.
22 4E: move paste status request
The command inquiring the move paste execution status.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply with "32 4E (<edit message=02><mmc
time>)" or "32 4E (<edit message=00>)." <mmc time> indicates unprocessed time until
completion.
23 41: digital in channel status request
23 41: adat in channel status request
The command inquiring the digital in channel setup status.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply with "33 41 (<channel><channel>)" or
"33 41 (<channel=7F><count><mmc track>)."
23 42: digital out channel status request
23 42: adat out channel status request
The inquiring the digital out channel setup status.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply with "33 42 (<channel><channel>)" or
"33 42 (<channel=7F><channel=0>)."
23 43: program status request
The command inquiring the presently operating program number.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply with "33 43 (<program>)."
23 44: click on/off status request
The command inquiring the metronome on/off status of D-160.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply with "33 44 (<on/off>)."
23 45: level status request
The command inquiring the present output level data of the 1~16 tracks. In D-160 as the
level data is updated about every 40msec., inquiry in 40msec. units is effective.
When this command is received, D-160 will reply with "33 45 (<count=10><level data>)."
23 46: resolution status request
The command for inquiring the resolution on/off setup status.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "33 46 <on/off>."
23 47: midi sync out status request
The command for inquiring on status of the midi sync out setup condition.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "33 47 <midi sync>."
23 48: MTC offset mode status request
The command for inquiring the MTC offset mode setup status. When this command is
received, this equipment replies with "33 48 <MTC offset mode>."
23 49: vari pitch status request
The command for inquiring status of vari pitch on/off and vari pitch data. When this
command is received, this equipment replies with "33 49 (<count=3> <on/off> <vari
data>)."
184
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
24 01 (<event number>): signature map request
The command for inquiring the meter setup. Order number counting from the leading
tune must be specified in the event number (The first event is expressed as "event
number=00." When this command is received, this equipment replies with "34 01
(<signature map>)."
24 02 (<event number>): Tempo set map request
The command for inquiring tempo data. Order number from the leading tune must be
specified in the event number (The first event is expressed as "event number=00."
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "34 02 (<tempo set map>)."
24 04: preroll time status request
The command for inquiring the preroll time setup status.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "34 04 (<mmc time>)."
24 05: remain time request
The command for inquiring the disk remaining time which is recordable.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "34 05 (<mmc time>)."
24 06: frame rate status request
The command for inquiring the frame rate setup status.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "34 06 (<frame rate>)."
24 07: fs rate status request
The command for inquiring the fs (sampling frequency) setup status.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "34 07 (<fs rate>)."
24 08: time base status
The command for inquiring the setup status of the time base shown in the display.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with "3408 (<time base>)."
Explanation on the Status Reply
32 21 (<loop op.mode>): loop operation mode status repry
This is the reply against the "22 21" loop operation status request command.
<loop op.mode=12> is the only status data of D-160 and any other setting is not
permissible.
32 22 (<on/off>): loop on/off status reply
This is the reply against "22 22" loop on/off status request.
32 28 (<post locate mode>): post locate mode status reply
This is the reply against "22 28" post locate status request. <post locate mode=12 or 15>
is the only status data of D-160 and any other setting is not permissible.
32 2D (<edit message>): auto rec status reply
This is the reply against the "12 2D" auto rec command or the "22 2D" auto rec status
request.
32 41 (<lock status>): lock status repry
This is the reply against the "22 41" lock status request.
32 42 (<lock mode>): lock mode status reply
This the reply against the "22 42" lock mode status request.
185
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
32 45 (<edit message>): copy clip status reply
This is the reply against the "12 45" copy clip command or the "22 45" copy clip status
request.
32 46 (<edit message>): copy paste status reply
32 46 (<edit message><mmc time>): copy paste status reply
This is the reply against the "12 46" copy paste command or the "22 46" copy paste
status request. <mmc time> indicates the unprocessed time until completion of copy
paste editing.
32 47 (<edit message>): erase status reply
32 47 (<edit message><mmc time>): erase status reply
This is the reply against "12 47" erase command or "22 47" erase status request.
32 49 (<edit message><count><mmc track>): clipboard play status reply
This is the reply against the "12 49" clipboard play command. If there is no sound data
in the clipboard, "32 49"(<edit message=14 (void data)>)" will be replied. <mmc track>
indicates the sound data track number.
32 4A (<edit message>): undo status reply
This is the reply against the "12 4A" undo command. Either <edit message=01 (completed)
or <edit message=14 (void data)> will be replied.
32 4B (<edit message>): redo status reply
This is the reply against the "12 4B" redo command. Either <edit message=01 (completed)>
or <edit message=14 (void data)> will be replied.
32 4D (<edit message>): move clip status reply
This is the reply against the "12 4D" move clip command or "22 4D" move clip status
request.
32 4E (<edit message>): move paste status reply
32 4E (<edit message><mmc time>): move paste status reply
The reply against the "12 4E" move paste command or the "22 4E" move paste status
request. <mmc time> indicates the unprocessed time until completion of move paste
editing.
32 4F (<edit message>): track exchange status reply
This is the reply against the "12 4F" track exchange command.
33 3E (<edit message>): product new program status reply
This is the reply against the "13 3E" product new program command.
33 41 (<channel> <channel>): digital in channel status reply
33 41 (<channel=7F> <count> <mmc track>): adat in status reply
This is the reply against the "23 41" digital in ch. st. request.
The first <channel> indicates the track number assigned to the L channel of the digital
audio signal (S/P DIF) from the DATA IN connector, and the second <channel> the track
number assigned to the R channel. If digital in is set to "Adat," the reply for the first
<channel> will be 7F and then <count> <mmc track>, in this order.
In the <mmc track>, the track bit map which is the Adat input, is expressed by "1" (In this
equipment, the reply will all be "1", or in other words, all tracks will be collectively
converted to Adat inputs or analog inputs).
186
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
33 42 (<channel> <channel>): digital out channel status reply
33 42 (<channel=7F> <channel=00>): adat out status reply
This is the reply against the "23 42" digital out ch. st. request.
The first <channel> indicates the track number assigned to the L channel output of the
digital audio signal (S/P DIF) from the DATA OUT connector, and the second <channel>
the track number as signed to the R channel output. If digital out is set to "Adat," the
reply for the first <channel> will be 7F and that for the second <channel> will be 00.
33 43 (<program>): program status reply
This is the reply against the "23 43" program status request.
<program> indicates the presently operating program number.
33 44 (<on/off>): click status reply
This is the reply against the "23 44" click status request.
It indicates the on/off setting of the metronome function.
33 45 (<count=10><level data>): level status reply
This is the reply against the "23 45" level status request and it indicates the present track
1~16 output level data.
In D-160, as level data is updated 40msec., it will be effective if inquiry is made in 40msec.
units.
33 46 (<on/off>): bar/beat resolution status reply
This is the reply against "23 46" bar/beat resolution status request.
33 47 (<midi sync>): midi sync out status reply
This is the reply against "23 47" midi sync out status request.
33 48 (<MTC offset mode>): MTC offset mode status reply
This is the reply against "23 48" MTC offset mode status request.
33 49 (<count=3> <on/off> <vari data>): vari pitch status reply
This is the reply against "23 49" vari pitch status request and is indicating the vari pitch
function on/off and the present vari pitch setup figure.
34 01 (<signature map>): signature map status reply
This is the reply against "24 01" (<event number>) signature map request.
The signature map of the event indicated by the <event number> is replied.
If there is no event specified (Example: Such as when <event number=5> is requested
even though there is only 5 meters registered), it will be replied with all figures at 00 of
the <signature map>.
34 02 (<tempo set map>): tempo set map status reply
The reply against "24 02"(<event number>)tempo set map request.
Tempo set map of the event indicated by the <event number> is replied.
If there is no event specified (Example: Such as when <event number=20> is requested
although only 10 is setup for tempo), it will be replied with all figures at 00 of the
<signature map>.
34 04 (<mmc time>): preroll set map status reply
This is the reply against "34 04" preroll time status request and this is replied with the
presently set preroll time.
187
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
34 05 (<mmc time>): remain time reply
This is the reply against "24 05" remain time request, and is replied with the recordable
disc remaining time.
34 06 (<frame rate>): frame rate status reply
This is the reply against "24 06" frame rate status request, and is replied with the presently
set frame rate.
34 07 (<fs rate>): fs rate status reply
This is the reply against "24 07" fs rate status request, and is replied with the presently
set fs (sampling frequency).
34 08 (<time base>): time base status reply
This is the reply against "24 08" time base status request, and is replied with the presently
set time base (in the display).
188
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Maintenance
Cleaning the exterior
* For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth.
For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the
dirt off. Then polish with a dry cloth.
Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will damage the
printing and finish of the exterior.
Specifications
Input/Output
INPUT (1 ~ 8)
Connector
: RCA pin jack (X 8)
Input impedance : 10kΩ or more
Input level
: -10dBV
OUTPUT (1 ~ 16)
Connector
: RCA pin jack (X 16)
Load impedance : 10kΩ or more
Output level
: -10dBV
DATA IN/OUT
Connector
Format
MIDI IN/OUT/THRU
Connector
Format
: Optical (X 4)
: (1) IEC 958 Part 2 (=S/P DIF)
: (2) Alesis Proprietry Multi Channel Optical Interface
(Either (1) or (2) is selected in the Setup mode.)
: DIN 5PIN (X 3)
: MIDI standard
SCSI
Connector
PUNCH IN/OUT
Connector
REMOTE
Connector
:D-sub 25 pin (X1)
: ø6mm Phone jack (X 1)
(An optional FOOT SW Model 8051 can be
connected.)
: D-sub 15PIN (X 1)
Recording/Reproducing
Recording medium
: 3.5 inch, hard disk x 1 (E-IDE type),
(Optional hard disk)
Recording format
: FDMS-3*
Save/Load format
: FDIO-1 Ver.2**
Sampling frequency
: 44.1kHz/48kHz
Quantization
: 16-bit linear (Non expanded)
A/D: 18-bit 64-time, over sampling, Delta-Sigma
D/A: 20-bit 128-time, over sampling, Delta-Sigma
189
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Recording time
: approx. 240 minutes (at Optional Model 9041/
44.1kHz/Mono track recording)
No. of recording track
Program No.
Crossfade
: 16 + 8 Additional tracks
: maximum 99 tunes
: 10msec.
Recording/reproducing
frequency
: 20Hz ~ 20kHz
Dynamic range
: 90dB
Dimensions
: 482 (W) X 140.5 (H) X 381 (D) mm, 3U size
* Including highest protrusion.
Weight
: approx. 8.0kg (with REMOTE controller)
Power supply
: 120VAC 60Hz
: 230V~ 50/60Hz
Power consumption
: approx. 32W
General
* Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement.
* "Adat" and the
symbol are trademarks of Alesis Corporation.
* FDMS-3: Fostex Disk Management System-3.
* FDIO-1 Ver.2: Fostex Data In Out-1 Ver.2
190
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
INDEX
[A]
About copy rights
8
About damages
8
Auto play/Auto return key
Auto punch mode ON/OFF key
Auto punch in key
16
Auto punch out key
16
Auto return start key
15
Auto return end key
16
ABS time display
26
ABS
32, 38
Audio file
33
Additional track
36
Analog recording
53
Auto play mode
70
Auto return mode 70
Auto repeat mode 74
Auto punch in/out 76
Erasing
96, 99, 101
Entering Setup mode
[F]
15
20
Fast forward button
Formatting the hard disk
Formatting a SCSI disk
Frame rate setting
22
39, 43, 171
109
151
Hold/Digit move key
Hard disk operation LED
Hard disk recording
Hard disk
39
18
13, 23
32
[H]
[I]
Introduction
6
Input jack
23
Input monitor
37
Installing a hard disk
Inquiry message list
[B]
Basic connections
Backup
111
46
39
173
[J]
[C]
Jog dial
Clipboard in key
15
Clipboard out key 15
Copy key
20
Connecting a digital mixer
65
Changing the stored the start/end point 73
Copy and Pasting
88
Copying
86
Copy and paste undo/redo
90
compatibility with D-90, D-80 ver2 etc. 116
18
[ L]
Locate key
21
Load Error ! display
30
Lock/unlock key
40
Locate function
67
Loading the data
102, 106
[M]
Main features
9
Meter display
25
MIDI IN connector 24
MIDI OUT connector
24
MIDI THRU connector
24
MTC display
27
MTC 38
Mixdown
58
Moving
91
Move & pasting
93
Move & paste undo/redo 95
MIDI clock synchronization system
MTC synchronization system
120
Multitrack system by the slave mode
Multitrack system using a DMT-8 V2.0
Metronome function ON/OFF
148
MIDI SYNC OUT setting
150
MTC frame rate setting
151
MTC OFFSET time setting
152
MTC OFFSET MODE setting
153
MIDI device ID setting
161
MIDI implementation chart
172
MMC command list
173
Maintenance
189
[D]
Display section
25
Dust cap
8, 39
DISK REMAIN display
26
Disk Error ! display
30
Disable REC ! display
30
Disconnect SCSI display
31
Default setting on the D-160
Deleting program 51
Digital recording
60
Display select key 17
DATA IN connector
23
DATA OUT connector
24
137
48
[E]
Erase key
19
Execute/Yes key
17
Exit/No key
17
Event Over ! display
30
Error 35 display
31
Error 36 display
31
Event
33
Extention cable
44
Editing and storing the start/end point 72
191
117
123
133
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Slave mode setting
154
Slave mode type setting
155
Sampling Frequency setting
Specifications
189
[N]
Notes about power supply 6
Notes on handling the hard disk 7
Notes on the setup location
7
Notes on repair
8
Notes on using detachable controller
No disk IDE display
31
[T]
8
Timebase
38
Track swapping
142
Time signature setting
Tempo setting
145
[O]
Over ! display
Overdubbing
29
57
143
[U]
Undo key
19
Un Format ! display
30
Undo/Redo of Auto Punch In/Out
80, 84
Undo/Redo the paste operation 90, 95
Undo/Redo the erase operation 98, 100
[P]
Precautions
6
Paste key
20
Play button
22
Punch in/out jack 23
Power switch
13
Power cable
24
Panel A, B
24
Preset display
25
Program change
28, 35, 50, 54
Ping-pong recording
59
Punch In/Out
75
Punch In/Out recording using a foot switch 81
Punch In/Out rehearsal mode 78, 82
Punch In/Out take mode 79, 83
Program title setting
147
Program delete
147
Preroll time setting 149
[V]
Vari pitch key
19
Void data ! display 29
Void In Point ! display
Void Out Point ! display
Vari pitch function
[W]
[R]
Record track select key
Redo key
19
Recall key
19
Record button
21
Rewind button
22
Repro monitor
37
Real track
36
REMAIN
32
Recording/playback
Record protect setting
162
14
46
156
[S]
Shift key
15
Store key
18
Shuttle dial 18
Stop button 21
SCSI connector
24
Switching the time base display 27
Select Track ! display
29
Setting a program
49
Setting a sampling rate
52, 162
Storing memory data
67
Setting the auto return start/end point 71
Storing the punch in/out point 76
Saving data
102, 104, 108, 168
Song
111
Slave mode
123, 127, 130
SETUP mode
137
192
Warning message
29
29
29
56
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
Declaration of EC Directive
This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance concerning
the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member nation's
ordinance connecting electric equipment designed to be used within
the specified voltage range.
The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment
The affect of the European Specification EN50082-1 (coexistence of
electromagnetic waves - common immunity specification) on this equipment are
as shown below.
* In the electrical fast transient/burst requirements, radiate electromagnetic
field requirements and static electricity discharging environment, this could
be affected by generation of noise in some cases. The display content
could also differ from actual figures.
Please comply to the precautions below to make this equipment compatible with
European Specification EN50082-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves common immunity specification).
<NOTE>
Caps are installed on the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT/THRU and SCSI
connectors. The purpose of these caps are to prevent static electricity from
affecting this equipment. Do not remove these caps except when using the
MIDI IN/OUT/THRU and SCSI connectors.
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE
* Including non-EU countries.
* underlined: contracted distributors (as of May, 1997)
<AUSTRIA>
<THE NETHERLANDS>
NAME: ATEC Audio-u. Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH.
ADD: Im Winkel 5, A-2325 Velm, Austria
TEL: (+43) 2234-74004, FAX: (+43) 2234-74074
NAME: IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B. V.
ADD: Kuiperbergweg 20, 1101 AG Amsterdam, The
Netherlands
TEL: (+31) 20-697-2121
FAX: (+31) 20-697-4201
<BELGIUM>
NAME: EML N. V.
ADD: Bijvennestraat 1A, B3500 Hasselt, Belgium
TEL: (+32) 11-232355, FAX: (+32) 11-232172
<NORWAY>
NAME: Siv. Ing. Benum A/S
ADD: P. O. Box 145 Vinderen, 0319 Oslo 3, Norway
TEL: (+47) 22-139900, FAX: (+47) 22-148259
<DENMARK>
NAME: SC Sound ApS
ADD: Malervej 2, DK-2630 Taastrup, Denmark
TEL: (+45) 4399-8877, FAX: (+45) 4399-8077
<PORTUGAL>
NAME: Caius - Tecnologias Audio e Musica, Lda.
ADD: Rua de Santa Catarina, 131 4000 Porto, Portugal
TEL: (+351) 2-2084456/325400
FAX: (+351) 2-314760
<FINLAND>
NAME: Noretron Audio
ADD: Tonttumuorinkuja 4, FIN-02200 Espoo, Finland
TEL: (+358) 0-5259330, FAX: (+358) 0-52593352
<SPAIN>
NAME: Multitracker, S. A.
ADD: C/Garcilaso No.9, Madrid 28010, Spain
TEL: (+34) 1-4470700, 1-4470898
FAX: (+34) 1-5930716
<FRANCE>
NAME: Musikengro
ADD: ZAC de Folliouses, B. P. 609, 01706 Les Echets,
France
TEL: (+33) 72 26 27 00, FAX: (+33) 72 26 27 01
<SWEDEN>
NAME: TTS Tal & Ton Studioteknik AB
ADD: Gelbgjutarevagen 4, S-171 48 Solna, Sweden
TEL: (+46) 8-7340750, FAX: (+46) 8-824476
<GERMANY>
NAME: Studiosound & Music GmbH
ADD: Scheppe Gewissegasse 8, D-35039 Marburg,
Germany
TEL: (+49) 6421-12071, FAX: (+49) 6421-15522
<SWITZERLAND>
NAME: Audio Bauer Pro AG
ADD: Bernerstrasse-Nord 182, CH-8064 Zurich,
Switzerland
TEL: (+41) 1-4323230, FAX: (+41) 1-4326558
<GREECE>
NAME: Bon Studio S. A.
ADD: 6 Zaimi Street, Exarchia, 106.83 Athens, Greece
TEL: (+30) 1-3809605-8, 3302059
FAX: (+30) 1-3845755
<UK>
NAME: SCV London
ADD: 3A 6-24 Southgate Road, London N1 3JJ,
England, UK
TEL: (+44) 171-923-1892, FAX: (+44) 171-241-3644
<ICELAND>
NAME: I. D. elrf. electronic Ltd.
ADD: ARMULA38 108 REYKJAVIK ICELAND
TEL: (+354) 588 5010, FAX: (+354) 588 5011
<ITALY>
NAME: Recoton Italia Srl.
ADD:V. 1 Maggio, N 18, 40050 Quarto Inferiore, (BO)
Italy
TEL: (+39) 51-768576, FAX: (+39) 51-768336
194
D-160 Owner's Manual (MMC/FEX List/Maintenance/Specifications)
195
FOSTEX CORPORATION
3-2-35 Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo, Japan 196-0021
FOSTEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA
15431, Blackburn Ave., Norwalk, CA 90650, U. S. A.
©PRINTED IN JAPAN DEC.1998 8288 392 300 FX
Download PDF

advertising